RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference RAN6 1 PDF

RAN
6.1
Network Optimization Parameter Reference
Issue
01
Date
2007-08-30
Part Number
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For any
assistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Copyright 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
RAN
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Power Control Parameters........................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters...................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part.....................................................1-4
1.1.2 PRACH Initial Transmit Power Constant..............................................................................................1-5
1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step.....................................................................................................................1-6
1.1.4 Maximum Preamble Retransmit Attempts.............................................................................................1-6
1.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop......................................................................................................................1-7
1.1.6 Default DPCCH Transmit Power Constant............................................................................................1-8
1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power of the UE.........................................................................1-8
1.1.8 RRC/HHO Process SRB Delay............................................................................................................1-10
1.1.9 RRC/HHO Process DPCCH Power Control Preamble Length............................................................1-11
1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters............................................................................................................1-11
1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link....................................................................1-13
1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link.....................................................................1-14
1.2.3 Cell PCPICH Transmit Power..............................................................................................................1-15
1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-16
1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-16
2 Handover Parameters................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters............................................................................................................2-2
2.1.1 Softer Handover Combination Indication Switch..................................................................................2-4
2.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient.............................................................................2-4
2.1.3 Weighting Factor....................................................................................................................................2-6
2.1.4 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds.......................................................................................................2-7
2.1.5 Event 1F Absolute Thresholds...............................................................................................................2-8
2.1.6 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover.....................................................................................................2-9
2.1.7 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover...........................................................................................2-11
2.1.8 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover...................................................................................2-13
2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Thresholds Flag............................................................................................2-14
2.1.10 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-14
2.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters..........................................................................................................2-15
2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode.......................................................................................2-19
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Contents
2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Item.....................................................................................................2-20

2.2.3 Inter-Frequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter Coefficients..................................................................2-22
2.2.4 Frequency Weighting Factor................................................................................................................2-23
2.2.5 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover................................................................................2-24
2.2.6 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover...............................................................2-25
2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds....................................................2-26
2.2.8 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds...................................................2-27
2.2.9 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage....................................................2-28
2.2.10 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover.......................................2-29
2.2.11 Inter-Frequency Measurement Minimum Access Thresholds...........................................................2-30
2.2.13 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Algorithm Switches...............................................................................2-32
2.2.14 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Threshold Choice............................................................2-33
2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measure Timer Length............................................................................................2-34
2.3 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.................................................................2-34
2.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficients...................................................................................2-39
2.3.2 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode................................................................................................2-39
2.3.3 Frequency Weighting Factor................................................................................................................2-41
2.3.4 Inter-RAT Period Report Interval........................................................................................................2-42
2.3.5 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-42
2.3.6 Inter-RAT Measurement Quantity.......................................................................................................2-43
2.3.7 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds.............................................................2-44
2.3.8 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds............................................................2-45
2.3.9 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds............................................................................................2-46
2.3.10 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover..............................................................................2-47
2.3.11 Hysteresis Related to Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover............................................................2-48
2.3.12 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cell.............................................................................................2-49
2.3.13 Time to Trigger for Non-verified GSM Cell......................................................................................2-50
2.3.14 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT Handover..............................................................................................2-51
2.3.16 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover...............................................2-52
2.3.17 Inter-RAT Measure Timer Length.....................................................................................................2-53
2.4 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.........................................................2-54
2.4.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switches................................................................................................2-56
2.4.2 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient....................................................................................2-57
2.4.3 Hysteresis of Event 3C.........................................................................................................................2-57
2.4.4 Time to Trigger for Event 3C...............................................................................................................2-59
2.4.5 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-59
2.4.6 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds.........................................................2-60
2.4.7 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT Handover................................................................................................2-61
2.4.8 Inter-RAT Handover Max Attempt Times...........................................................................................2-62
2.4.9 Inter-RAT Measure Timer Length.......................................................................................................2-62
ii
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Contents
2.5 Blind Handover Management Parameters.....................................................................................................2-63

2.5.1 Blind Handover Flag............................................................................................................................2-64
2.5.2 Blind Handover Priority.......................................................................................................................2-65
2.6 Cell Selection and Reselection......................................................................................................................2-66
2.6.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters....................................................................................................2-69
2.6.2 Load Level Offsets...............................................................................................................................2-70
2.6.3 Minimum Quality Criterion.................................................................................................................2-71
2.6.4 Minimum Access Level.......................................................................................................................2-72
2.6.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds........................................................................................................2-72
2.6.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time................................................................................................................2-73
2.6.7 Minimum Access Level for Inter-RAT Cell........................................................................................2-74
2.6.8 2G Idle Mode MS's Searching for 3G Cell Signal Level Threshold....................................................2-75
2.6.9 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Offset.............................................................................................2-76
2.6.10 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Threshold.....................................................................................2-77
2.7 Neighbor Management Parameters...............................................................................................................2-77
2.7.1 Neighbor Priority Flag.........................................................................................................................2-78
2.7.2 Neighbor Priority..................................................................................................................................2-78
3 Admission Control Parameters................................................................................................3-1

3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Service..............................................................................3-5
3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch........................................................................................................3-5
3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number...........................................................................................................3-7
3.4 Downlink Total NonHSDPA Equivalent User Number.................................................................................3-8
3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service...............................................................................3-8
3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service........................................................................3-9
3.7 AMR Voice Downlink Threshold for Conversation Service........................................................................3-10
3.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversation Service.................................................................3-11
3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services............................................................................................................3-12
3.10 Downlink Threshold for Other Services.....................................................................................................3-13
3.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold.....................................................................................................3-14
3.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold.................................................................................................3-15
3.13 Downlink Total Power Threshold...............................................................................................................3-16
3.14 Uplink Handover Credit Reserved SF.........................................................................................................3-17
3.15 Downlink Handover Credit and Channel Code Resource Reserved SF.....................................................3-17
3.16 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load.......................................................................................3-18
4 Load Control Parameters..........................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................................4-2
4.1.1 Uplink and Downlink LDR Algorithm Switches...................................................................................4-6
4.1.2 LDR Period Timer Length.....................................................................................................................4-7
4.1.3 Uplink and Downlink LDR Trigger Thresholds and Release Thresholds.............................................4-8
4.1.4 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions.........................................................................................................4-9
4.1.5 Uplink/Downlink LDR Action Handing User Number.......................................................................4-10
4.1.6 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Load Space Thresholds........................4-13
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
iii
RAN
Contents
4.1.7 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Maximum Band Width.........................4-13
4.1.8 Cell SF Reserved Threshold.................................................................................................................4-14
4.1.9 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshods...........................................................................4-15
4.1.10 LDR Code Priority Indicator..............................................................................................................4-16
4.1.11 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold............................................................................4-16
4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters...........................................................................4-17
4.2.1 Uplink and Downlink OLC Algorithm Switches.................................................................................4-19
4.2.2 OLC Period Timer Length...................................................................................................................4-20
4.2.3 Uplink and Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold..............................................4-21
4.2.4 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times.......................................................................4-22
4.2.5 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restrict RAB Number................................................................4-22
4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Timer Length And Recover Timer Length........................4-23
4.2.7 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Coefficient..........................................................................4-24
4.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Release RAB Number......................................................................................4-24
5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters.......................................................................................5-1

5.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters......................................................................................................5-2
5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate...........................................................................................5-4
5.1.3 UpLink and Downlink BE traffic DCH decision threshold...................................................................5-5
5.1.4 DL Streaming Threshold on HSDPA.....................................................................................................5-6
5.1.5 DL BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA....................................................................................................5-6
5.1.6 UL BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA....................................................................................................5-7
5.1.7 UL Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA.........................................................................................5-7
5.1.8 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode................................................................................... 5-8
5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control Parameters.................................................................................... 5-8
5.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold.......................................................................................................................5-10
5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold......................................................................................................................5-11
5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A....................................................................................................................5-12
5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B....................................................................................................................5-12
5.2.5 Pending Time after Trigger Event 4A..................................................................................................5-13
5.2.6 Pending time after trigger Event 4B.....................................................................................................5-14
5.2.7 Uplink and Downlink DCCC Rate Thresholds....................................................................................5-15
5.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Middle Rate Thresholds...................................................................................5-15
5.2.9 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels...........................................................................................5-16
5.2.10 Low activity bitrate threshold............................................................................................................5-17
5.3 Link Stability Parameters..............................................................................................................................5-17
5.3.1 Event Ea Relative Threshold................................................................................................................5-18
5.3.2 Event Eb Relative Threshold................................................................................................................5-19
5.3.3 Uplink Full Coverage Rate...................................................................................................................5-19
5.3.4 Downlink Full Coverage Rate..............................................................................................................5-20
5.4 State Transfer Parameters..............................................................................................................................5-21
5.4.1 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer................................................................................................5-22
iv
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Contents
5.4.2 DCH to FACH / FACH to PCH State Transition Traffic 4B Threshold..............................................5-23

5.4.3 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer.................................................................................................5-23
5.4.4 Cell ReSelection Timer........................................................................................................................5-24
5.4.5 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold............................................................................................5-25
5.4.6 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger................................................................................................5-25
5.5 PS Inactive.....................................................................................................................................................5-26
5.5.1 Interactive Service T1..........................................................................................................................5-27
5.5.2 Interactive Service T2..........................................................................................................................5-28
5.5.3 Background Service T1........................................................................................................................5-28
5.5.4 Background Service T1........................................................................................................................5-29
5.5.5 IMS Service T1....................................................................................................................................5-30
5.5.6 IMS Service T2....................................................................................................................................5-30
5.6 RLC Retransmission Monitor Algorithm Parameters...................................................................................5-31
5.6.1 Time to Start Re-TX Monitor...............................................................................................................5-32
5.6.2 Re-Tx Monitor Period..........................................................................................................................5-33
5.6.3 Retransmission Filter Coefficient.........................................................................................................5-34
5.6.4 Event A threshold.................................................................................................................................5-34
5.6.5 Event A Time to Trigger......................................................................................................................5-35
5.6.6 Event A Pending Time after Trigger....................................................................................................5-35
5.6.7 Event A Report Period.........................................................................................................................5-36
5.6.8 Event B Threshold................................................................................................................................5-36
5.6.9 Event B Time to Trigger......................................................................................................................5-37
5.6.10 Event B Pending Time after Trigger..................................................................................................5-38
6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters.............................................................................................6-1

6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters..................................................................................................6-2
6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power.............................................................................................................6-3
6.1.2 Cell PCPICH Transmit Power................................................................................................................6-4
6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-4
6.1.4 BCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-5
6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-6
6.1.6 PCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.7 PICH Transmit Power............................................................................................................................6-7
6.1.8 AICH Transmit Power...........................................................................................................................6-8
6.2 Paging Parameters...........................................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient.......................................................................................................................6-9
6.2.2 Number of Paging Retransmit..............................................................................................................6-10
6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters...............................................................................................................6-11
6.3.1 T300 and N300.....................................................................................................................................6-11
6.4 Synchronization Parameters..........................................................................................................................6-12
6.4.1 Number of Successive In-sync Indications..........................................................................................6-14
6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-sync Indications...................................................................................6-14
6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration.....................................................................................................6-15
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Contents
6.4.4 N312 and T312.....................................................................................................................................6-16

6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313.........................................................................................................................6-17
6.5 Location Update Parameters.........................................................................................................................6-17
6.5.1 Periodic Location Update Timer..........................................................................................................6-18
6.6 User Priority Related Parameters..................................................................................................................6-18
6.6.1 User Priority of Allocation/Retension Priority 1~14...........................................................................6-19
6.6.2 Integrate Priority Configured Reference..............................................................................................6-20
6.6.3 Indicator of Carrier Type Priority........................................................................................................6-21
7 HSDPA Parameters....................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters........................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 HS-DPCCH Power Management Parameters........................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Total Power of HSDPA and Measurement Power Offset Constant.....................................................7-10
7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Algorithm Parameters......................................................................7-12
7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Distribution Mode.........................................................................................7-13
7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes.............................................................................................................7-13
7.2.3 Number of Maximum HS-PDSCH Codes...........................................................................................7-14
7.2.4 Number of Minimum HS-PDSCH Codes............................................................................................7-14
7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes................................................................................................................7-15
7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters..................................................................................................7-16
7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length.....................................................................................................7-16
7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Switch of Channel Types Parameters..................................................................7-18
7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length.....................................................................................................................7-19
7.4.2 Timer Length of D2H Intra-Handover.................................................................................................7-19
7.4.3 Timer Length of D2H Inter-Handover.................................................................................................7-20
7.4.4 Timer Length of Multi-Carrier Handover............................................................................................7-21
7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA............................................................................7-21
7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Algorithm.........................................................................................................7-22
7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users of NodeB....................................................................................................7-23
7.5.2 UL HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor...........................................................................................................7-24
7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold......................................................................................................7-24
7.5.4 HSDPA Best Effort PBR Threshold....................................................................................................7-25
7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number........................................................................................................7-25
8 HSUPA Parameters....................................................................................................................8-1
8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.......................................................................................8-2
8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor...................................................................................................8-2
8.1.2 Target Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio...................................................................8-3
8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Algorithm...........................................................................................................8-4
8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number.......................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.2 DL HSUPA Reserved Factor ................................................................................................................ 8-5
8.2.3 NodeB Maximum HSUPA User Number..............................................................................................8-6
9 MBMS Parameters.....................................................................................................................9-1
vi
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Contents
9.1 MBMS Admission and Load Control Parameters...........................................................................................9-2

9.1.1 Maximum Transmit Power of the FACH...............................................................................................9-3
9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest Priority................................9-4
9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest Priority.................................9-5
9.1.4 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power..................................................................................9-5
9.1.5 MBMS Preempt Algorithm Switch........................................................................................................9-6
9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters....................................................................................................................9-7
9.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch...........................................................................................................................9-7
10 Algorithm Switches...............................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in RNC.....................................................................................10-2
10.1.1 Channel Algorithm Switches.............................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switches...........................................................................................................10-6
10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches.................................................................................................10-11
10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switches...............................................................................................................10-13
10.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches................................................................................................................10-15
10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches...........................................................................................................................10-16
10.2.1 Cell Algorithm Switches..................................................................................................................10-16
10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch ................................................................................10-18
10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch.............................................................................10-19
10.3 Other Algorithm Switches.........................................................................................................................10-20
10.3.1 Iub CAC Algorithm Switches..........................................................................................................10-20
10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch....................................................................10-20
10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication.......................................................10-21
10.3.4 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Indication......................................................................10-22
10.3.5 FACH Measurement Indicator ........................................................................................................10-22
11 Transmission Resource Management Parameters...........................................................11-1

11.1 Transmission Common Parameters.............................................................................................................11-2
11.1.1 AAL2 Path Type................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 IP Path Type.......................................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.3 Per-Hop Behavior...............................................................................................................................11-3
11.2 Iub Admission Control Parameters.............................................................................................................11-4
11.2.1 Reserved Bandwidth for Forward/Backward Handover....................................................................11-4
11.3 Iub Congestion Control Parameters............................................................................................................11-5
11.3.1 Forward/Backward Congestion Threshold.........................................................................................11-8
11.3.2 Forward/Backward Congestion Clear Threshold...............................................................................11-9
11.3.3 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch......................................................................11-9
11.3.4 Timer Length for Iub Bandwidth Restriction Service Rate Reduction............................................11-10
11.3.5 Iub Congestion Factors.....................................................................................................................11-11
12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT............................................................................12-1

12.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters...............................................................................................................12-2
12.1.1 HSDPA Bandwidth Adjustment Switch............................................................................................12-2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
vii
RAN
Contents
12.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface................................................................................12-3

12.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface.............................................................................................12-4
12.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................12-5
12.2.1 Resource Allocate Method.................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.2 Scheduling Method............................................................................................................................12-9
12.2.3 Maximum Retransmission Count.....................................................................................................12-10
12.2.4 Power Margin...................................................................................................................................12-10
12.2.5 HS-SCCH Power Control Method...................................................................................................12-11
12.2.6 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power..........................................................................12-12
12.2.7 Target HS-SCCH FER.....................................................................................................................12-12
12.2.8 Initial BLER of Data Transfer .........................................................................................................12-13
12.2.9 Resource Limiting Switch................................................................................................................12-14
12.2.10 HSDPA Dynamic Code Switch......................................................................................................12-14
12.2.11 16QAM Switch..............................................................................................................................12-15
12.2.12 CQI Filter Alpha.............................................................................................................................12-16
12.2.13 GBR for SPI...................................................................................................................................12-16
12.2.14 Weight for SPI................................................................................................................................12-18
12.2.15 Resource Limiting Ratio for SPI....................................................................................................12-18
12.3 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................12-19
12.3.1 AG Threshold...................................................................................................................................12-20
12.3.2 Average Rate Initial Value...............................................................................................................12-20
12.3.3 GBR Schedule Switch......................................................................................................................12-21
12.3.4 Sort Rate Weight..............................................................................................................................12-22
12.3.5 Sort Rate RSN Weight.....................................................................................................................12-22
12.4 HSUPA Power Control Parameters...........................................................................................................12-23
12.4.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for Downlink Control Channel...............................................12-23
12.4.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters..........................................................................12-28
12.4.3 Dynamic Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters....................................................................12-32
12.5 Local Cell Management Parameters..........................................................................................................12-36
12.5.1 Cell Radius.......................................................................................................................................12-36
12.5.2 Cell Handover Radius......................................................................................................................12-37
viii
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Figures
Figures
Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length...............................................................................7-17
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
ix
RAN
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters..............................................................................................1-2
Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters.......................................................................................1-12
Table 1-3 Maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers.........................................................................1-13
Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters.......................................................................................2-2
Table 2-2 List of inter-frequency handover parameters.....................................................................................2-15
Table 2-3 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters..............................................2-35
Table 2-4 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.......................................2-55
Table 2-5 List of blind handover management parameters................................................................................2-63
Table 2-6 List of cell selection and reselection parameters................................................................................2-66
Table 2-7 List of neighbor management parameters..........................................................................................2-77
Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters...................................................................................................3-1
Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters................................................................... 4-2
Table 4-2 List of smart load control parameters.................................................................................................4-17
Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters...................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters..............................................................................5-9
Table 5-3 List of link stability parameters..........................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-4 List of state transfer parameters.........................................................................................................5-21
Table 5-5 List of PS inactive parameters............................................................................................................5-26
Table 5-6 List of RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters...............................................................5-31
Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters..............................................................................6-2
Table 6-2 List of paging parameters.....................................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters..........................................................................................6-11
Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters....................................................................................................6-13
Table 6-5 List of location update parameters.....................................................................................................6-18
Table 6-6 List of user priority related parameters..............................................................................................6-19
Table 7-1 List of HS-DPCCH power control parameters.....................................................................................7-2
Table 7-2 List of total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant...........................................7-10
Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters....................................................7-12
Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters.............................................................................7-16
Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters.................................................7-18
Table 7-6 List of HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters..................................................................7-22
Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters.................................................................. 8-2
Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters.................................................................... 8-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
xi
RAN
Tables
Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters.............................................................9-2

Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters...............................................................................................9-7
Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches..................................................................................................10-3
Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches................................................................................................10-6
Table 10-3 List of power control algorithm switches.......................................................................................10-12
Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches...................................................................................................10-13
Table 10-5 List of DRD algorithm switches....................................................................................................10-15
Table 10-6 List of cell algorithm switches.......................................................................................................10-16
Table 10-7 CAC algorithm switches................................................................................................................10-20
Table 11-1 List of transmission common parameters........................................................................................11-2
Table 11-2 List of Iub admission control parameters.........................................................................................11-4
Table 11-3 List of Iub congestion control parameters........................................................................................11-6
Table 11-4 Iub Congestion Factor Configuration.............................................................................................11-12
Table 12-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters..........................................................................................12-2
Table 12-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters.............................................................12-5
Table 12-3 GBR, weight and resource limiting ratio for SPI...........................................................................12-17
Table 12-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters............................................................12-19
Table 12-5 List of power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel.......................................12-23
Table 12-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters................................................................12-28
Table 12-7 List of dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters..........................................................12-32
Table 12-8 List of local cell management parameters......................................................................................12-36
xii
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
About This Document
About This Document
Purpose
This document provides the engineering technician of commercial office with a parameter setting
baseline and parameter adjustment instructions.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name
Version
RNC
V200R009
NodeB
V100R008
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l
RNP engineers
RNO engineers
Update History
Refer to Changes in RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference.
Organization
1 Power Control Parameters
Power control is a key WCDMA technique, through which near and far effect, shadow fading
and fast fading can be overcome to ensure uplink and downlink network performance, reduce
network interference and improve the system quality and capacity. As a result, power control
parameter values have great impact on the network.
2 Handover Parameters
Handover aims to ensure communication continuity and good communication quality.
Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softer handover, intrafrequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard handover and so on.
Handover emerges as the important factor affecting network performance, and handover
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
About This Document
optimization is also significant in network optimization. Handover parameters are described

according to the handover classification.
3 Admission Control Parameters
Admission control is a way for coordinating the WCDMA system capacity, coverage and quality,
and it ensures the system stability and QoS requirement by control over user access.
4 Load Control Parameters
Load control is another very important function in WCDMA system. It maintains the system
load within the normal range to ensure that the systems overall QoS is in the normal range. The
load control includes LDR (Load Reshuffling) and OLC (Overload Control).
5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters
The PS Service rate control includes dynamic channel configuration, state transfer.
6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters
Special topic parameters include parameters for cell channel power distribution, paging, RRC
connection setup, synchronization and location updating.
7 HSDPA Parameters
HSDPA parameters include HSDPA power resource management parameters, HSDPA code
resource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility management parameters,
HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call admission control
algorithm parameters.
8 HSUPA Parameters
HSUPA parameters include HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power
control parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.
9 MBMS Parameters
MBMS parameters mainly include MBMS admission and load control parameters.
10 Algorithm Switches
In the RNC, algorithm switches are divided into two classes: connection-oriented algorithm
switches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.
11 Transmission Resource Management Parameters
The common configurable transmission parameters are listed here.
12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT
The parameters configured on the NodeB LMT described here mainly consist of the HSDPA
flow control parameters, the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPA
MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPA power control parameters and the local
cell management parameters.
Conventions
1. Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows
2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Symbol
About This Document
Description
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, if
not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performance
degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save your
time.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.
2. General Conventions
Convention
Description
Times New Roman
Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface
Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. For

example,log in as user root .
Italic
Book titles are in italics.
Courier New
Terminal display is in Courier New.
3. Command Conventions
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{x | y | ...}
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

bars.One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and

separated by vertical bars.One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *

bars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
RAN
About This Document
Convention
Description
[ x | y | ... ] *

bars.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected.
4. GUI Conventions
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are in

boldface. For example,click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.

For example,choose File > Create > Folder .
5. Keyboard Operation
Convention
Description
Key
Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab.
Key1+Key2
Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+A

means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key1,Key2
Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the two

keys should be pressed in turn.
6. Mouse Operation
Action
Description
Click
Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the
pointer.
Double-click
Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly

without moving the pointer.
Drag
Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer
to a certain position.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Power Control Parameters
About This Chapter

Power control is a key WCDMA technique, through which near and far effect, shadow fading
and fast fading can be overcome to ensure uplink and downlink network performance, reduce
network interference and improve the system quality and capacity. As a result, power control
parameter values have great impact on the network.
1.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters
The common configurable uplink power control parameters are listed here.
1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters
The common configurable downlink power control parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-1
RAN
1.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters

The common configurable uplink power control parameters are listed here.
Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters
N
o.
Paramete
r ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Leve
l
PowerOffs
etPpm
Power offset
between the
last access
preamble and
message
control part
Signalling: -3
dB
Set: ADD PRACHTFC
Cell
ConstantV
alue
Constant for
PRACH
initial
transmit
power
-20, that is, -20

dB
PowerRam
pStep
Power
increase step
of random
access
preamble
2, that is, 2 dB
PreambleR
etransMax
Maximum of
preamble
retransmissio
n
8 times
Mmax
Max
preamble
loop
8 times
Default
constant for
initial
DPCCH
transmit
power
-27, that is, -27

dB
1-2
DefaultCo
nstantValu
e
Services: -2 dB
Modify: The PRACH TFC

needs to be deleted before
being reconfigured.
Set: ADD PRACHBASIC
Cell
Modify: The PRACH needs

to be deleted before being
reconfigured.
Set: ADD RACH
Cell
Query: LST RACH

Modify: MOD RACH
Set or modify: SET FRC
RNC
Query: LST FRC
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
N
o.
Paramete
r ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Leve
l
MaxAllow
edUlTxPo
wer
Maximum
UE uplink
transmit
power per
service
24, that is, 24

dBm
MaxAllowedUlTxPower
Cell
MaxUlTx
PowerFor
Conv
Query: LST
CELLSELRESEL
Modify: MOD
CELLSELRESEL
MaxUlTx
PowerFor
Str
Service-Oriented
Parameters
MaxUlTx
PowerForI
nt
Set: ADD CELLCAC

Query: LST CELLCAC
Modify: MOD CELLCAC
MaxUlTx
PowerFor
Bac
8
RRCPRO
CSRBDE
LAY
HHOPRO
CSRBDE
LAY
RRCPRO
CPCPREA
MBLE
HHOPRO
CPCPREA
MBLE
Set: ADD
CELLSELRESEL
Delay of SRB
in DCH RRC
process
[Frame]
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
Delay of SRB
in DCH HHO
process
[Frame]
RRC Proc
DPCCH PC
preamble
length
[Frame]
RRC: 0
HHO: 7
HHO Proc
DPCCH PC
preamble
length
[Frame]
1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part
This parameter is the power offset between the last access preamble and the message control
part. The access preamble power plus this offset equals the power of the control part.
1.1.2 PRACH Initial Transmit Power Constant
This parameter is the constant for the UE to estimate the initial PRACH transmit power in the
open loop power control process.
1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step
This parameter is the power increase step of the random access preambles transmitted before
the UE which receives the acquisition indicator in the random access process.
1.1.4 Maximum Preamble Retransmit Attempts
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-3
RAN
This parameter is the maximum number of preambles retransmission of the UE in a preamble

ramping cycle.
1.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop
This parameter defines the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE
has transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reached
PreambleRetransMax, if the UE still has not received the capture indication, it repeats the access
attempt after the specified waiting time. The maximum number of recycle cannot exceed Mmax.
1.1.6 Default DPCCH Transmit Power Constant
This parameter is used by the RNC to compute the DPCCH power offset which is used by the
UE to compute the initial transmit power of UL DPCCH during the open loop power control
process.
1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power of the UE
The MaxAllowedULTxPower parameter determines the maximum transmit power of an UE
when the UE gains access to a specific cell. This means that the cell selects
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the S rule. In addition, there are four maximum UE transmit
power parameters oriented to different QoS services.
1.1.8 RRC/HHO Process SRB Delay
This parameter defines the delay of SRB in DCH RRC/HHO process.
1.1.9 RRC/HHO Process DPCCH Power Control Preamble Length
This parameter defines the DPCCH power control preamble length in DCH RRC/HHO process.
1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control

Part
This parameter is the power offset between the last access preamble and the message control
part. The access preamble power plus this offset equals the power of the control part.
Parameter ID
PowerOffsetPpm
Value Range
5 to 10
Physical Value Range

5 dB to 10 dB, step 1 dB
Parameter Setting
According to the field test results, the recommended value during signaling transmission is set
to 3 dB, and that during service transmission to 2 dB.
Impact on the Network Performance

l
1-4
If the parameter value is set too low, it is likely that the signaling and the service data carried
over the RACH cannot be received by UTRAN, which affects the uplink coverage.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
l
If the value is too high, the uplink interference is increased, and the uplink capacity is
affected.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD PRACHTFC, delete the PRACH TFC through RMV
PRACHTFC before reconfiguring it.
It is necessary to deactivate PRACH (DEA PRACH) and the cell (DEA CELL) before RMV
PRACHTFC is executed.
1.1.2 PRACH Initial Transmit Power Constant

This parameter is the constant for the UE to estimate the initial PRACH transmit power in the
open loop power control process.
Parameter ID
ConstantValue
Value Range
-35 to -10

-35 dB to -10 dB step 1 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is -20, that is, -20 dB.
This parameter is used to calculate the transmit power of the first preamble in the random access
process. The formula is as follows:
Preamble_Initial_Power = PCPICH DL TX power - CPICH_RSCP + UL_interference +
Constant_Value
where
l
Preamble_Initial_Power is the preamble initial transmit power of the UE.
PCPICH DL TX power is downlink transmit power of the PCPICH.
CPICH_RSCP is the received signaling code power of the PCPICH measured by the UE.
UL_interference is the uplink interference, which is obtained by the UE receiving data

from the broadcast channel. It is calculated at the network side and broadcast to the UE.
This value is kept in the background record of the UE under test.
Constant_Value is obtained by the UE receiving data from the broadcast channel.

l
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
If the parameter value is set too high, the initial transmit power becomes higher, whereas
the duration of the access process becomes shorter.
1-5
RAN

l
If the value is too low, to satisfy the requirement of access power, it requires more ramps
and lengthens the access period.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC and modify it through MOD
PRACHUUPARAS.
1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step

This parameter is the power increase step of the random access preambles transmitted before
the UE which receives the acquisition indicator in the random access process.
Parameter ID
PowerRampStep
Value Range
1 to 8

Parameter Setting
The default value is 2, that is 2 dB.

l
If this value is too high, the access process is shortened, but the probability of power waste
is higher.
If it is too low, the access process is lengthened, but the transmitting power is saved.
It is a value should be weighed.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC modify it through MOD
PRACHUUPARAS, and query it through LST PRACH.
1.1.4 Maximum Preamble Retransmit Attempts

This parameter is the maximum number of preambles retransmission of the UE in a preamble
ramping cycle.
Parameter ID
PreambleRetransMax
Value Range
1 to 64
1-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

1 to 64 times
Parameter Setting
The default value is 8 times.
The product of this parameter and the previous PRACH Power Ramp Step determines the
maximum ramp power of the UE within a preamble ramping cycle.

l
If this value is too low, the preamble power may fail to ramp to the required value, resulting
in UE access failure.
If it is too high, the UE may repeatedly make access attempts by increasing the transmit
power, resulting in interference to other users.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC, modify it through MOD
PRACHUUPARAS, and query it through LST PRACH.
1.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop

This parameter defines the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UE
has transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reached
PreambleRetransMax, if the UE still has not received the capture indication, it repeats the access
attempt after the specified waiting time. The maximum number of recycle cannot exceed Mmax.
Parameter ID
Mmax
Value Range
1 to 32

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is 8.

l
If this parameter is too low, the UE access success rate is influenced.
If it is too high, the UE probably tries access attempt repeatedly within a long time, which
increases the uplink interference.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-7
RAN
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD RACH, query it through LST RACH, and modify it through
MOD RACH.
1.1.6 Default DPCCH Transmit Power Constant

This parameter is used by the RNC to compute the DPCCH power offset which is used by the
UE to compute the initial transmit power of UL DPCCH during the open loop power control
process.
Parameter ID
DefaultConstantValue
Value Range
-35 to -10

-35 dB to -10 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is -27, that is -27 dB.
The formula given in the protocol 25.331 is as follows:
DPCCH_Initial_power = DPCCH_Power_offset - CPICH_RSCP
Where, CPICH_RSCP is the received signaling code power of the PCPICH measured by the
UE.

l
If this parameter is too low, the uplink synchronization at the cell verge may fail during
initial link setup, which influences the uplink coverage.
If it is too high, it leads to instant interference to the uplink receiving, decreasing uplink
receiving performance.
Relevant Commands
Set or modify this parameter through SET FRC and query it through LST FRC.
1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power of the UE

The MaxAllowedULTxPower parameter determines the maximum transmit power of an UE
when the UE gains access to a specific cell. This means that the cell selects
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the S rule. In addition, there are four maximum UE transmit
power parameters oriented to different QoS services.
Parameter ID
MaxAllowedUlTxPower
1-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
MaxUlTxPowerForConv (maximum transmit power for the session service)

MaxUlTxPowerForStr (maximum transmit power for the stream service)
MaxUlTxPowerForInt (maximum transmit power for the exchange service)
MaxUlTxPowerForBac (maximum transmit power for the background service)
Value Range
-50 to +33

-50 dBm to +33 dBm, with step length as 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The setting of this parameter is based on the planned uplink network coverage.
The default setting of MaxAllowedULTxPower is 21, which stands for 21 dBm. The values of
the other four parameters cannot be greater than the value of MaxAllowedULTxPower.
By default, the parameters MaxUlTxPowerForConv, MaxUlTxPowerForStr,
MaxUlTxPowerForInt, and MaxUlTxPowerForBac are set to 24 dBm.
If the capacity of a cell is restricted, this group of parameters are not a constraint for the cell.
The reason is that the rapid power control function can dynamically adjust the transmit power
of an UE. If the coverage of a cell is restricted, the following formula is provided according to
You can infer that
the requirement of full coverage:
Noiserise = Itotal/PN.
Where:
l
PUE,max represents the maximum transmit power of the UE.
Lmax represents the maximum path loss.
The character v represents the activation factor of a service.
Gp represents the processing gain of a service. The formula is: Gp = W/R, where W
represents signal bandwidth and R represents the data transmission rate of a service.
Ga represents antenna gain, which is the sum of the actual antenna gain and the cable loss
gain.
Gd represents the sum of diversity gains, such as multi-path diversity gain and receiver
antenna gain.
PN represents the background noise.
Eb/Io represents the target SIR value of a service.
For the services that do not require full cell coverage, you can also use the previous formula to
measure the transmit power of the UE that meets the special requirement for coverage area. If
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-9
RAN
the transmit power of an UE has reached the maximum, you can use the previous formula to
measure the uplink coverage area.
Impact on Network Performance

If coverage area is restricted, the uplink coverage area is affected if this parameter is set to a
very small value.
Relevant Commands
MaxAllowedUlTxPower: use the ADD CELLSELRESEL command for configuration, the
LST CELLSELRESEL command for query, and the MOD CELLSELRESEL command for
modification.
Service-oriented parameters: use the ADD CELLCAC command for configuration, the LST
CELLCAC command for query, and the MOD CELLCAC command for modification.
1.1.8 RRC/HHO Process SRB Delay

This parameter defines the delay of SRB in DCH RRC/HHO process.
Parameter ID
RRCPROCSRBDELAY
HHOPROCSRBDELAY
Value Range
0 to 7

0 to 7 frames, step is 1
Parameter Setting
The default value of each parameter is 7.
The delay of SRB involves the following signalling: PHYSICAL CHANNEL
RECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER ESTABLISHMENT, RADIO BEARER
RECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER RELEASE, TRANSPORT CHANNEL
RECONFIGURATION, HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMMAND, RRC CONNECTION
SETUP and CELL UPDATE CONFIRM.

The improper setting of this parameter will result in data loss and retransmission delay, which
may have a negative effect on service rate and transmission delay.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC and modify it
through MOD CELLCAC.
1-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
1.1.9 RRC/HHO Process DPCCH Power Control Preamble Length

This parameter defines the DPCCH power control preamble length in DCH RRC/HHO process.
Parameter ID
RRCPROCPCPREAMBLE
HHOPROCPCPREAMBLE
Value Range
0 to 7

0 to 7 times, step is 1
Parameter Setting
RRCPROCPCPREAMBLE is set to 0 by default, and the default value of
HHOPROCPCPREAMBLE is 7.
The power control preamble involves the following signalling: PHYSICAL CHANNEL
RECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER ESTABLISHMENT, RADIO BEARER
RECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER RELEASE, TRANSPORT CHANNEL
RECONFIGURATION, HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMMAND, RRC CONNECTION
SETUP and CELL UPDATE CONFIRM.
This parameter is initially used for uplink/downlink power control convergence, preventing UE
from using an uncontrollable power at the beginning. When the UE transmits signals on the
DPCCH, the NodeB needs a period of time to recognize the uplink signals. The length of this
period of time depends on the search implementation and the transmission delay. It is useless to
start the uplink transmission on DPDCH before the above process is completed. Because at that
time, the data can not be correctly received and will be lost. If the AM mode is used, the
retransmission may lead to a much longer delay for data transmission.
The power control algorithm 1 is the only selection during the preamble period. This parameter
is closely related to the DPCCH initial transmit power, the initial SIR target, the power control
algorithm itself and the NodeB search ability, so it should be properly adjusted in reality.

The improper setting of this parameter will result in data loss and retransmission delay, which
may have a negative effect on service rate and transmission delay.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC and modify it
1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters

The common configurable downlink power control parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-11
RAN
Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters

No.
Parame
ter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
Level
RlMaxD
lPwr
Maximum
downlink
transmit
power of
the radio
link
Refer to the table

Maximum and
minimum
downlink transmit
powers
Set: ADD
CELLRLPWR
Query: LST
CELLRLPWR
Modify: MOD
CELLRLPWR
Cell
RlMinD
lPwr
Minimum
downlink
transmit
power of
the radio
link
PCPICH
Power
Cell
PCPICH
transmit
power
330, that is, 33 dBm
Set: ADD PCPICH

Query: LST
PCPICH
Modify: MOD
CELL
MaxPC
PICHPo
wer
Maximum
PCPICH
transmit
power
346, that is, 34.6

dBm
MinPCP
ICHPow
er
Minimum
PCPICH
transmit
power
313, that is, 31.3

dBm
Set: ADD PCPICH

Query: LST
PCPICH
Modfy: MOD
PCPICHPWR
1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This parameter is the maximum downlink transmit power of radio link. It should fulfill the
coverage requirement of the network planning, and the value is relative to PCPICH transmit
power.
1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link
This parameter is the minimum transmit power of downlink radio link. It should be considered
with the maximum downlink transmit power and the dynamic range of power control, and its
value is relative to PCPICH transmit power.
1.2.3 Cell PCPICH Transmit Power
It is used to determine the power of Primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point is the antenna
connector of NodeB. Its value is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.
1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power
It is used to determine the maximum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The reference
point is the antenna connector of NodeB. Its value is related to the downlink coverage in the
network planning.
1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power
1-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
It is used to determine the minimum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The reference
network planning.
1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This parameter is the maximum downlink transmit power of radio link. It should fulfill the
coverage requirement of the network planning, and the value is relative to PCPICH transmit
power.
Parameter ID
RlMaxDlPwr
Value Range
-350 to 150

-35 dB to 15 dB, step 0.1 dB
Parameter Setting
The service type and the service rate should be considered in parameter configuration. For an
individual service, the configuration values are listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers
Service Type (uint: bit/s)
Max. Downlink Transmit

Power (in the parentheses
is the dB value)
Min. Downlink
Transmit Power (in the
parentheses is the dB
value)
12.2K AMR
0(0)
-150(-15)
64K transparent data
30(3)
-120(-12)
0(0)
-150(-15)
-20(-2)
-170(-17)
28.8K transparent data
-20(-2)
-170(-17)
57.6K controllable stream
-10(-1)
-160(-16)
0 stream (unidirectional)
-20(-2)
-170(-17)
384K
40(4)
-110(-11)
256K
20(2)
-130(-13)
CS
PS
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-13
RAN
Service Type (uint: bit/s)
Max. Downlink Transmit

Power (in the parentheses
is the dB value)
Min. Downlink
Transmit Power (in the
parentheses is the dB
value)
144K
0(0)
-150(-15)
128K
0(0)
-150(-15)
64K
0(0)
-150(-15)
32K
-40(-4)
-190(-19)
16K
-60(-6)
-210(-21)
8K
-80(-8)
-230(-23)
For combined services, the maximum and minimum transmit power is computed by the RNC
according to the configuration of individual services.

l
If this parameter is too high, downlink interference may occur.
If it is too low, it may influence the normal functioning of downlink power control.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR, query it through LST CELLRLPWR and
modify it through MOD CELLRLPWR.
1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link

This parameter is the minimum transmit power of downlink radio link. It should be considered
with the maximum downlink transmit power and the dynamic range of power control, and its
value is relative to PCPICH transmit power.
Parameter ID
RlMinDlPwr
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting
Since the dynamic range of power control is set to 15 dB, this parameter is recommended as RL
Max DL TX power -15 dB and refer to the related description of the sub clause Maximum
Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link.
1-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

l
If this parameter is too low, the transmit power may become too low because of incorrect
estimation of SIR.
If it is too high, it may influence the normal functioning of downlink power control.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR, query it through LST CELLRLPWR and
modify it through MOD CELLRLPWR.

Parameter ID
PCPICHPower
Value Range
-100 to 500

-10 dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default setting is 330, namely 33 dBm.
This parameter should be set based on the actual system environment such as cell coverage
(radius) and geographical environment. For the cells to be covered, the downlink coverage
should be guaranteed as a premise. For the cells requiring soft handover area, this parameter
should satisfy the proportion of soft handover areas stipulated in the network planning.
For a cell with large coverage, the value of this parameter should be relatively high; otherwise,
it should be relatively low. In a planned multi-cell environment, this parameter is definite If the
value of this parameter is smaller than the planned value, coverage holes may occur when the
cells are under heavy load.

l
If this parameter is too low, it influences directly the downlink pilot coverage range.
If it is too high, the downlink interference increases, and the cell capacity is decreased
because a lot of system resources are occupied and the interference with the downlink traffic
channels are increased.
In addition, the configuration of this parameter also has direct influence on the distribution of
handover areas.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-15
RAN
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH, query it through LST PCPICH and modify it
through MOD CELL.
1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power

It is used to determine the maximum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The reference
network planning.
Parameter ID
MaxPCPICHPower
Value Range
-100 to 500

Parameter Setting
The default setting is 34.6 dBm.
This parameter sets the upper limit of the pilot channel transmit power. When modifying the
PCPICH transmit power according to the actual requirement, ensure that this parameter is greater
than the actually required PCPICH power.

None.
Relevant Commands
through MOD PCPICHPWR.
1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power

It is used to determine the minimum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The reference
network planning.
Parameter ID
MinPCPICHPower
Value Range
-100 to 500
1-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

Parameter Setting
The default setting is 31.3 dBm.
This parameter sets the lower limit of the pilot channel transmit power. When modifying the
PCPICH transmit power according to the actual requirement, ensure that this parameter is
smaller than the actually required PCPICH power.
The actual system environment, such as the cell coverage range (radius) and the geographical
environment should be considered while setting this parameter. If the minimum transmit power
of the main common pilot physical channel is configured too small, the cell coverage will be
influenced. Ensure that this parameter is set under the condition of definite soft handover area
proportion, or under the condition that no coverage hole exists.

None.
Relevant Commands
through MOD PCPICHPWR.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
1-17
RAN
Handover Parameters
About This Chapter

Handover aims to ensure communication continuity and good communication quality.
Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softer handover, intrafrequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard handover and so on.
Handover emerges as the important factor affecting network performance, and handover
optimization is also significant in network optimization. Handover parameters are described
according to the handover classification.
2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters
The common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
2.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters
The common configurable inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
2.3 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters
The common configurable coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters are
listed here.
2.4 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters
are listed here.
2.5 Blind Handover Management Parameters
The common configurable blind handover management parameters are listed here.
2.6 Cell Selection and Reselection
The common configurable cell selection and reselection parameters are listed here.
2.7 Neighbor Management Parameters
The configurable neighbor management parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-1
RAN
2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters

The common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Leve
l
DivCtrlField
Softer handover
combination
indication switch
MAY
Set or modify: SET

HOCOMM
RNC
IntraFreqFilte
rCoef
Intra-Frequency
measurement L3
filter coefficient
D3
Weight
Weighting factor
0 dB
IntraRelThdF
or1ACS
Soft handover
relative thresholds
for event 1A and
event 1B
1A: 6 (3
dB)
Soft handover
absolute thresholds
for event 1F
EcNo: -24
dB
Hysteresis related to
soft handover for
events 1A, 1B, 1C,
1D and 1F
1A and
1B: 0 (0
dB)
Time-to-Trigger
parameters related to
soft handover for
events 1A, 1B, 1C,
1D and 1F
1A: D320
(320 ms)
Minimum quality
threshold of soft
handover
-24 dB
IntraRelThdF
or1APS
Query: LST
HOCOMM
1B: 12 (6
dB)
IntraRelThdF
or1BCS
IntraRelThdF
or1BPS
5
IntraAblThd
For1FEcNo
IntraAblThd
For1FRSCP
HystFor1A
HystFor1B
HystFor1C
HystFor1D
For RNC
Set or modify: SET
INTRAFREQHO
Query: LST
INTRAFREQHO
For Cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTRAFRE
QHO
Query: LST
CELLINTRAFRE
QHO
Modify: MOD
CELLINTRAFRE
QHO
RNC
Cell
RSCP:
-115 dBm
1C/1D/1F:
8 (4 dB)
HystFor1F
7
TrigTime1A
TrigTime1B
TrigTime1C
TrigTime1D
TrigTime1F
2-2
SHOQualmin
1B/1C/
1D/1F:
D640 (640
ms)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Leve
l
CellsForbidd
en1A
Affect 1A threshold
flag
AFFECT
Set: ADD
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
NCell
CellsSorbidd
en1B
10
CellIndividal
Offset
Cell individual
offset
Query: LST
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
Modify: MOD
INTRAFREQNCE
LL
2.1.1 Softer Handover Combination Indication Switch

This parameter determines whether the NodeB implements softer combination of radio links in
soft handover.
2.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient
It is the measurement smoothing factor used for filtering the L3 intra-frequency measurement
report.
2.1.3 Weighting Factor
This parameter is used to identify the threshold for triggering event 1A and 1B according to the
measured value of each cell in the active set.
2.1.4 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds
These parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/No
of PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality in
case that W=0). The soft handover relative threshold parameters include IntraRelThdFor1ACS,
IntraRelThdFor1APS (relative threshold for 1A) and IntraRelThdFor1BCS,
IntraRelThdFor1BPS (relative threshold for 1B).
2.1.5 Event 1F Absolute Thresholds
These parameters correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS.
The absolute thresholds of soft handover include IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo and
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP (Correspond to Ec/Io and RSCP).
2.1.6 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover
These parameters represent the hysteresis values of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.
2.1.7 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover
These parameters represent the trigger delay time of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.
2.1.8 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover
When the RNC receives event 1A, 1C and 1D, it can be added to the active set only when CPICH
Ec/Io of the target cell is greater than this absolute threshold.
2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Thresholds Flag
Switch CellsForbidden1A affects the relevant threshold of event 1A and Switch
CellsForbidden1B affects the relevant threshold of event 1B.
2.1.10 Cell Individual Offset
It is the CPICH measured value offset of intra-frequency handover cells.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-3
RAN
2.1.1 Softer Handover Combination Indication Switch

This parameter determines whether the NodeB implements softer combination of radio links in
soft handover.
Parameter ID
DivCtrlField
Value Range
MAY, MUST, MUST_NOT

l
Softer combination may be implemented.
Softer combination must be implemented.
Softer combination must not be implemented.
Parameter Setting
The default value is MAY.
There are two combination methods for uplink combination of soft handover: one is maximum
ratio combination at the NodeB Rake receiver, which gives the highest combination gain; the
other is selective combination at the RNC, which gives a relatively smaller combination gain.
l
The default value of the indication switch is MAY, which means the NodeB decides
whether to implement maximum ratio combination according to its own physical conditions
When MUST is selected, the NodeB is forced to carry out maximum ratio combination
which is usually used in tests.
When MUST_NOT is selected, the NodeB is forbidden to carry out maximum ratio
combination, and this method is adopted when maximum ratio combination performance
of softer handover is poor.
The working status (test/normal operation) and the propagation environment should be
considered when deciding whether to implement softer combination and to adopt which kind of
softer combination.

None.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST HOCOMM.
2.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient

It is the measurement smoothing factor used for filtering the L3 intra-frequency measurement
report.
2-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
IntraFreqFilterCoef
Value Range
Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19), working range:
Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8)

Enum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)
Parameter Setting
The default value is D3.
The filtering of the measurement is calculated by means of the following formula:
Fn = (1 - ) Fn - 1 + Mn
Where,
l
Fn: the updated measurement result after filtering processing.
Fn - 1: the old measurement result of the previous moment after filtering processing.
Mn: the latest measured value received from the physical layer.
= (1/2)(k/2), where, k comes from filter coefficient, namely the local FilterCoef. When
is set to 1, it means there is no Layer 3 filtering.
The Layer 3 filtering should filter the random impact capability so that the filtered measured
value can reflect the basic change trend of the actual measurement. Because the measured value
input to Layer 3 filter is after the Layer 1 filtering, the influence of fast fading has been basically
filtered; therefore, the Layer 3 filter should carry out smoothing filtering on the shadow fading
and small quantity of fast fading burrs, so as to provide better measurement data for event
decisions.

l
The greater this parameter, the stronger the smoothing effect on the signal, and the stronger
the fast fading resistance capability, but the weaker the tracing capability of the signal
change. If handover is not implemented in time, call drop occurs.
If this parameter is too low, the possibility of unnecessary soft handover and ping-pong
handover increases.
NOTE
As adjustment of this parameter seriously affects the entire handover performance, be cautious while setting
this parameter.
Relevant Commands
For the RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: set it through SET
INTRAFREQHO, and query it through LST INTRAFREQHO.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-5
RAN
For the cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: add it through ADD
CELLINTRAFREQHO, query it through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify it
through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.
2.1.3 Weighting Factor

This parameter is used to identify the threshold for triggering event 1A and 1B according to the
measured value of each cell in the active set.
Parameter ID
Weight
Value Range
0 to 20

0 to 2, step 0.1
Parameter Setting
According to the Protocol TS25.331, in event 1A and 1B, W is defined as follows:
When W=0, the formula is actually the measured value of the best cell, and the
determination of the relative threshold of soft handover is only related to the best cell in
the active set.
when W=1, it can be approximately considered as the equivalent signal strength when
maximum ratio combination of down links of all cells in the active is implemented.

l
The greater this parameter, the higher events 1A and 1B triggering thresholds obtained
under the same condition, the more difficult to join the active set, and the easier to leave
the active set.
the less this parameter, the easier to join the active set, and the more difficult to leave the
active set.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: Set it through SET
2-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: Add it through ADD

2.1.4 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds

These parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/No
of PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality in
case that W=0). The soft handover relative threshold parameters include IntraRelThdFor1ACS,
IntraRelThdFor1APS (relative threshold for 1A) and IntraRelThdFor1BCS,
IntraRelThdFor1BPS (relative threshold for 1B).
Parameter ID
IntraRelThdFor1ACS
IntraRelThdFor1APS
IntraRelThdFor1BCS
IntraRelThdFor1BPS
Value Range
0 to 29

0 to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB
Parameter Setting
l
The default values of IntraRelThdFor1ACS and IntraRelThdFor1APS are 6, namely 3 dB.
The default values of IntraRelThdFor1BCS and IntraRelThdFor1BPS are 12, namely 6 dB.
As specified in Protocol 25.331, when CPICH Ec/No value is adopted as the measured value,
the following formula is adopted for the event 1A trigger decision:
Where,
l
MNew is the measured value of the cell that enters the report range;
CIONew is the offset of this cell;
Mi is the measured value of the cells in the active set;
NA is the number of cells in the current active set;
MBest is the measured value of the best cell in the active set;
W is the weighting value which is used for weighting the comprehensive quality of the best
cell and the active set;
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-7
RAN
l
R1a is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;
H1a is the hysteresis value of event 1A.
The following event is taken as the trigger condition of event 1B:
Where,
l
MOld is the measured value of the cell that leaves the report range;
CIOOld is the offset of this cell;
Mi is the measured value of the cells in the active set;
NA is the number of cells in the current active set;
MBest is the measured value of the best cell in the active set;
W is the weighting value used for weighing the comprehensive quality of the best cell and
the active set;
R1b is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;
H1b is the hysteresis value of event 1B.
The selection of a relative threshold for handover corresponds directly to the soft handover
proportion, and it should ensure the trouble-free implementation of smoothing handover.

The parameter setting determines the size of the soft handover area and the user proportion
involved in soft handover.
l
If the thresholds are high, the target cell joins the active set more easily, call drop occurs
more difficultly, and the UE proportion in the state of soft handover increases, but the
forward resources are seriously occupied.
If the thresholds are low, the target cell joins the active set more difficultly, the
communication quality cannot be guaranteed, and the implementation of smoothing
handover is affected.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET
INTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.
For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD
CELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify
them through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.
2.1.5 Event 1F Absolute Thresholds

These parameters correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS.
The absolute thresholds of soft handover include IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo and
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP (Correspond to Ec/Io and RSCP).
2-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP
Value Range
IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: -24 to 0
IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: -155 to 25

IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: -24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
IntraAblThdFor1FFRSCP: -155 dBm to 25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
l
The default value for IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo is -24 dB.
The default value for IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP is -115 dBm.
Event 1F means the PCPICH measured value is less than the absolute threshold.
These values are the absolute thresholds used for 1F reports in the soft handover algorithm,
corresponding to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS and affecting
the triggering of event 1F.
Event 1F is used to trigger emergency blind handover. If the optimal cell of active set reports
event 1F, it indicates the active set quality is rather poor, and blind handover is triggered at this
moment to make the final attempt before call drops.

The higher these thresholds, the more easily blind handover is triggered, and vice versa. In
practice, adjust the values in accordance with the handover policy and network coverage.
Relevant Commands
2.1.6 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover

These parameters represent the hysteresis values of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.
Parameter ID
HystFor1A
HystFor1B
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-9
RAN
HystFor1C
HystFor1D
HystFor1F
Value Range
0 to 15

Parameter Setting
The default values:
l
The 1A and event 1B hysteresis parameters are set to 0 (0 dB).
The others are set to 8 (4 dB).
Event 1C: cell replacement in the active set.

Event 1D: In case of an active set cell, the best cell is modified; in case of a monitored set cell,
it is added into the active set and the best cell is modified.
l
Event 1A
The first formula is used to trigger 1A, and the second one is used to cancel 1A. Therefore,
the hysteresis range is the signal fluctuation range under usual conditions, or the fluctuation
range of the slow fading under the same condition.
l
Event 1B
The first formula is used to trigger 1B, and the second one is used to cancel 1B.
l
Event 1C
MNew MInAS + H1c/2
MNew MInAS - H1c/2
The range of this value can be adjusted within 3 dB to 5 dB. Because 1C is triggered when
the active set size reaches the maximum value, and the delay of handover at this time does
2-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
not lead to bad result, the signaling interaction caused by the ping-pong effect should be
reduced to the minimum in the parameter configuration. The parameter can be increased
appropriately in the adjustment.
l
Event 1D
MNotBest MBest + H1d/2
The event cancellation formula has not been given in the protocol. According to the
cancellation definitions of other events, the 1D cancellation definition can be deduced as
follows:
MNotBest MBest - H1d/2
The range of this value can be adjusted within 3 dB to 5 dB. Because all the handover
policies are based on the best cell and the change of the best cell usually leads to the update
of the measurement control, the ping-pong change and mis-decision should be reduced to
the minimum in report of event 1D. The parameter can be increased appropriately in the
adjustment.
Event 1F
MNew T1f - H1f/2
MNew T1f + H1f/2
The range of this value can be adjusted within 3 dB to 5 dB. The value of this parameter is
consistent with the hysteresis value for 1B.

l
For a UE that has entered to the soft handover area, increased hysteresis is equivalent to a
reduced soft handover range.
For a UE that has left the soft handover area, increased hysteresis is equivalent to an
increased soft handover range.
If the number of users entering the soft handover area is the same as the number of users leaving
the soft handover area, there is no influence on the actual proportion of soft handover. The greater
the hysteresis, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability, and the better the pingpong effect suppressed. However, the response speed of the handover algorithm on signal
changes is decreased.
Therefore, the radio environment (slow fading characteristics), the actual handover distance and
the user moving speed should be fully considered for the setting of these parameters.
Relevant Commands
2.1.7 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover

These parameters represent the trigger delay time of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-11
RAN
Parameter ID
TrigTime1A
TrigTime1B
TrigTime1C
TrigTime1D
TrigTime1F
Value Range
Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,
D2560, D5000), work range Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000)ms
Parameter Setting
The default value for 1A is D320 320 ms, and the default values for other events are D640
(640 ms).
The time-to-trigger mechanism is mainly used:
l
To reduce the number of wrong event reports caused by burst signals.
To suppress ping-pong handover to some degree.
To reduce the influence of shadow fading on event decisions.
Layer 3 filter coefficient, hysteresis and time-to-trigger jointly overcome the interference
(mainly slow fading) effect. They are used to prevent the ping-pong effect (including event
reports, and active set and best cell update) caused by slow fading.
In order to obtain the approximate performance, we can use different combinations of the three
parameters. The interferences overcome by the three parameters are of different types:
l
Filter coefficient can well overcome weak signal interference under strong signals.
Hysteresis is mainly used to overcome interference with the strength within a certain range,
especially ping-pong handover at the verge of a cell.
Time-to-trigger can overcome burst signal interference effectively.

The greater the value of the hysteresis, the more difficult the handover occurs. However, if the
value of hysteresis increases, the call drop risk increases.
Relevant Commands
2-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
2.1.8 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover

When the RNC receives event 1A, 1C and 1D, it can be added to the active set only when CPICH
Ec/Io of the target cell is greater than this absolute threshold.
Parameter ID
SHOQualmin
Value Range
-24 to 0

-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is -24, namely, -24 dB.
Purpose of setting this parameter is that:
If the signal added to the cell is too poor in quality, there is no apparent contribution to general
quality of the active set, more downlink resources are occupied, and more TPC bit errors are
introduced. On the contrary, the soft handover performance is deteriorated. Therefore, a basic
quality requirement should be worked out for the added radio link.
Setting of this parameter is related with the power distribution rate of public channels and the
demodulation capability of UEs.

Adjust this parameter according to the Ec/Io that the cell soft handover area reaches as expected
at network planning.
l
The greater this parameter is set, the more difficult for the neighboring cell to join in the
active set, but the service quality of the joining cell can be ensured.
The less this parameter is set, the easier for the neighboring cell to join in the active set,
but a too-low parameter cannot restrict the service quality of the cell.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: set it through SET
For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: add it through ADD
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-13
RAN
2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Thresholds Flag

Switch CellsForbidden1A affects the relevant threshold of event 1A and Switch
CellsForbidden1B affects the relevant threshold of event 1B.
Parameter ID
CellsForbidden1A
CellsForbidden1B
Value Range
NOT_AFFECT, AFFECT

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is AFFECT.
See the following relative threshold computation formulas of event 1A and 1B. This parameter
determines whether the measurement value Mi of corresponding cell i appears at

is AFFECT, then Mi takes part in sum at computation, or else it does not.
. If it

When the value of W is 0, the state (On or Off) of this switch has no influence on the computation
result.
Relevant Commands
Add it through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL, query it through LST INTRAFREQNCELL,
and modify it through MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.

It is the CPICH measured value offset of intra-frequency handover cells.
Parameter ID
CellIndividalOffset
2-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
-20 to 20

Parameter Setting
The default value is 0 dB.
The sum of this value and the actual measured value is used in the UE event estimation. The UE
uses the sum of the original cell measured value and this offset as the measurement result for
the UE intra-frequency handover decision. It plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in the
handover algorithm. This parameter is configured according to the actual environment in the
network planning. In the neighboring cell configuration, set this parameter to a positive value if
handover is expected to occur easily; otherwise, set it to a negative value.
The function of this parameter is to move the cell edge and configured according to actual
environment.

l
The greater this parameter, the more easily soft handover occurs, and the more UEs in the
soft handover state, but the more forward resources occupied.
The less this parameter is, the more difficultly soft handover occurs, which is likely to affect
the receiving quality.
Relevant Commands
Add it through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL, query it through LST INTRAFREQNCELL,
and modify it through MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.
2.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters

The common configurable inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.
Table 2-2 List of inter-frequency handover parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
InterFreqReport
Mode
Inter-Frequency
measurement
report mode
Periodical_re
porting
RNC
InterFreqMeasQ
uantity
Inter-Frequency
measurement
quantity
BOTH
For RNC
Set or modify:
SET
INTERFREQH
OCOV
Query: LST
INTERFREQH
OCOV
For Cell
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
Cell
2-15
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
InterFreqFilterCoef
Inter-Frequency
measurement
filter coefficient
D3
WeightForUsed
Freq
Frequency
weighting factor
Hystfor2B
Hysteresis related
to inter-frequency
handover
Hystfor2B,
Hystfor2D,
Hystfor2F: 4
(2 dB)
Set: ADD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforHHO
TrigTime2B
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
Level
HystforHHO
: 0 (0 dB)
Time-to-Trigger
related to interfrequency hard
handover
TrigTimeHHO
TrigTime2B:
D0
TrigTime2D:
D320
TrigTime2F:
D1280
TrigTimeHH
O: 0
InterFreqCSThd
2FRSCP
InterFreqPSThd
2FRSCP
InterFreqCSThd
2DRSCP
RSCP-Based
inter-frequency
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
2D: -95 dBm;
Ec/No-based
inter-frequency
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
2D: -16 dB
2F: -92 dBm
InterFreqPSThd
2DRSCP
8
InterFreqCSThd
2FEcNo
InterFreqPSThd
2FEcNo
InterFreqCSThd
2DEcNo
2F: -12 dB
InterFreqPSThd
2DEcNo
2-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
InterFreqCovH
OCSThdRSCP
Target frequency
trigger threshold
of inter-frequency
coverage
RSCP: -92
dBm
Current used
frequency quality
threshold of interfrequency
handover
RSCP: -92
dBm
Inter-frequency
measurement
minimum access
thresholds
RSCP: -115
dBm
Cell individual
offset
0 dB
InterFreqCovH
OPSThdRSCP
Relevant
Command
Level
Set: ADD
INTERFREQN
CELL
NCell
Ec/No: -12
dB
InterFreqCovH
OCSThdEcN0
InterFreqCovH
OPSThdEcN0
10
IFHOUsedFreq
CSThdRSCP
IFHOUsedFreq
CSThdRSCP
IFHOUsedFreq
CSThdEcNo
Ec/No: -12
dB
IFHOUsedFreq
PSThdEcNo
11
HHORSCPmin
HHOEcNomin
12
CellIndividalOf
fset
Ec/No: -16
dB
Query: LST
INTERFREQN
CELL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQN
CELL
13
INTERFREQR
ATSWITCH
Inter-Freq and
Inter-RAT coexist
switch
InterFreq
Set: ADD
CELLHOCOM
M
Cell
Query: LST
CELLHOCOM
M
Modify: MOD
CELLHOCOM
M
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-17
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
14
CoExistMeasTh
dChoice
InterFreq and
InterRAT coexist
measure threshold
choice
COEXIST_
MEAS_THD
_CHOICE_I
NTERFREQ
For RNC: SET

INTERFREQH
OCOV
RNC/
Cell
LST
INTERFREQH
OCOV
For Cell:ADD
CELLHOCOM
M
LST
CELLHOCOM
M
MOD
CELLHOCOM
M
15
INTERFREQM
EASTIME
Inter-freq measure
timer length[s]
60 s
Set: ADD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Cell
Query: LST
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERFR
EQHOCOV
2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode
In the inter-frequency handover based on coverage, this parameter is used to select the periodical
report or event trigger mode for inter-frequency measurement report.
2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Item
This parameter is used to determine whether to select Ec/No or RSCP as the measurement item.
The selection is performed when the inter-frequency measurement, such as 2D/2F event and
periodic measurement, is conducted in a cell.
2.2.3 Inter-Frequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter Coefficients
It is the measurement smoothing factor adopted in Layer 3 inter-frequency filtering.
2.2.4 Frequency Weighting Factor
This parameter is used to determine proportions of the optimal cell and other cells in the active
set at calculation of the frequency integrated quality.
2.2.5 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover
These parameters are trigger hysteresis for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO).
2.2.6 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover
These parameters are trigger delay time for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO) in
coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.
2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
2-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical inter-frequency

measurement reporting mode is adopted, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency
measurement event absolute thresholds when RSCP is used for measurement, including event
2D absolute threshold and event 2F absolute threshold.
2.2.8 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency
measurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.
2.2.9 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage
When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-based
inter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirement
satisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatory
conditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameter
is used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.
2.2.10 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover
When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters are
used for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer
than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.
2.2.11 Inter-Frequency Measurement Minimum Access Thresholds
When the periodical reporting mode is selected for inter-frequency coverage handover, the
quality measurement value of inter-frequency cell should satisfy the inter-frequency handover
absolute value. Moreover, its RSCP and EcNo quality must satisfy the minimum access
threshold, so inter-frequency handover may take place. The minimum access threshold
corresponding to RSCP is HHORSCPmin, and that corresponding to EcNo is HHOEcNomin.
It is the cell offset for inter-frequency handover.
2.2.13 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Algorithm Switches
This describes how to perform neighbor measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and interRAT cells as its neighbors.
2.2.14 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Threshold Choice
This parameter determines what configuration parameters for events 2D and 2F should be chosen
based on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbors.
2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measure Timer Length
2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode

In the inter-frequency handover based on coverage, this parameter is used to select the periodical
report or event trigger mode for inter-frequency measurement report.
Parameter ID
InterFreqReportMode
Value Range
Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-19
RAN

Periodical_reporting indicates adoption of the periodical reporting mode.
Event_trigger indicates adoption of the event trigger mode.
Parameter Setting
The default value is Periodical_reporting.
There are two optional inter-frequency handover report modes in RNC: event report and
periodical report, which are selected through the inter-frequency report mode switch. This
algorithm switch is oriented to RNC configuration.
l
Event report:
To prevent ping-pong before and after inter-frequency handover, use 2B event (when the
current in-use frequency quality is less than the absolute threshold used frequency quality
threshold, the non-used frequency quality is greater than the other absolute threshold
target frequency trigger threshold) as the trigger event for judging origination of interfrequency handover. As the 2B event has no event transfer period, the retry function after
handover failure is not implemented, unless this cell can trigger 2B event again.
Periodical report:
Use events 2D and 2F as the compressed mode to start and stop event, and periodically
report the measurement result of inter-frequency neighboring cell in the compressed mode
period. When the cell quality reported by UE is greater than the sum of an absolute threshold
and the relative hysteresis, the delay trigger timer starts. If the requirement is always
satisfied when the timer is expired, inter-frequency handover is started after the delay
trigger timer is expired. If handover fails, handover judging continues in accordance with
the inter-frequency measurement periodical report.

The periodical report and event report modes have their own advantages and disadvantages. At
present, the traditional periodical report mode is still adopted.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set it through SET
INTERFREQHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.
Parameter oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add it through ADD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, and
modify it through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.
2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Item

This parameter is used to determine whether to select Ec/No or RSCP as the measurement item.
The selection is performed when the inter-frequency measurement, such as 2D/2F event and
periodic measurement, is conducted in a cell.
Parameter ID
InterFreqMeasQuantity
2-20
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
Enum (CPICH Ec_No, CPICH_RSCP, and BOTH)

None
Parameter Setting
The default setting is BOTH.
This parameter indicates the inter-frequency measurement items that are used for inter-frequency
hard handover evaluation. These items are the 2D event, the 2F event, the 2B event, and the
inter-frequency measurement item used for periodic measurement.
In addition, this parameter determines the measurement items used for evaluating the quality of
frequencies. These frequencies are used for the 2D or 2F event stopped during the start of intersystem measurement and the 3A event. On the primary stage of the 3G coverage, the full
coverage is difficult to fulfill. Some areas such as indoor area still require the GSM system to
cover. Thus, the recommended value for this parameter is CPICHRSCP in this situation.
In the measurement policy of the intra-frequency soft handover, the Ec/N0 of the pilot channel
serves as the measurement item for handover. In the cells on the edge of bearer coverage,
however, it is improper to still use Ec/N0 as the measurement item for inter-frequency hard
handover. The value of the measurement item Ec/N0 is determined by the RSCP strength of the
pilot signal and the downlink interference.
The downlink interference of the WCDMA system are mainly the background noise and the
downlink signal interference of intra-frequency cells such as local cells and neighboring cells.
The downlink interference strength of intra-frequency cells are affected by path loss and slow
fading, which is analogous to the fading of the signals (such as CPICHRSCP) received by an
UE. On the edge of the coverage area of a bearer, the fading speed of CPICHRSCP is basically
the same as the fading speed of interference when an UE in the current bearer cell moves to
another bearer cell that is related to the cell currently used by the UE. Because the background
noise is not affected by path loss, the fading speed of CPICH RSCP is slightly faster, depending
on the strength of background noise. Thus, the UE receives the change of CPICH Ec/I0 very
slowly. Both the simulation result and the actual test result prove that CPICH Ec/I0 can reach
-12 dB when CPICH RSCP received by an UE reaches about -110 dBm. According to the
relevant protocol, the minimum demodulation sensitivity of an UE is -117 dBm. Therefore, if
only Ec/I0 is used, inter-frequency measurement may not be started in the event of a call drop.
To solve this problem, you must add the selection control of the inter-frequency measurement
items of cells. That is, you must use CPICH RSCP as the measurement items of inter-frequency
cells for the cells on the edge of bearer coverage. For the central area of bearer coverage, you
can still use CPICHEc/N0 as an inter-frequency measurement item. This can enable instant interfrequency handover to avoid call drop in the event of an intra-frequency handover failure.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-21
RAN
CAUTION
The value BOTH ensures the higher adaptability for triggering the 2D event. It can also be used
for measuring RSCP and EcN0. Thus, BOTH is regarded as the default setting. Two active sets
of measurement items are delivered simultaneously. One 2D/2F measurement item is set to
CPICH_EcN0. The other item is set to CPICH_RSCP. The 2D event report of either
measurement item can trigger the delivery of inter-frequency measurement control.

This parameter is set on the basis of cell location in the network and whether the inter-system
neighboring cells exist.
Relevant Commands
RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: use the SET
INTERFREQHOCOV command for configuration and use the LST
INTERFREQHOCOV command for query.
Cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: use the
ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV command for addition, the LST
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV command for query, and the
MODCELLINTERFREQHOCOV command for modification.
2.2.3 Inter-Frequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter Coefficients

It is the measurement smoothing factor adopted in Layer 3 inter-frequency filtering.
Parameter ID
InterFreqFilterCoef
Value Range
Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19), working range:
Enum(D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8)

Enum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)
Parameter Setting
The default value is D3namely 3.
The physical meaning and measurement model of this parameter are the same as those of intrafrequency measurement; what is different is that the report cycle of inter-frequency measurement
is 480 ms, while the report cycle of intra-frequency measurement is 200 ms. In inter-frequency
measurement, according the different types of cells, the CPICH RSCP or CPICH Ec/No is likely
to be adopted. Filter coefficient corresponding to different measurement has little difference.
2-22
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

l
The greater this parameter, the stronger the signal smoothing effect, and the stronger the
fast fading resistance capability, but the weaker the signal change tracing capability, which
may result in call drop if handover is not implemented timely.
If the setting of this parameter is too low, the probability of unnecessary hard handover and
ping-pong handover increases.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameter: set it through SET
For cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameter: add it through ADD

Parameter ID
WeightForUsedFreq
Value Range
0 to 20

0 to 2, step 0.1
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0, that is, only the best cell quality in the active set is used as the current
frequency quality.
WeightForUsedFreq is used for evaluation of events 2B, 2C, 2D and 2F. The carrier quality
evaluation formula is as follows:
Where,
l
Qfrequencyj is the estimated quality (dB value) of frequency j;
Mfrequencyj is the estimated quality (linear value) of frequency j;
Mij is the measurement result of cell i in the active set of frequency j;
NA j is the number of cells in the active set of frequency j;
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-23
RAN
l
MBestj is the measurement result of optimal cell in the active set of frequency j;
Wj is the frequency weighting factor.
To set this parameter, refer to the setting method for intra-frequency handover weighting factor
Weight.

l
The greater this parameter, the higher the current frequency quality estimated value under
the same condition, and the more difficult inter-frequency handover occurs.
The less this parameter, the lower the current frequency quality estimated value, and the
easier inter-frequency handover triggered.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set it through SET
Parameter oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add it through ADD
2.2.5 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover

These parameters are trigger hysteresis for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO).
Parameter ID
Hystfor2B
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforHHO
Value Range
0 to 29

Parameter Setting
The default values for Hystfor2B, Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB. The default
value for HystforHHO is 0.
Under periodic report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to
overcome the occurrence of ping-pong handover of events 2D (the estimated quality of the
current frequency is lower than the threshold) and 2F (the estimated quality of the current
frequency is higher than the threshold).
2-24
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Under event report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to decrease
the frequently handover triggered by event 2B because of radio signal changing.

The greater the hysteresis values, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability, and
the better the ping-pong effect depressed. However, the response speed of the handover
algorithm to signal changes is weakened at the same time.
Relevant Commands
For RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SET
INTERFREQHOCOV and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.
For cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADD
CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, and
modify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.
2.2.6 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover

These parameters are trigger delay time for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO) in
coverage-oriented inter frequency handover.
Parameter ID
TrigTime2B
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
TrigTimeHHO
Value Range
Value range of TrigTime2B, TrigTime2D, TrigTime2F is Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80,
D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000), working range : Enum
(D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)
Value range of TrigTimeHHO is 0 to 64000.

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000)ms
Physical value range of TrigTimeHHO is 0 to 64000ms
Parameter Setting
The default values are as follows:
l
TrigTime2B: D0;
TrigTime2D: D320;
TrigTime2F: D1280;
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-25
RAN
l
TrigTimeHHO:0

The greater the time-to-trigger values, the smaller the average handover frequency; but the
increase of the time-to-trigger setting increases the risk of call drop.
Relevant Commands
2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop

Thresholds
In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical inter-frequency
measurement reporting mode is adopted, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency
measurement event absolute thresholds when RSCP is used for measurement, including event
2D absolute threshold and event 2F absolute threshold.
Current Frequency
Measurement Value
UE
RNC
lower than the event 2D

absolute threshold
reports event 2D
sends signaling to start the

compressed mode and begin
inter-frequency
measurement
higher than the event 2F

absolute threshold
repots event 2F
sends signaling to close the

compressed mode and stop
inter-frequency
measurement
Parameter ID
Based on different bearer data domains, it can be:
InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP (the CS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated by
RSCP)
InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP (the CS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated by
RSCP)
InterFreqPSThd2DRSCP (the PS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated by
RSCP)
InterFreqPSThd2FRSCP (the PS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated by
RSCP)
2-26
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
-115 to -25

-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
l
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP, InterFreqPSThd2DRSCP are -95, namely

-95 dBm.
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP, InterFreqPSThd2FRSCP are -92, namely

-92 dBm.
The inter-frequency measurement start threshold (which is the compressed mode start threshold)
is the most critical parameter in the inter-frequency handover policy. This set of parameters
influence the proportion of users in cells entering the compressed mode and the success rate of
hard handover. The following factors should be considered in the setting of this set of parameters:
l
UE moving speed
cell radius
path loss

Events 2D and 2F are the start and stop switches of the compressed mode. When the cell is at
the verge of carrier coverage, the RSCP measured values are used as the decision criterion for
2D and 2F. Therefore, lower the 2D thresholds if the compressed mode is expected to start as
early as possible. To reduce the ping-pong start and stop of the compressed mode, increase
appropriately the difference between the thresholds of the 2D and 2F.
Relevant Commands
2.2.8 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop

Thresholds
In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequency
measurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.
Parameter ID
InterFreqCSThd2DEcNo (CS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated by Ec/No)
InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo (CS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated by Ec/No)
InterFreqPSThd2DEcNo (PS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated by Ec/No)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-27
RAN
InterFreqPSThd2FEcNo (PS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated by Ec/No)
Value Range
-24 to 0

Parameter Setting
l
The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DecNo and InterFreqPSThd2DecNo are -16,

namely -16 dB
The default values for InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo and InterFreqPSThd2FecNo are -12,

namely -12 dB.
For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement

Start/Stop Thresholds.

The events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. When the cell is at the carrier
coverage center, Ec/No measured value is taken as the decision criterion for events 2D and 2F.
Therefore, set the event 2D threshold to a relatively greater value if the compressed mode is
expected to start as early as possible; otherwise, set it to a relatively less value. To control the
ping-pong effect of the compressed mode start/stop, increase appropriately the difference
between the thresholds for events 2D and 2F.
Relevant Commands
2.2.9 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency

Coverage
When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-based
inter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirement
satisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatory
conditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameter
is used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.
Parameter ID
InterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo (target frequency Ec/No trigger threshold of CS service)
InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP (target frequency RSCP trigger threshold of CS service)
InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo (target frequency Ec/No trigger threshold of PS service)
2-28
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP (target frequency RSCP trigger threshold of PS service)
Value Range
InterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo and InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo: -24 to 0
InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP and InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP: -115 to -25

InterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo and InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo: -24 dB to 0 dB
InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP and InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values of InterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo and InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo are -12
dB.
The default values of InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP and InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP are -92
dBm.

The greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SET
INTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADD
2.2.10 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of InterFrequency Handover

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters are
used for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer
than this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.
Parameter ID
Based on different inter-frequency measurement quantities in use and different borne services,
it can be:
IFHOUsedFreqCSThdEcNo (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of CS service)
IFHOUsedFreqPSThdEcNo (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of PS service)
IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of CS service)
IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of PS service)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-29
RAN
Value Range
IFHOUsedFreqCSThdEcNo and IFHOUsedFreqPSThdEcNo: -24 to 0
IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP: -115 to -25

IFHOUsedFreqCSThdECNo and IFHOUsedFreqPSThdECNo: -24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1
dBm
Parameter Setting
The default values of IFHOUsedFreqCSThdEcNo and IFHOUsedFreqPSThdEcNo are -12 dB.
The default values of IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP are -92
dBm.
Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:
The cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and cannot better satisfy the coverage
requirement of current service. After handover is completed, it is hard to hand over to the current
used frequency cell again even inter-frequency measurement is started again. In other words,
these parameters should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F, or equal to the threshold
of event 2D.

Higher values of these parameters get event 2B to be more easily triggered.
Relevant Commands
2.2.11 Inter-Frequency Measurement Minimum Access Thresholds

When the periodical reporting mode is selected for inter-frequency coverage handover, the
quality measurement value of inter-frequency cell should satisfy the inter-frequency handover
absolute value. Moreover, its RSCP and EcNo quality must satisfy the minimum access
threshold, so inter-frequency handover may take place. The minimum access threshold
corresponding to RSCP is HHORSCPmin, and that corresponding to EcNo is HHOEcNomin.
Parameter ID
HHORSCPmin
HHOEcNomin
2-30
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
HHOEcNomin: -24 to 0
HHORSCPmin: -115 to -25

HHOEcNomin: -24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB
HHORSCPmin: -115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default value of HHOEcNomin is -16 dB, and the default value of HHORSCPmin is -115
dBm.
The minimum quality requirements for EcNo and RSCP ensure that the target cell quality is not
too poor.

l
The greater these parameters, the more difficult the inter-frequency handover occurs, but
the quality after handover can be ensured.
The less these parameters, the looser the inter-frequency handover requirement, but it may
lead to handover to a poor cell and occurrence of ping-pong handover.
Relevant Commands

It is the cell offset for inter-frequency handover.
Parameter ID
CellIndividalOffset
Value Range
-20 to 20

Parameter Setting
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-31
RAN
It is the CPICH measurement offset of neighboring cell. The UE uses the sum of the original
measurement value of the cell and this offset as the measurement result for the UE interfrequency handover decision. This parameter plays the role of moving the cell boarder in the
handover algorithm.
This parameter is configured according to the actual environment in the network planning. In
the neighboring cell configuration, set this parameter to a positive value if handover is expected
to occur easily; otherwise, set it to a negative value.

l
The greater this parameter, the more easily inter-frequency hard handover occurs.
The less this parameter, the more difficult hard handover occurs.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL, query it through LST
INTERFREQNCELL, and modify it through MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
2.2.13 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Algorithm Switches

This describes how to perform neighbor measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and interRAT cells as its neighbors.
Parameter ID
InterFreqRATSwitch
Value Range
Enum(InterFreq, InterRAT, SimInterFreqRAT)

Only the inter-frequency neighbors are measured. Only the inter-RAT neighbors are measured.
The inter-frequency neighbors and the inter-RAT neighbors are measured at the same time.
Parameter Setting
The default setting is InterFreq.
For a cell having both inter-frequency neighbors and inter-RAT neighbors, configure the cell
based on the actual handover policy.
InterFreq: measures only the inter-frequency cells and conducts inter-frequency handover.
InterRAT: conducts only the inter-RAT handover for the cells only in the GSM network.
SimInterFreqRAT: measures the inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells simultaneously. For the
SimInterFreqRAT, the time for handover depends on what cells have the highest handover
priority.
The algorithm switch is invalid when only inter-frequency cells or inter-RAT cells are available.
2-32
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

This parameter determines the cell handover policy in case inter-frequency neighbors co-exist
with inter-RAT neighbors. Configure this parameter for each cell.
Relevant Commands
This parameter is a cell-oriented handover global parameter. Set this parameter through ADD
CELLHOCOMM, query it through LST CELLHOCOMM, and modify it through MOD
CELLHOCOMM.
2.2.14 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Threshold Choice

Parameter ID
CoExistMeasThdChoice
Value Range
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ: indicates that 2D and 2F measurement
threshold parameters orientated to inter-frequency are chosen as thresholds for cell subscribers
to enable or disable the compress mode.
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT: indicates that 2D and 2F measurement
threshold parameters orientated to inter-RAT are chosen as thresholds for cell subscribers to
enable or disable the compress mode.
Parameter Setting
The default setting is COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ.
During the setting, take into account the following items: Thresholds for 2D and 2F events in
inter-frequency and inter-RAT systems, thresholds for the inter-frequency or inter-RAT
handover, and current handover policies. For instance, you plan to choose inter-frequency
neighbors when the inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbors coexist, you can choose the
measurement threshold parameters for the inter-frequency in case the threshold for an inter-RAT
2D event is greater than that for an inter-frequency 2D event.

Set based on actual network handover policies.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to the RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set it through SET
HOCOMM and query it through LST HOCOMM.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-33
RAN
Parameter oriented to cell handover algorithm: add it through ADD CELLHOCOMM, query
it through LST CELLHOCOMM, and modify it through MOD CELLHOCOMM.
2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measure Timer Length

Parameter ID
INTERFREQMEASTIME
Value Range
Integer: 1 to 512

Integer: 1 s to 512 s
Parameter Setting
The default value is 60 s.
The expiration length for inter-frequency measurement timer. The system stops inter-frequency
measurement and disables the compressed mode if enabled, if no inter-frequency handover
occurs upon expiry of the inter-frequency measurement timer.
This parameter is used to prevent a cell from being in inter-frequency measurement state for a
long time, for the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the measurement requirements.

This parameter is used to reduce the impact on serving cells by shortening the time for mode
compression.
Closing the compress mode in advance results in UE's failure to initiate an inter-frequency
handover. The coverage-based inter-frequency handover may lead to call drops.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to the cell inter-frequency handover algorithm, add it through ADD
2.3 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management

Parameters
The common configurable coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters are
listed here.
2-34
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Table 2-3 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters

No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
InterRATFilte
rCoef
Inter-RAT
measurement
filter coefficient
D3
For RNC
Set or modify: SET
INTERRATHOCO
V
Query: LST
INTERRATHOCO
V
For Cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC
2D2FFilterCo
ef
2
InterRATRep
ortMode
Inter-RAT
measurement
report mode
Periodical_r
eporting
WeightForUse
dFreq
Frequency
weighting factor
InterPeriodRe
portInterval
Inter-RAT period
report interval
D1000
(1000 ms)
BSICVerify
BSIC verify
selection switch
Require
2D2FMeasQu
antity
Inter-RAT
measurement
quantity
2D2FMeas
Quantity:
BOTH
3AMeasQuant
ity
InterRATCST
hd2DRSCP
InterRATPST
hd2DRSCP
InterRATCST
hd2FRSCP
InterRATPST
hd2FRSCP
Cell
3AMeasQu
antity:
CPICH_RS
CP
RSCP-Based
inter-RAT
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
InterRatCS
Thd2DRscp
: -100 (dBm)
InterRatPST
hd2DRscp:
-110 (dBm)
InterRatCS
Thd2FRscp:
-97 (dBm)
InterRatPST
hd2FRscp:
-107 (dBm)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-35
RAN
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
InterRATCST
hd2DEcN0
Ec/No-Based
inter-RAT
measurement
start/stop
thresholds
InterRATC
SThd2DEc
N0: -14 (dB)
InterRATPST
hd2DEcN0
InterRATCST
hd2FEcN0
Relevant
Command
Level
InterRATPS
Thd2DEcN
0: -15 (dB)
InterRATC
SThd2FEcN
0: -12 (dB)
InterRATPST
hd2FEcN0
InterRATPS
Thd2FEcN0
: -13 (dB)
9
InterRATCov
HOCSThd
InterRATCov
HOPSThd
10
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
TrigTime3A
Inter-RAT
handover judging
thresholds
16, that is,

-95 dBm
Time-to-Trigger
related to interRAT handover
event
TRIGTIME
2D: D320
TRIGTIME
2F: D1280
TRIGTIME
3A: D0
11
Hystfor3A
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
Hysteresis related
with inter-RAT
handover
coverage
2D/2F/3A: 4
(2 dB)
HystforInterR
AT
2-36
HystforInter
RAT: 0(0
dB)
12
TimeToTrigF
orVerify
Time-to-Trigger
for verified GSM
cell
0, that is,
handover
immediately
13
TimeToTrigF
orNonVerify
Time-to-Trigger
for non-verified
GSM cell
65535, that
is, handover
to nonverified
GSM cell is
forbidden
14
PenaltyTimef
orInterRATH
O
Penalty time for

inter-RAT
handover
30 s
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
15
CellIndividal
Offset
Cell individual
offset
0 dB
Set: ADD
GSMNCELL
NCell
Query: LST
GSMNCELL
Modify: MOD
GSMNCELL
16
IRHOUsedFre
qCSThdEcN0
IRHOUsedFre
qPSThdEcN0
IRHOUsedFre
qCSThdRSCP
IRHOUsedFre
qPSThdRSCP
17
InterRATMea
sTime
Inter-RAT CS
used frequency
trigger Ec/No
threshold
IRHOUsed
FreqCsThd
EcN0: -12
(dB)
Inter-RAT PS
used frequency
trigger Ec/No
threshold
IRHOUsed
FreqPsThdE
cN0: -13
(dB)
Inter-RAT CS
used frequency
trigger RSCP
threshold
IRHOUsed
FreqCsThd
Rscp: -97
(dBm)
Inter-RAT PS
used frequency
trigger RSCP
threshold
IRHOUsed
FreqPsThd
Rscp: -107
(dBm)
Inter-RAT
measure timer
length
60 s
For RNC
Set or modify: SET
INTERRATHOCO
V
Query: LST
INTERRATHOCO
V
For Cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERRAT
HOCOV
RNC
Cell
2.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficients

In the inter-RAT handover based on coverage, these parameters refer to the measurement smooth
coefficient adopted at L3 inter-RAT measurement report filtering and the measurement smooth
coefficient adopted at events 2D and 2F report.
2.3.2 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode
In the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, this parameter is used to select the periodical report
or event trigger mode for inter-RAT measurement report.
2.3.4 Inter-RAT Period Report Interval
The parameter is used to determine the measurement report interval when the inter-RAT
measurement report mode chooses Periodical_Reporting.
2.3.5 BSIC Verify Selection Switch
This parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell. If it is set to Require,
report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded.
If it is set to Not_Require, then all the measured cells can be reported so long as they satisfy the
above report condition, regardless of their BSICs correctly decoded or not.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-37
RAN
2.3.6 Inter-RAT Measurement Quantity

Parameter 2D2FMeasQuantity is used to configure events 2D and 2F measurement quantity
for starting and stopping inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP. Parameter
3AMeasQuantity is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for inter-RAT
measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.
2.3.7 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement
events when RSCP is used for measurement.
2.3.8 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds
This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement event
when Ec/No is used for measurement.
2.3.9 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds
Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judging
threshold InterRATCovHOCSThd and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold
InterRATCovHOPSThd.
2.3.10 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover
In coverage-oriented inter frequency handover, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-totrigger for 2D (TrigTime2D), time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A
(TrigTime3A).
2.3.11 Hysteresis Related to Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover
In the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, hystereses triggered by events include 3A hysteresis
Hystfor3A, 2D hysteresis Hystfor2D, 2F hysteresis Hystfor2F, and inter-RAT handover
hysteresis HystforInterRAT.
2.3.12 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cell
This parameter refers to the delay trigger time of GSM cell verified already by the BS identity
code BSIC. If the signal quality of GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the inter-RAT
handover judging condition in the time range stipulated by this parameter value, and the GSM
neighboring cell is in the verified state, the network starts the inter-RAT handover process.
2.3.13 Time to Trigger for Non-verified GSM Cell
This parameter represents the delay time for triggering a GSM cell unacknowledged by BSIC.
In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets the
requirement for inter-RAT handover and this cell is unacknowledged, the network starts interRAT handover.
2.3.14 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT Handover
For inter-RAT handover failure to the GSM cell, possibly it is refused because the load of this
cell is heavy. Therefore, no inter-RAT handover request is sent to this cell in the time range
stipulated by this parameter value.
This parameter refers to the inter-RAT handover cell individual offset.
2.3.16 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover
This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode is
adopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer than
this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.
2.3.17 Inter-RAT Measure Timer Length
This parameter defines the valid time for inter-RAT measurement. If the timer cannot find an
appropriate inter-RAT cell to initiate the inter-RAT handover, for instance, the event 3A report
is not received or all period reports cannot satisfy the trigger condition for the inter-RAT
2-38
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
handover, the RNC disables the compress mode to release the resources for inter-RAT
measurement and waits for the inter-RAT measurement of the next round.
2.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficients

In the inter-RAT handover based on coverage, these parameters refer to the measurement smooth
coefficient adopted at L3 inter-RAT measurement report filtering and the measurement smooth
coefficient adopted at events 2D and 2F report.
Parameter ID
InterRATFilterCoef
2D2FFilterCoef
Value Range
Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19)

Enum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)
Parameter Setting
The default values for both InterRATFilterCoef and 2D2FFilterCoef are D3, namely 3.
The physical meaning and measurement model of these parameters are the same as those of
inter-frequency measurement, and the reporting periods are 480 ms. For the specific analysis,
refer to 2.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient and 2.2.3 InterFrequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter Coefficients.

The greater these parameter, the stronger the effect on signal smoothness, the stronger the fastfading resistance capability, but the weaker the tracing capability for signal change, and call
drops due to handover failure. If these values are set too low, unnecessary inter-RAT handover
occurs.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SET
INTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.
For parameters oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and
modify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.
2.3.2 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode

In the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, this parameter is used to select the periodical report
or event trigger mode for inter-RAT measurement report.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-39
RAN
Parameter ID
InterRATReportMode
Value Range
Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)

Periodical_reporting indicates adoption of the periodical reporting mode.
Event_trigger indicates adoption of the event trigger mode.
Parameter Setting
The default value is Periodical_reporting.
There are two optional inter-frequency handover report modes in RNC: event report and
periodical report, which are selected through the inter-RAT report mode switch. This algorithm
switch is oriented to RNC configuration.
l
Event report:
To prevent ping-pong before and after inter-RAT handover, event 3A (the current used
frequency quality is lower than the absolute threshold, and the GSM cell level is higher
than the other absolute threshold) is used as the trigger event for judging origination of
inter-RAT handover. To improve the handover success ratio, the GSM cell BSIC of the
trigger event must be decoded correctly by EU. As the event 3A has no event transfer period,
the retry function after handover failure is not implemented, unless this cell can trigger
event 3A again.
Periodical report:
When the level of the GSM cell reported by UE is higher than the inter-RAT event 2D
absolute threshold + hysteresis, it starts the delay trigger timer. If the clock satisfies
requirement during timer expires, start the inter-frequency handover after the delay trigger
timer is expires. If handover fails, retry in accordance with the inter-RAT measurement
periodical report.

The periodical report and event report modes have their own advantages and disadvantages. At
present, the traditional periodical report mode is still adopted.
Relevant Commands
For parameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SET
INTERRATHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.
For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADD
CELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modify
it through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.
2-40
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

Parameter ID
WeightForUsedFreq
Value Range
0 to 20

0 to 2, step 0.1
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0, that is, only the best cell quality in the active set is used as the current
frequency quality.
WeightForUsedFreq is used for evaluation of events 2D and 2F. The carrier quality evaluation
formula is as follows:
Here,
l
Qfrequencyj is the estimated quality (dB value) of frequency j.
Mfrequencyj is the estimated quality (linear value) of frequency j.
Mij is the measurement result of cell i in the active set of frequency j.
NAj is the number of cells in the active set of frequency j.
MBestj is the measurement result of optimal cell in the active set of frequency j.
Wj is the frequency weighting factor.
For setting this parameter, refer to the setting method for intra-frequency handover weighting
factor.

l
The greater this parameter is, the higher the current frequency quality estimated value is
calculated under the same condition, and the more difficult the inter-frequency handover
occurs.
The lower the parameter is, the lower the current frequency quality estimated value is, and
the easier the inter-frequency handover is triggered.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-41
RAN
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SET
Parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADD
2.3.4 Inter-RAT Period Report Interval

The parameter is used to determine the measurement report interval when the inter-RAT
measurement report mode chooses Periodical_Reporting.
Parameter ID
InterRATPeriodReportInterval
Value Range
Enum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000,
D8000, D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000, D64000)

Enum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms, 3000 ms, 4000 ms,
6000 ms, 8000 ms, 12000 ms, 16000 ms, 20000 ms, 24000 ms, 28000 ms, 32000 ms, 64000 ms)
Parameter Setting
The default value is D1000, namely, 1000 ms.
For the GSM RSSI measurement period is 480 ms, this parameter shall be greater than 480 ms.
If this parameter is too high, the handover judging time shall be long.

The bigger the report interval value is, the smaller the number of measurement report will be;
but the increase of the report interval setting will increase the risk of call drop.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to RNC interRAT handover algorithm: set it through SET
Parameter oriented to cell interRAT handover algorithm: add it through ADD

This parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell. If it is set to Require,
report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded.
If it is set to Not_Require, then all the measured cells can be reported so long as they satisfy the
above report condition, regardless of their BSICs correctly decoded or not.
2-42
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
BSICVerify
Value Range
Enum (Require, Not_Require)

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is Require.
This parameter is valid for both periodical report and event report. To ensure handover reliability,
it is recommended to make a report after BSIC verification.

When it is set to Not_Require, it is easier for handover to occur, but the handover is not as reliable
as in the Require mode.
Relevant Commands
2.3.6 Inter-RAT Measurement Quantity

Parameter 2D2FMeasQuantity is used to configure events 2D and 2F measurement quantity
for starting and stopping inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP. Parameter
3AMeasQuantity is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for inter-RAT
measurement, including EcNo and RSCP.
Parameter ID
2D2FMeasQuantity
3AMeasQuantity
Value Range
2D2FMeasQuantity: Enum (CPICH_EcNo, CPICH_RSCP, BOTH)
3AMeasQuantity: Enum (CPICH_EcNo, CPICH_RSCP)

None.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-43
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default value for 2D2FMeasQuantity is BOTH. Both the CPICH_Ec/No and the
CPICH_RSCP are criteria for the Active Set Quality. The RNC sends Active Set Measurement
control for each measurement quantity. Event 2D and Event 2F are only valid for corresponding
measurement quantity.
The default value for 3AMeasQuantity is CPICH_RSCP, which means to use the RSCP
measurement quantity for event 3A measurement. The physical unit is dBm.

Set it based on the cell location in the network.
Relevant Commands
2.3.7 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement
events when RSCP is used for measurement.
Parameter ID
InterRATCSThd2DRSCP (the CS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed with
RSCP)
InterRATPSThd2DRSCP (the PS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed with RSCP)
InterRATCSThd2FRSCP (the CS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with RSCP)
InterRATPSThd2FRSCP (the PS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with RSCP)
Value Range
-115 to -25

Parameter Setting
2-44
InterRatCSThd2DRSCP is -100 dBm;
InterRatCSThd2FRSCP is -97 dBm;
InterRatPSThd2DRSCP is -110 dBm;

Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
l
InterRatPSThd2FRSCP is -107dBm.

Start/Stop Thresholds. For multiRAB services, use the configuration of CS service if there
exits CS service.

Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service types
may have different requirements on the signal quality and different inter-RAT handover policies
to be adopted, the inter-RAT measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to
CS, PS and signaling.
When a cell is at the verger of carrier frequency coverage, it uses RSCP measurement values as
the decision criterion for 2D and 2F. Set the event 2D thresholds to a greater value if the
compressed mode is expected to start as early as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To
reduce ping-pong start/stop of the compressed mode, increase appropriately the difference
between the 2D and 2F thresholds.
Relevant Commands
2.3.8 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds

This set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement event
when Ec/No is used for measurement.
Parameter ID
InterRATCSThd2DEcNo (the CS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed with Ec/
No)
InterRATPSThd2DEcNo (the PS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed with Ec/
No)
InterRATCSThd2FEcNo (the CS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with Ec/
No)
InterRATPSThd2FEcNo (the PS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with Ec/No)
Value Range
-24 to 0

Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-45
RAN
Parameter Setting
l
InterRATCSThd2DEcNo is -14 dB;
InterRATCSThd2FEcNo is -12dB;
InterRATPSThd2DEcNo is -15dB;
InterRATPSThd2FEcNo is -13dB.

Start/Stop Thresholds. For multiRAB service, use the configuration of CS service if there exists
CS service.

Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service types
may require different signal qualities and different inter-RAT handover policies, the inter-RAT
measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to CS, PS and signaling.
When a cell is at the center of carrier frequency coverage, the Ec/No measured value is used as
the decision criterion of 2D and 2F. Set the event 2D threshold to a greater value if the compressed
mode is expected to start as early as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To eliminate
ping-pong start/stop of the compressed mode, increase appropriately the difference between the
2D and 2F thresholds.
Relevant Commands
For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD
2.3.9 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds

Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judging
threshold InterRATCovHOCSThd and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold
InterRATCovHOPSThd.
Parameter ID
InterRATCovHOCSThd
InterRATCovHOPSThd
Value Range
0 to 63

-110 dBmto -48 dBm
2-46
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
(0 corresponds to the value lower than -110 dBm; 1 corresponds to -110 dBm; 2 corresponds to
-109 dBm; ...; 63 corresponds to -48 dBm)
Parameter Setting
The default values are 16, namely, -95 dBm.
This set of parameters are used for inter-RAT coverage handover evaluation at the RNC side,
that is, Tother_RATin the formula introduced below. It is the absolute threshold of inter-RAT cell
quality (RSSI) at the time of inter-RAT handover judging.
If the inter-RATquality in the inter-RAT measurement report obtained at a moment satisfies the
following condition:
Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2
Then start the delay trigger timer Trigger-Timer, and handover judgment is made after the timer
expires. If the inter-RAT quality satisfies the following condition before the timer gets expired:
Mother_RAT + CIO < Tother_RAT - H/2
Then the timer stops timing, and the RNC goes on waiting for receiving of the inter-RAT
measurement report.

Configure these parameters differently according to different policies. If the MS can be handed
over only after the GSM cell quality is good enough, this parameter can be increased properly,
-85 dBm for example.
Relevant Commands
For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD
2.3.10 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover

In coverage-oriented inter frequency handover, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-totrigger for 2D (TrigTime2D), time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A
(TrigTime3A).
Parameter ID
TrigTime2D
TrigTime2F
TrigTime3A
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-47
RAN
Value Range
Enum
(D0,D10,D20,D40,D60,D80,D100,D120,D160,D200,D240,D320,D640,D1280,D2560,D5000
), working range: Enum(D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Physical value range of TrigTimeHHO is 0 to 64,000 ms
Parameter Setting
The default values are TrigTime3A: D0; TrigTime2D: D320; and TrigTime2F: D1280.

The greater the time-to-trigger values are, the smaller the average handover frequency is; but
the increase of the time-to-trigger setting increases the risk of call drop.
Relevant Commands
Parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SET
Parameters oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADD
2.3.11 Hysteresis Related to Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover

In the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, hystereses triggered by events include 3A hysteresis
Hystfor3A, 2D hysteresis Hystfor2D, 2F hysteresis Hystfor2F, and inter-RAT handover
hysteresis HystforInterRAT.
Parameter ID
Hystfor3A
Hystfor2D
Hystfor2F
HystforInterRAT
Value Range
Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 to 29
Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 to 15

Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 dB to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB
2-48
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 dB to 7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB
Parameter Setting
The default values for Hystfor2D , Hystfor2F and Hystfor3A are 4 (2dB). The default value for
HystforInterRAT is 0 (0 dB).
Here, HystforInterRAT is used to prevent wrong judgment caused by abrupt signal jitter during
inter-RAT handover judging, and it, together with the inter-RAT quality threshold, determines
whether to trigger an inter-RAT handover judgment.

The greater the hystereses values, the stronger the capability for resisting signal fluctuation, and
the ping-pong effect is suppressed, but the response speed to signal change by the handover
algorithm is weakened. If the inter-RAT handover hysteresis is set too high, the requirement for
inter-RAT quality is high, it is hard to trigger inter-RAT handover judging condition, and the
call drop ratio increases.
Relevant Commands
2.3.12 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cell

This parameter refers to the delay trigger time of GSM cell verified already by the BS identity
code BSIC. If the signal quality of GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the inter-RAT
handover judging condition in the time range stipulated by this parameter value, and the GSM
neighboring cell is in the verified state, the network starts the inter-RAT handover process.
Parameter ID
TimeToTrigForVerify
Value Range
0 to 64000

0 to 64000 ms
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0, namely, handover immediately.
Refer to the descriptions in the section about handover threshold. The trigger condition for interRAT handover judging:
Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-49
RAN
If inter-RAT quality satisfies the above trigger condition, then start the delay trigger timer
Trigger-Timer, and inter-RAT handover judgment can be made after the timer gets expired. The
length of this delay trigger timer is called delay trigger time. This parameter, together with
hysteresis, is used to prevent wrong judgment caused by signal jitter during inter-RAT handover
judging.

The longer the delay trigger time, the more difficult the handover occurs. The increase of the
delay trigger time increases the call drop risk.
Relevant Commands
2.3.13 Time to Trigger for Non-verified GSM Cell

This parameter represents the delay time for triggering a GSM cell unacknowledged by BSIC.
In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets the
requirement for inter-RAT handover and this cell is unacknowledged, the network starts interRAT handover.
Parameter ID
TimeToTrigForNonVerify
Value Range
0 to 64000, 65535

0 to 64000 ms, the value 65535 means that the RNC does not hand over to an unacknowledged
GSM cell
Parameter Setting
The default value is 65535, namely, the RNC does not hand over to an unacknowledged GSM
cell.

The longer the trigger is delayed , the more difficult the handover occurs. The increase of the
delay trigger time increases the call dropping risk.
Relevant Commands
2-50
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

For inter-RAT handover failure to the GSM cell, possibly it is refused because the load of this
cell is heavy. Therefore, no inter-RAT handover request is sent to this cell in the time range
stipulated by this parameter value.
Parameter ID
PenaltyTimeforInterRATHO
Value Range
0 to 60

0 to 60 s
Parameter Setting

The penalty time may be too short because the load status of the GSM cell is not changed, and
handover fails again. However, increase of the penalty trigger time increases the call dropping
risk.
Relevant Commands

This parameter refers to the inter-RAT handover cell individual offset.
Parameter ID
CellIndividalOffset
Value Range
-50 to 50
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-51
RAN

-50 dB to 50 dB
Parameter Setting
This parameter is used for the inter-RAT handover judging process. Set it based on the landform
feature of the GSM cell. UE uses the original measurement value of this cell plus this offset as
the measurement result for UE handover judging. It functions as the mobile cell border in the
handover algorithm. The greater the parameter, the higher the handover priority of this GSM
cell. Generally, configure it to 0 dB.

The greater this parameter, the easier to hand over to the GSM, and vice versa.
Relevant Commands
Set it through ADD GSMNCELL, query it through LST GSMNCELL, and modify it through
MOD GSMNCELL.
2.3.16 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT

Handover
This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode is
adopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer than
this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.
Parameter ID
Based on different inter-RAT measurement quantities in use and different borne services, this
parameter can be categorized as follows:
l
IRHOUsedFreqCSThdEcN0 (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of CS service)
IRHOUsedFreqPSThdEcN0 (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of PS service)
IRHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of CS service)
IRHOUsedFreqPSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of PS service)
Value Range
IRHOUsedFreqCSThdEcN0 and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdEcN0: -24 to 0
IRHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdRSCP: -115 to -25

IRHOUsedFreqCSThdEcN0 and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdEcN0: -24 dB to 0 dB
IRHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm
2-52
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default values for each parameter are as follows:
l
IRHOUsedFreqCsThdEcN0: -12 dB
IRHOUsedFreqPsThdEcN0: -13 dB
IRHOUsedFreqCsThdRscp: -97 dB
IRHOUsedFreqPsThdRscp: -107 dB
Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

Only when the quality of the current used frequency satisfies QUsed TUsed - H3a/2 and the
quality of target frequency satisfies Mother_RAT + CIO Tother_RAT + H/2, delay the time for
triggering the timer when the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-RAT measurement. A
3A event is report upon expiry of the timer.
where,
l
QUsed: estimated quality of the UTRAN frequency currently used.
Tused: indicates the quality threshold for the inter-RAT frequency currently used.
Mother_RAT: indicates the inter-RAT (GSM RSSI) measurement results.
Tother_RAT: indicates the threshold for judging the inter-RAT handover.
Cell individual offset (CIO): indicates the offset set by inter-RAT cells.
H: indicates the hysteresis. The setting on the hysteresis reduces incorrect judgement caused
by jitter signals.
When the cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and is lower than the threshold defined
by this parameter, infer that the current frequency cannot better satisfy the coverage requirement
of current service. The event 2F indicates that the current frequency quality is restored.
Therefore, this parameter should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F or equal to the
threshold of event 2D.
For composite services, use the parameters configured for CS services.

Higher values of these parameters get event 3A to be more easily triggered. When the value of
this parameter is too high, the UE may perform handover even when the signal quality is good
in current system.
Relevant Commands
INTERRATHOCOV and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.
Parameter oriented to the cell inter-RAT handover algorithm, add it through ADD

This parameter defines the valid time for inter-RAT measurement. If the timer cannot find an
appropriate inter-RAT cell to initiate the inter-RAT handover, for instance, the event 3A report
is not received or all period reports cannot satisfy the trigger condition for the inter-RAT
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-53
RAN
handover, the RNC disables the compress mode to release the resources for inter-RAT
measurement and waits for the inter-RAT measurement of the next round.
Parameter ID
InterRATMeasTime
Value Range
0 to 512

0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer. 1 s to 512 s.
Parameter Setting
The default value is 60 s. Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:
This parameter is used to prevent the UE from being in compress mode for a long time when
the UE stands still or moves slowly. The UE's being in compress mode not only disrupts the
service quality, but brings extra interference into the system and decreases the system capability.
Most of the inter-RAT handover can be complete within 60 seconds.

If this parameter is set too small, the UE cannot perform the inter-RAT handover. If this
parameter is set too great, the UE performs the inter-RAT handover too frequently. In the actual
network, you can collect the statistics on the inter-RAT handover and adopt an appropriate value
at the convenience of most users.
Relevant Commands
INTERRATHOCOV and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.
Parameter oriented to the cell inter-RAT handover algorithm, add it through ADD
2.4 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management

Parameters
The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters
are listed here.
2-54
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Table 2-4 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters

No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defaul
t Value
Relevant
Command
Level
CSServiceHOSw
itch
Inter-RAT service
handover switch
OFF
Set: ADD
CELLHOCOM
M
CELL
PSServiceHOSw
itch
Query: LST
CELLHOCOM
M
Modify: MOD
CELLHOCOM
M
InterRATFilterC
oef
Inter-RAT
measurement filter
coefficient
D3
Hystfor3C
Hysteresis of event
3C
0 dB
TrigTime3C
Time-to-Trigger
for event 3C
D640
(640
ms)
BSICVerify
BSIC verify
selection switch
Require
d
InterRATNCovH
OCSThd
Non-CoverageBased inter-RAT
handover judging
thresholds
21, that
is, -90
dBm
InterRATNCovH
OPSThd
7
PenaltyTimeforI
nterRATHO
Penalty Time for

inter-RAT
handover
30 s
InterRATHOAtte
mpts
Inter-RAT
handover max
attempt times
16
times
InterRATMeasTi
me
Inter-RAT measure
timer length
60 s
For RNC
Set or modify:
SET
INTERRATH
ONCOV
Query: LST
INTERRATH
ONCOV
For Cell
Set: ADD
CELLINTERR
ATHONCOV
Query: LST
CELLINTERR
ATHONCOV
Modify: MOD
CELLINTERR
ATHONCOV
RNC
Cell
2.4.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switches

These parameters decide whether the cell allows triggering CS and PS service handover.
2.4.2 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient
This parameter refers to the measurement smooth coefficient adopted for L3 inter-RAT
measurement report filter in the inter-RAT handover based on non-coverage.
2.4.3 Hysteresis of Event 3C
This parameter refers to the trigger hysteresis of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based on noncoverage.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-55
RAN
2.4.4 Time to Trigger for Event 3C

This parameter refers to the delay trigger event of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based on
non-coverage.
This parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell in the inter-RAT
handover based on non-coverage.
2.4.6 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds
Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds based on non-coverage involve the non-coverage interRAT CS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOCSThd and the non-coverage
inter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
This parameter refers to the penalty timer adopted when the non-coverage-based inter-RAT
handover fails. This parameter is valid for both service and load handover.
2.4.8 Inter-RAT Handover Max Attempt Times
This parameter is the maximum attempts of none-coverage-based inter-RAT handover.
This parameter defines that the system will stop inter-RAT measurement and disables the
compressed mode if enabled if no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RAT
measurement timer.
2.4.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switches

These parameters decide whether the cell allows triggering CS and PS service handover.
Parameter ID
CSServiceHOSwitch
PSServiceHOSwitch
Value Range
Enum (ON, OFF)

None.
Parameter Setting
The default values are OFF.
The service handover refers to the service handover attribute of each service and configuration
of related parameters at network side. Once the service is set up, the related measurement is
immediately triggered and inter-RAT handover is performed.
The two switches are just ON only when the service handover function is necessary. Normally
they are OFF.
2-56
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

Set the two switches according to the actual network handover strategies.
Relevant Commands
For cell-oriented common handover parameters: add them through ADD CELLHOCOMM,
query them through LST CELLHOCOMM, and modify them through MOD
CELLHOCOMM.
2.4.2 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient

This parameter refers to the measurement smooth coefficient adopted for L3 inter-RAT
measurement report filter in the inter-RAT handover based on non-coverage.
Parameter ID
InterRATFilterCoef
Value Range
Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19)

Enum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)
Parameter Setting
The default values is D3, namely 3.
The physical meaning and measurement model of this parameter are the same as those of the
inter-RAT handover measurement filter coefficient based on coverage. For the detailed analysis,
refer to 2.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficients.

The greater this parameter, the stronger the effect on signal smoothness, the stronger the fastfading resistance capability, but the weaker the tracing capability for signal change, and call
drops due to handover failure. If this value is set too low, unnecessary system handover occurs.
Relevant Commands
For parameter oriented to the RNC non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through
SET INTERRATHONCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHONCOV.
For parameter oriented to cell non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADD
CELLINTERFREQHONCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERFREQHONCOV, and
modify it through MOD CELLINTERFREQHONCOV.
2.4.3 Hysteresis of Event 3C

This parameter refers to the trigger hysteresis of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based on noncoverage.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-57
RAN
Parameter ID
Hystfor3C
Value Range
0 to 15

0 dB to 7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value for Hystfor3C is 0 (0 dB).
Event 3C means the GSM cell quality is greater than an absolute threshold.
Event 3C is used for inter-RAT load handover and service handover. When the inter-RAT cell
satisfies the following condition, event 3C report is triggered, and the corresponding cell is
placed in the event 3C trigger list. Report of event 3C is not repeated for the cell in the list.
MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT TotherRAT + H3C/2
Here,
l
H3C is event 3C hysteresis, namely, the parameter Hystfor3C.
TotherRAT is the report threshold of inter-RAT cell trigger event, and the corresponding
parameter is based on non-coverage inter-RAT handover threshold.
When the cell in the list satisfies the following condition:

MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT TotherRAT - H3C/2
The corresponding cell is deleted from the list.

The greater the hysteresis, the stronger the capability for resisting signal fluctuation, and the
ping-pong effect is suppressed, but the response speed to signal change by the handover
algorithm is weakened. If the inter-RAT handover hysteresis is set too high, the requirement for
inter-RAT quality is high, it is hard to trigger inter-RAT handover judging condition, and the
call dropping ratio increases.
Relevant Commands
2-58
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
2.4.4 Time to Trigger for Event 3C

This parameter refers to the delay trigger event of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based on
non-coverage.
Parameter ID
TrigTime3C
Value Range
D2560, D5000)

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Parameter Setting
The default value is D640, that is 640 ms.
The delay trigger time aims to reduce excessive events reports triggered occasionally for a
measurement result. Considering that the period for reporting to its L3 by the physical layer of
inter-RAT measurement UE is 480 ms, set it as the default value here temporarily.

The longer the delay is triggered, the more difficult the handover occurs, but increase of the
delay trigger time increases the call dropping risk.
Relevant Commands

This parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell in the inter-RAT
handover based on non-coverage.
Parameter ID
BSICVerify
Value Range
Enum (Require, Not_Require)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-59
RAN

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is Require.
If it is set as required, report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC)
is correctly decoded. If it is set to Non_Require, all the measured cells can be reported so long
as they satisfy the previous report condition, regardless of their BSICs whether correctly decoded
or not.
Usually, the handover due to non-coverage has a lower requirement for handover timeliness,
but has a higher requirement for the handover success rate. It is recommended to always set it
to Require to ensure the handover reliability.

When it is set to Not_Require, the handover occurs easily, but the handover is not as reliable as
the Require mode.
Relevant Commands
Parameter oriented to the RNC non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SET
INTERRATHONCOV, and it query through LST INTERRATHONCOV.
Parameter oriented to cell non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADD
CELLINTERRATHONCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV, and
modify it through MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV.
2.4.6 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Judging

Thresholds
Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds based on non-coverage involve the non-coverage interRAT CS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOCSThd and the non-coverage
inter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOPSThd.
Parameter ID
InterRATNCovHOCSThd
InterRATNCovHOPSThd
Value Range
0 to 63

-110 dBm to -48 dBm
(0 corresponds to the value lower than -110 dBm; 1 corresponds to -110 dBm; 2 correspondsto
-109 dBm; ...; 63 corresponds to -48 dBm)
2-60
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter Setting
All the default values are 21, namely, -90 dBm.
See the judging formula in 3C hysteresis.

Configure these parameters differently according to different policies. If the MS can be handed
over only after the GSM cell quality is good enough, this parameter can be increased properly,
-85 dBm for example.
Relevant Commands

This parameter refers to the penalty timer adopted when the non-coverage-based inter-RAT
handover fails. This parameter is valid for both service and load handover.
Parameter ID
PenaltyTimeForInterRATHO
Value Range
0 to 65535

0 to 65535 s
Parameter Setting
More devices take part in inter-RAT handover, the flow is complex, the delay is long, and the
probability corresponding to intra-system handover failure may be high. In addition, it may be
hard to recover the cause leading to failure in a short time. To reduce unnecessary handover
retries for the same cell and effect on processing of other flows, the penalty timer is added to
restrict multiple retries for the same cell in a short time. The specific value can be adjusted
according to the actual requirement.

The penalty time may be too short because the load status of the GSM cell is not changed, and
the handover fails again. However, increase of the penalty trigger time increases the call dropping
risk.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-61
RAN
Relevant Commands
2.4.8 Inter-RAT Handover Max Attempt Times

This parameter is the maximum attempts of none-coverage-based inter-RAT handover.
Parameter ID
InterRATHOAttempts
Value Range
0 to 16

0 to 16 times
Parameter Setting
The default value is 16 times.
Since more devices take part in the inter-RAT handover which has a complex flow, the handover
may take a longer delay, and the probability that the handover fails is relatively higher.
If the inter-RAT handover fails too much, the network resource is wasted and the service quality
is not guaranteed. Such problems can be effectively controlled by setting this parameter.

l
The higher the parameter is, the higher the probability is of the UE handover from one
system to another.
The lower the parameter is, the smaller influence is on the network quality.
Relevant Commands
INTERRATHONCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHONCOV.

This parameter defines that the system will stop inter-RAT measurement and disables the
compressed mode if enabled if no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RAT
measurement timer.
2-62
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
InterRATMeasTime
Value Range
0 to 512

0 means the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer
1 s to 512 s
Parameter Setting
To close compress mode in coverage-based inter-RAT handover can trigger event 2F, since there
is not event 2F in non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover, it only depends on the measurement
timer.

The higher the parameter value is, the bigger the probability of the UE handover from one system
to another one is. However, the lower the parameter value is, the smaller the influence to network
quality is.
Relevant Commands
INTERRATHONCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHONCOV.
2.5 Blind Handover Management Parameters

The common configurable blind handover management parameters are listed here.
Table 2-5 List of blind handover management parameters
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
BlindHoF
lag
Blind handover
flag
FALSE
For Inter-Freq
Set: ADD
INTERFREQNCE
LL
NCell
2-63
RAN
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
BlindHO
Prio
Blind handover
priority
Query: LST
INTERFREQNCE
LL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQNCE
LL
For Inter-RAT
Set:ADD
GSMNCELL
Query: LST
GSMNCELL
ModifyMOD
GSMNCELL
Level
2.5.1 Blind Handover Flag

This parameter indicates whether the blind handover is performed to the neighboring cell. Blind
handover means UE can directly handover to the neighboring cell without measuring it.
2.5.2 Blind Handover Priority
If the BlindHOFlag is TRUE, the BlindHOPrio is used to appoint the blind handover priority of
the neighboring cell.
2.5.1 Blind Handover Flag

This parameter indicates whether the blind handover is performed to the neighboring cell. Blind
handover means UE can directly handover to the neighboring cell without measuring it.
Parameter ID
BlindHoFlag
Value Range
Enum (FALSE and TRUE)

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value of BlindHoFlag is FALSE.
If there is a same coverage inter-freq neighboring cell, it can be set to TRUE.
2-64
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

Set the parameter according to actual network handover strategies. It may affect KPI
performance concerning the cells if the blind handover is allowed in related cells, especially the
emergent blind handover is.
Relevant Commands
For inter-frequency handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADD
INTERFREQNCELL , query it through LST INTERFREQNCELL , and modify it through
MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
For inter-RAT handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADD GSMNCELL, query
it through LST GSMNCELL, and modify it through MOD GSMNCELL.
2.5.2 Blind Handover Priority

If the BlindHOFlag is TRUE, the BlindHOPrio is used to appoint the blind handover priority of
the neighboring cell.
Parameter ID
BlindHOPrio
Value Range
BlindHOPrio: 0 to 30

None.
Parameter Setting
For this parameter, 0 represents the highest priority. The value range corresponds to only one
cell. Priorities 0 to 15 are assigned to concentric neighboring cells, which can ensure successful
handover. Priorities 16 to 30 are assigned to neighboring cells for blind handover, which cannot
ensure successful handover.

Set the parameter according to actual network handover strategies.
Relevant Commands
For inter-frequency handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADD
INTERFREQNCELL , query it through LST INTERFREQNCELL , and modify it through
MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
For inter-RAT handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADD GSMNCELL, query
it through LST GSMNCELL, and modify it through MOD GSMNCELL.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-65
RAN
2.6 Cell Selection and Reselection

The common configurable cell selection and reselection parameters are listed here.
Table 2-6 List of cell selection and reselection parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Param
eter
Meani
ng
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
IdleQhyst1s
Measur
ement
hysteres
is
paramet
ers
Qhyst1s:
2 (4 dB)
Set: ADD CELLSELRESEL
Cell
Qhyst2s:
1 (2 dB)
Modify: MOD
CELLSELRESEL
Load
level
offsets
0 dB
For intra-reeq
IdleQhyst2s
ConnQhyst1s
ConnQhyst2s
2
IdleQoffset1sn
IdleQoffset2sn
ConnQoffset1s
n
Query: LST CELLSELRESEL
Set: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL

Query: LST
INTRAFREQNCELL
ConnQoffset2s
n
Modify:MOD
INTRAFREQNCELL
Qoffset1sn
For inter-freq
Set: ADD INTERFREQNCELL
Query: LST
INTERFREQNCELL
Modify: MOD
INTERFREQNCELL
For inter_RAT
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
Query: LST GSMNCELL
Modify: MOD GSMNCELL
2-66
Qqualmin
Qrxlevmin
Minimu
m
quality
criterio
n
-18 dB
Minimu
m
access
level
-58, that
is, -115
dBm
Set: ADD CELLSELRESEL

Query: LST CELLSELRESEL
Modify: MOD
CELLSELRESEL
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Param
eter
Meani
ng
Default
Value
IdleSintrasearc
h
Cell
reselecti
on start
threshol
ds
IdleSintra
search
and
ConnSint
rasearch:
5 (10 dB)
ConnSintrasear
ch
IdleSintersearc
h
Relevant Command
Level
NCell
IdleSinter
search
and
ConnSint
ersearch:
4 (8 dB)
ConnSintersear
ch
SsearchRat
Ssearchra
t: 2 (4 dB)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
Treselections
Reselec
tion
hysteres
is time
1s
Qrxlevmin
Minimu -58, that

m
is, -115
access
dBm
level for
interRAT
cell
Set: ADD GSMNCELL
N/A
Qsearch_I
2G Idle
mode
MS's
searchin
g for 3G
cell
signal
level
threshol
d
7, that is,
always
FDD_Qoffset
3G cell
reselecti
on
signal
level
offset
0 dB
Query: LST GSMNCELL

Modify: MOD GSMNCELL
GSM
2-67
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Param
eter
Meani
ng
Default
Value
10
FDD_Qmin
3G cell
reselecti
on
signal
level
threshol
d
10 dB
Relevant Command
Level
2.6.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters

The measurement hysteresis parameters include measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and
measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s), which are used for the UE to measure the service cell
CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s) and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively . IdleQhyst1s and
IdleQhyst2s are used in idle state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in connecting state.
2.6.2 Load Level Offsets
These parameters are cell offsets used for cell selection and reselection. In the cell selection /
reselection process, when CPICH Ec/N0 is used for measurement, the cell offset is QOffset2sn;
when CPICH RSCP is used for measurement, IdleQoffsets and IdleQoffset2s used to idle state,
ConnQoffset1s and ConnQoffset2s used to connecting state. There exist ConnQoffset1s and
ConnQoffset2s only if SIB12 indication is set TRUE. In addition, there is only QOffset1sn in
inter-RAT cell selection and reselection, namely, not idle, connect, or QOffset2sn.
2.6.3 Minimum Quality Criterion
This parameter is the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the
cell only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is bigger than this threshold.
2.6.4 Minimum Access Level
This parameter is the minimum access level threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in
this cell only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.
2.6.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds
These parameters include the intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle and
connecting state), the inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle and
connecting state) and the inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat).
2.6.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time
If the signal quality of other cells (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is always better than the
quality of the current cell within the time specified by this parameter, the UE will reselect this
cell to reside in.
2.6.7 Minimum Access Level for Inter-RAT Cell
This parameter is the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cell. The UE can reside in
this cell only when GSM RSSI measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.
2.6.8 2G Idle Mode MS's Searching for 3G Cell Signal Level Threshold
A GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for 3G signal level threshold.
2.6.9 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Offset
A 3G cell can be reselected when the average signal level of the target 3G cell is FDD_Qosffset
greater than that of the current serving cell.
2-68
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
2.6.10 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Threshold

Only when the signal level in the target 3G cell is FDD_Qmin greater than the serving cell, the
target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.
2.6.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters

The measurement hysteresis parameters include measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) and
measurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s), which are used for the UE to measure the service cell
CPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s) and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively . IdleQhyst1s and
IdleQhyst2s are used in idle state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in connecting state.
Parameter ID
IdleQhyst1s
IdleQhyst2s
ConnQhyst1s
ConnQhyst2s
Value Range
0 to 20

Parameter Setting
The default value of Qhyst1s is 2 (4 dB), and the default value of Qhyst2s is 1 (2 dB). Qhyst2s
is optional. If it is not configured, Qhyst2s has the same value of measurement hysteresis 1.
According to the R criterion, the measured value of the current service cell participates in cell
reselection sequencing after this hysteresis is added to it. The values of these parameters are
related to the slow fading property of the area where the cell is located.
These parameters are used mainly to prevent the ping-pong effect of the cell reselection result
due to the slow fading when the UE is at the cell verge. The ping-pong effect may cause frequent
location updates (idle mode), URA updates (URA_PCH) or cell updates (CELL_FACH,
CELL_PCH); which results in increased network signaling load and higher loss of UE battery
energy.

The greater these hysteresis parameters, the less likely the various types of cell reselections
occur, and the better the slow fading resistance capability, but the slower the reaction to the
environment changes.
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query them through LST
CELLSELRESEL, and modify them through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-69
RAN
2.6.2 Load Level Offsets

These parameters are cell offsets used for cell selection and reselection. In the cell selection /
reselection process, when CPICH Ec/N0 is used for measurement, the cell offset is QOffset2sn;
when CPICH RSCP is used for measurement, IdleQoffsets and IdleQoffset2s used to idle state,
ConnQoffset1s and ConnQoffset2s used to connecting state. There exist ConnQoffset1s and
ConnQoffset2s only if SIB12 indication is set TRUE. In addition, there is only QOffset1sn in
inter-RAT cell selection and reselection, namely, not idle, connect, or QOffset2sn.
Parameter ID
IdleQoffset1sn
IdleQoffset2sn
ConnQoffset1sn
ConnQoffset2sn
Qoffset1sn
Value Range
-50 to 50

Parameter Setting
The default values are 0 dB.
These parameters are offsets of CPICH measured values of neighboring cells. QOffset1sn is
used for the RSCP measurement and the neighboring cell measurement value participates in cell
reselection sequencing after this offset is deducted from it. QOffset2sn is used for the Ec/No
measurement and the neighboring cell measurement value participates in cell reselection
sequencing after this offset is deducted from it.
These parameters play the role of moving the cell boarder in the cell selection and reselection
algorithms. They are configured according to the actual environment in network planning.

l
The greater these values, the lower the probability of selecting the neighboring cell.
The less these values are, the higher the probability of selecting the neighboring cell.
Relevant Commands
For intra-frequency cell selection/reselection: set these parameters through ADD
INTRAFREQNCELL, query them through LST INTRAFREQNCELL , and modify them
through MOD INTRAFREQNCELL .
For inter-frequency cell selection/reselection: set these parameters through ADD
INTERFREQNCELL, query them through LST INTERFREQNCELL, and modify them
through MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
2-70
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
For inter-RAT cell selection and reselection: set these parameters through ADD
GSMNCELL, query them through LST GSMNCELL, and modify them through MOD
GSMNCELL.
2.6.3 Minimum Quality Criterion

This parameter is the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in the
cell only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is bigger than this threshold.
Parameter ID
Qqualmin
Value Range
-24 to 0

Parameter Setting
The default value is -18 dB.
The FDD mode is defined by the S criterion for cell selection in Protocol 25.304, as follows:
Srxlev>0 & Squal>0
Where,
l
Squal = Qqualmeas - Qqualmin
Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas - Qrxlevmin - Pcompensation
Qqualmeas is Ec/No of the measured value CPICH of the cell quality;
Qrxlevmeas is RSCP of CPICH;
Qrxlevmin is the minimum pilot signal receiving power required for the current cell;
Pcompensation = Max.(UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH - P_MAX, 0);
UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH is the maximum allowed uplink transmit power of the

UE when accessing to the cell, namely MaxAllowedULTxPower;
P_MAX is the maximum radio frequency output power of the UE.

The greater this parameter, the more difficult the UE selects this cell to reside in; the lower this
parameter, the easier the UE selects this cell to reside in. However, if this parameter is too low,
the UE fails to correctly receive the system information borne over PCCPCH after it resides in
the cell.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LST
CELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-71
RAN
2.6.4 Minimum Access Level

This parameter is the minimum access level threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside in
this cell only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.
Parameter ID
Qrxlevmin
Value Range
-58 to -13

Where, -58 corresponds to -115 dBm, -57 corresponds to -113dBm,, -13 corresponds to 25
dBm
Parameter Setting
The default value is -58, namely -115 dBm.
For the definition of Qrxlevmin, refer to Minimum Quality Criterion (Qqualmin).
The settings of Qrxlevmin and Qqualmin should be considered together.

the UE fails to receive the system information borne over PCCPCH correctly after it resides in
this cell.
Relevant Commands
2.6.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds

These parameters include the intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle and
connecting state), the inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle and
connecting state) and the inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat).
Parameter ID
IdleSintrasearch
IdleSintersearch
ConnSintrasearch
ConnSintersearch
2-72
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
SsearchRat
Value Range
-16 to 10

Parameter Setting
The default values of IdleSintrasearch and ConnSintrasearch are 5 (10 dB), the default values
of IdleSintersearch and ConnSintersearch are 4 (8 dB), and the default value of Ssearchrat is 2
(4 dB).
The cell reselection start thresholds are defined in Protocol 25.304 as follows:
1.
If Sx <= Sintrasearch, the UE implements intra-frequency measurement and starts intrafrequency cell reselection.
2.
If Sx <= Sintersearch, the UE implements inter-frequency measurement and starts interfrequency cell reselection.
3.
If Sx <= SsearchRAT, the UE implements inter-RAT measurement and starts inter-RAT cell
reselection.
Where, Sx = measured value of UE - Qqualmin.

When the UE detects that the quality of the service cell (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is
lower than the sum of the minimum quality criterion of the service cell (Qqualmin) plus this
threshold, it starts the intra-frequency/inter-frequency/ inter-RAT cell reselection process.
Intra-frequency cell reselection is prior to inter-frequency/inter-RAT cell reselection. When
setting these three parameters, make sure that the intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold
is greater than the inter-frequency/inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold.

l
If these parameters are too high, cell reselection probably starts frequently, resulting in UE
battery waste.
If they are too low, cell reselection probably starts difficultly, and the UE fails to reside
timely in a cell with good quality, and this influences the communication quality between
the UTRAN and the UE.
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query them through LST
CELLSELRESEL, and modify them through MOD CELLSELRESEL.
2.6.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time

If the signal quality of other cells (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is always better than the
quality of the current cell within the time specified by this parameter, the UE will reselect this
cell to reside in.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-73
RAN
Parameter ID
Treselections
Value Range
0 to 31

0 to 31 s
Parameter Setting
This parameter is used to prevent the UE from implementing ping-pong reselection between
cells.
NOTE
0 refers to the default value specified in the protocol, instead of 0 s.

l
If this parameter is too low, the UE probably performs ping-pong reselection.
If it is too high, it may result in too long cell reselection delay, which influences the normal
operation of cell reselection.
Relevant Commands
2.6.7 Minimum Access Level for Inter-RAT Cell

This parameter is the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cell. The UE can reside in
this cell only when GSM RSSI measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.
Parameter ID
Qrxlevmin
Value Range
-58 to -13

Where, -58 corresponds to -115 dBm, -57 corresponds to -113 dBm ,, -13 corresponds to 25
dBm.
2-74
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default value is -58, namely, -115 dBm.
Similar to the S Criteria, in the GSM/DCS/PCS systems, the MS also requires a path loss standard
to reside in a GSM/DCS/PCS cell, and this standard requires the path loss criterion parameter
C1 > 0. C1 is defined as follows:
C1 = (A - Max(B,0))
Here,
l
A = RLA_C - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN
B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - P,
For DCS 1800, B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH + POWER OFFSET - P.

l
RLA_C: Average strength measurement value of receiving signal.
RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: The minimum signal strength required by the access system,

that is, Qrxlevmin of this section.
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH: The maximum transmitting power allowed by the MS access

system.
POWER OFFSET: The power offset parameter of DCS 1800 MS, used together with
MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH.
P: The maximum RF output power of MS.

the UE fails to receive the system information borne over PCCPCH correctly after it resides in
this cell.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD GSMNCELL, query it through LST GSMNCELL, and
modify it through MOD GSMNCELL.
2.6.8 2G Idle Mode MS's Searching for 3G Cell Signal Level

Threshold
A GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for 3G signal level threshold.
Parameter ID
Qsearch_I
Value Range
0 to 15
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-75
RAN

When this parameter is within the range of 0 to 7 or 8 to 15, the GSM MS starts searching for
3G cells.
0 = -98 dBm, 1 = -94 dBm, ..., 6 = -74 dBm, 7 = (always), 8 = -78 dBm, 9 = -74 dBm, ..., 14 =
-54 dBm, 15 = (never)
Parameter Setting
The default value is 7, which indicates that the GSM MS in idle mode always searches for 3G
cells.

The setting of this parameter depends on the customers' policy. The 3G policy is of top priority
during the interoperation of 3G and 2G.
Relevant Commands
Not involved for a 3G network.
2.6.9 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Offset

A 3G cell can be reselected when the average signal level of the target 3G cell is FDD_Qosffset
greater than that of the current serving cell.
Parameter ID
FDD_Qoffset
Value Range
0 to 15

0 = (always select a cell if acceptable), 1 = -28 dB, 2 = -24 dB, ..., 15 = 28 dB
Parameter Setting

Relevant Commands
2-76
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
2.6.10 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Threshold

Only when the signal level in the target 3G cell is FDD_Qmin greater than the serving cell, the
target 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.
Parameter ID
FDD_Qmin
Value Range
0 to 7

0 = -20 dB, 1 = -6 dB, 2 = -18 dB, 3 = -8 dB, 4 = -16 dB, 5 = -10 dB, 6 = -14 dB, 7 = -12 dB
Parameter Setting

Relevant Commands
2.7 Neighbor Management Parameters

The configurable neighbor management parameters are listed here.
Table 2-7 List of neighbor management parameters
N Param
o eter
. ID
Param
eter
Meani
ng
Defaul
t
Value
Relevant Commands
Level
NPrioF
lag
Neighb
or
priority
flag
FALSE
NCell
NPRI
O
Neighb
or
priority
For intra-frequency cells ADD

INTRAFREQNCELL
MOD INTRAFREQNCELL
For inter-frequency cells ADD
INTERFREQNCELL
MOD INTRAFREQNCELL
For inter-RAT cellsADD GSMNCELL
MOD GSMNCELL
2.7.1 Neighbor Priority Flag

Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-77
RAN
This describes neighbor priority flags.

2.7.2 Neighbor Priority
This part describes the neighbor priority.
2.7.1 Neighbor Priority Flag

This describes neighbor priority flags.
Parameter ID
NPrioFlag
Value Range
FALSE or TRUE

FALSE or TRUE
Parameter Setting
The default setting is FALSE.
This parameter is not necessary for a new network, for it overloads the configuration efforts for
network planning.
For the network that uses its neighbor priority, use the priority of its neighbor and set NPrioFlag
to TRUE.

Improper neighbor priority may result in missing neighbors.
Relevant Commands
For intra-frequency cells: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL / MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.
For inter-frequency cells: ADD INTERFREQNCELL / MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
For inter-RAT cells: ADD GSMNCELL / MOD GSMNCELL.
2.7.2 Neighbor Priority

This part describes the neighbor priority.
Parameter ID
NPrio
Value Range
0 to 30 (for intra-frequency neighbors)
2-78
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
0 to 31 (for inter-frequency inter-RAT neighbors)

None.
Parameter Setting
The smaller the NPrio value is, the higher the neighbor priority is.

Improper neighbor priority may result in missing neighbors.
Relevant Commands
For intra-frequency cells: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL / MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.
For inter-frequency cells: ADD INTERFREQNCELL / MOD INTERFREQNCELL.
For inter-RAT cells: ADD GSMNCELL / MOD GSMNCELL.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
2-79
RAN
Admission Control Parameters
About This Chapter

Admission control is a way for coordinating the WCDMA system capacity, coverage and quality,
and it ensures the system stability and QoS requirement by control over user access.
Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Lev
el
ULBETraffInit
BitRate
Uplink and
downlink initial
access rates of
BE service
64 kbit/s
Set or modify: SET

FRC
RN
C
Intelligent
admission
algorithm
switch
IU_QOS_N
EG_SWITC
H: 0
DLBETraffInit
BitRate
2
IU_Qos_Neg_S
witch
RAB_Downsizi
ng_Switch
QueueAlgoSwit
ch
PeemptAlgoSw
itch
Query: LST FRC
RAB_DOW
NSIZING_S
WITCH: 1
QUEUEAL
GOSWITC
H: OFF
PREEMPT
ALGOSWI
TC: OFF
IU_Qos_Neg_Switch
and
RAB_Downsizing_S
witch
RN
C
Set or modify: SET

CORRMALGOSWI
TCH
Query: LST
CORRMALGOSWI
TCH
QueueAlgoSwitch
and
PeemptAlgoSwitch
Set or modify: SET
QUEUEPREEMPT
Query: LST
QUEUEPREEMPT
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-1
RAN
3-2
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Lev
el
UlTotalEqUser
Num
Uplink total
equivalent user
number
80
Cell
DlTotalEqUser
Num
Downlink total
nonhsdpa
equivalent user
number
80
Set: ADD CELLCAC

Query: LST
CELLCAC
Modify: MOD
CELLCAC
UlConvAMRT
hd
AMR voice
uplink threshold
for conversation
service
75%
UlConvNonAM
RThd
Non AMR voice

uplink threshold
of conversation
service
75%
DlConvAMRT
hd
AMR voice
downlink
threshold for
conversation
service
80%
DlConvNonAM
RThd
Non AMR
Voice downlink
threshold of
conversation
service
80%
UlOtherThd
Uplink
threshold for
other services
60%
10
DlOtherThd
Downlink
threshold for
other services
75%
11
UlHOThd
Uplink
handover
admission
threshold
80%
12
DlHOThd
Downlink
handover
admission
threshold
85%
13
DLCELLTOTA
LTHD
Downlink total
power threshold
90%
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Lev
el
14
UlHoCeResvSf
Uplink
handover credit
reserved SF
SF16
Cell
15
DlHoCeCodeR
esvSf
Downlink
handover credit
and channel
code resource
reserved SF
SF32
Set: ADD CELLCAC

Query: LST
CELLCAC
Modify: MOD
CELLCAC
3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Service

They are the uplink and downlink initial access rates UlBeTraffInitBitrate and
DLBeTraffInitBitrate when the BE service is set up.
3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch
Four sub algorithm switches are contained: the maximum rate negotiation
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH, initial rate selection RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH, queuing
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and preempting PREEMPTALGOSWITCH.
3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number
When the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% uplink load.
3.4 Downlink Total NonHSDPA Equivalent User Number
When the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total non-hsdpa equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% downlink load.
3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service
The uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversation
service users.
3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service
This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation service
and used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.
3.7 AMR Voice Downlink Threshold for Conversation Service
The downlink threshold for the conversation service is used for the downlink admission of
conversation service users.
3.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversation Service
It is the downlink threshold of non AMR voice in the conversation service and used for downlink
admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.
3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services
This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is used
for uplink admission of other services.
3.10 Downlink Threshold for Other Services
This parameter is the downlink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is
used for downlink admission of users of other services.
3.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-3
RAN
The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameter
is only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in the
uplink soft handover.
3.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold
The handover downlink threshold is used for downlink admission of handover users.
3.13 Downlink Total Power Threshold
The total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP) is used for admission of HSPA
downlink power resource.
3.14 Uplink Handover Credit Reserved SF
This parameter describes the reserved threshold for uplink credit handover. It is used for the
admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.
3.15 Downlink Handover Credit and Channel Code Resource Reserved SF
This part describes the threshold for reserving resources for the handover of downlink code
resources and CE resources. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink code resources
and credit for new subscribers.
3.16 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load
UL common channel load factor ULCCHLOADFACTOR reserves part resources for UL
common channels; DL common channel load reserved coefficient
DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF reserves part resources for DL common channels.
3-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Service

They are the uplink and downlink initial access rates UlBeTraffInitBitrate and
DLBeTraffInitBitrate when the BE service is set up.
Parameter ID
UlBeTraffInitBitrate
DLBeTraffInitBitrate
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default values for both ULBETraffInitBitRate and DLBETraffInitBitRate are 64 kbit/s.
To save system resources and improve the admission success rate, BE does not require access
at the maximum expected rate at setup. In stead, a lower rate is adopted for initial access. After
access, the rate is adjusted higher when the traffic requires and system resources allow it to do
so.
When the initial rate selection (RAB Downsizing) function is enabled, this value is the uplink/
downlink initial access rate when the BE service is set up. If this rate access fails to satisfy the
current load condition, then the actual initial access rate is the negotiated rate based on this rate.
When the RAB Downsizing function is disabled, this parameter is the uplink/downlink initial
access rate when the BE service is set up.

l
The higher this parameter, the less time it takes for the BE service to reach the maximum
rate, but the easier the BE service rate be adjusted downward through negotiation when the
system is congested, so it makes no sense to set it too high.
The lower this parameter, the easier for the BE service to access at this rate, but if it is set
too low, it takes a longer time to adjust to the required rate when there is a service
requirement.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through SET FRC, and query it through LST FRC.
3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch

Four sub algorithm switches are contained: the maximum rate negotiation
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH, initial rate selection RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH, queuing
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and preempting PREEMPTALGOSWITCH.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-5
RAN
Parameter ID
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH
QUEUEALGOSWITCH
PREEMPTALGOSWITCH
Value Range
IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: Enum (0,1)
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: On, Off

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: 0 indicates Off, and 1
indicates On.
QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: On indicates open and Off indicates
close.
Parameter Setting
The default value of IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH is 0, the default value of
RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH is 1, and the default values of QUEUEALGOSWITCH and
PREEMPTALGOSWITC are Off.
These sub algorithms in intelligent admission are briefed below:
Maximum rate negotiation: At RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification and
transition-in, the real-time or non-real-time (BE) service of PS domain requires rate negotiation
based on the UE supported capability to get the maximum expected rate of a proper service QoS
request. This negotiation result should be sent to the CN. For the BE service, it is the maximum
rate can be adjusted for its DCCC.
Initial rate selection: At RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification and transitionin, the real-time or non-real-time (BE) service of PS domain requires selection of a proper initial
rate configuration bandwidth from typical rates smaller than or equal to the maximum expected
rate after negotiation and bigger than or equal to the lowest ensured rate according to the cell
load information before application for cell resources.
Preempting: In the service setup, modification, hard handover and transition-in scenarios, if
service request supports preempting capability (core network configuration) when application
for cell resources fails, preempting is executed, and the resource of lower-priority user supporting
preempting is released to set up the service request.
Queuing: In the service setup, modification, hard handover and transition-in scenarios, if service
request does not support preempting capability or the preempting switch is closed when
application for cell resources fails, but service request supports the queuing capability, queuing
is executed. When the heartbeat timer of queuing is timeout, attempt is made to allocate resource
to the service request with the minimum metric in the queue.
3-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

Set the values according to the actual requirement and the supporting capability of the core
network.
Relevant Commands
Set IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH through SET
CORRMALGOSWITCH, and query them through LST CORRMALGOSWITCH.
Set QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC through SET
QUEUEPREEMPT, and query them through LST QUEUEPREEMPT.
3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number

When the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% uplink load.
Parameter ID
UlTotalEqUserNum
Value Range
1 to 200

1 to 200, step 1
Parameter Setting
When the algorithm 2 is used, the real admission equivalent user number is equal to admission
threshold multiplied by 100% load; this parameter defines the equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% load.

This parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according to
the real network condition.
l
If it is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads to the system
congestion, and makes the system unstable.
If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of the hardware resource
is idle and wasted.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify it
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-7
RAN
3.4 Downlink Total NonHSDPA Equivalent User Number

When the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total non-hsdpa equivalent user number
corresponding to the 100% downlink load.
Parameter ID
DlTotalEqUserNum
Value Range
1 to 200

1 to 200, step 1
Parameter Setting
When the algorithm 2 is used, the real R99 equivalent user number is equal to admission
threshold multiplied by 100% R99 load; this parameter defines the non-hsdpa equivalent user
number corresponding to the 100% R99 load.

This parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according to
the real network condition.
l
If it is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads to the system
congestion, and makes the system unstable.
If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of hardware resource
is idle and wasted.
Relevant Commands
3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service

The uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversation
service users.
Parameter ID
UlConvAMRThd
3-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 75, that is 75%.
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requesting
for admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the load factor of the system after
the new call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channel
uplink load factor as the predicted value of the new load factor, and then compares the predicted
value of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor value is not
bigger than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
The uplink load thresholds include this parameter and uplink threshold for conversation nonAMR service, uplink threshold for other services and uplink handover admission
threshold. According to the relations among these four parameters, the proportions of the
conversation service and other services in the cell can be limited. These parameters can be also
used to ensure the priorities of handover users and the conversation service access.

If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too high, which affects
the system stability and results in system congestion; if it is too low, the users are more likely
to be rejected, and some resources are idled and wasted.
This parameter, uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold for
other services and uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together with
the network planning results.
l
If this parameter is too high, the target coverage in the network planning is influenced.
If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify
it through MOD CELLCAC.
3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation

Service
This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation service
and used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.
Parameter ID
UlConvNonAMRThd
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-9
RAN
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of new
call according to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call.
It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of public channel as
the new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted value with the
load factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factor threshold,
this call is admitted, or else it is refused.
Uplink load thresholds include this parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation
service, Uplink thresholds of other services and Uplink handover admission threshold. You
can restrict the proportion of conversation to other services in cell based on relations of the four
parameters or use them to ensure the priority of handover user and conversation service access.

If this parameter is set too high, the system load after admission may be overly heavy to affect
the system stability, resulting in system congestion. If this parameter is too low, the users are
more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be left idle.
This parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation service, Uplink thresholds of
other services and Uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together with
the planning result of network optimization to avoid over-big set target coverage affecting
network optimization, or too-small coverage that can not reach the target capacity.
Relevant Commands
3.7 AMR Voice Downlink Threshold for Conversation

Service
The downlink threshold for the conversation service is used for the downlink admission of
conversation service users.
Parameter ID
DlConvAMRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
3-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 80that is 80%.
Based on the current NodeB transmit power of the system and the service properties of the call
requesting for admission in the current system, the downlink admission control algorithm
predicts the value of the NodeB transmit power of the system after the new call is admitted, uses
the sum of the predicted value of the NodeB transmit power and the reserved power of the
common channel as the predicted value of new downlink load, and compares it with the downlink
load threshold. If the predicted load value is not greater than the downlink load threshold, the
call will be admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
The downlink load thresholds include this parameter, downlink threshold for conversation
non-AMR service, downlink threshold for other services. This is mainly to satisfy the
operators requirement to limit the proportion of the conversation and other services in the cell.
This can also ensure the priorities of conversation service access.

The setting of this parameter is related to settings of cell radius and the maximum cell transmit
power.
l
If it is too high, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring cells are
interfered seriously, and system stability is affected when cell coverage is very small.
If it is too low, the system resources may be idle, and the target capacity of the network
planning cannot be satisfied.
This parameter, with downlink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, downlink
threshold for other services and downlink handover admission threshold should be
considered together with the network planning result.
Relevant Commands
3.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversation

Service
It is the downlink threshold of non AMR voice in the conversation service and used for downlink
admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.
Parameter ID
DlConvNonAMRThd
Value Range
0 to 100
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-11
RAN

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The downlink admission control algorithm predicts the BS transmit power value of the system
after admission of new call according to the BS transmit power of the current system and the
service feature of admission request call. It uses the sum of the predicted value of BS transmit
power and the reserved power of public channel as the new downlink load predicted value, and
compares it with the downlink load threshold (it is the downlink load basic threshold generally,
and it is the downlink load handover threshold at handover application). If the load predicted
value is not greater than the downlink load threshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.
Downlink load thresholds include this parameter, AMR voice downlink threshold of
conversation service and Downlink thresholds of other services. It is to satisfy the carriers
requirement for restricting the proportion of voice to other services in cell. This method is also
used to ensure the priority of voice service access.

The value of this parameter is related with setting of the cell radius and maximum transmit power
of the cell.
l
If the parameter is set too high, the downlink coverage of cell is reduced, and a bigger
interference is generated against the neighboring cell. When cell converge is rather small,
the system stability is also affected.
If the value is set too low, system resources are left idle, and the target capacity of network
optimization cannot be achieved.
This parameter, with AMR voice downlink threshold of conversation service, Downlink
thresholds of other services and Downlink handover admission threshold should be
considered together with the planning result of network optimization.
Relevant Commands
3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services

This parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is used
for uplink admission of other services.
Parameter ID
UlOtherThd
Value Range
0 to 100
3-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
For the descriptions of this parameter, refer to 3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of
Conversation Service.

l
If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission is probably too high, which
affects the system stability and results in system congestion.
If it is too low, the users are more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be idled
and wasted.
This parameter, with uplink threshold for conversation service and uplink handover
admission threshold should be considered together with the network planning results.
l
If it is too high, the object coverage in the network planning is influenced.
If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.
Relevant Commands
3.10 Downlink Threshold for Other Services

This parameter is the downlink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is
used for downlink admission of users of other services.
Parameter ID
DlOtherThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
For the description of this parameter, refer to 3.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold of
Conversation Service.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-13
RAN

l
If this parameter is too high, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring
cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is influenced when the cell coverage
is small.
If it is too low, the system resources may be idle, and the target capacity of the network
planning cannot be satisfied.
This parameter, downlink threshold for conversation service and downlink handover
admission threshold should be considered together with the network planning results.
Note that, if the DCCC switch is turned on in the 1.5 algorithm, the admission algorithm at initial
admission is judged in accordance with the initial access rate for all the PS BE services with the
maximum expected rate greater than the parameter initial access rate. If admission of the initial
access rate cannot be accepted, the RNC starts the initial rate negotiation process in intelligent
admission. If the RNC admission at a rate grade under the initial access rate is acceptable, the
user accesses at this rate, but its maximum expected rate is not changed, which is the biggest
difference from adoption of the RNC and the CN negotiation method in v1.3.
Relevant Commands
3.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold

The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameter
is only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in the
uplink soft handover.
Parameter ID
UlHOThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requesting
for admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after the
new service is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted value of the load factor and the uplink
load factor of the common channel as the predicted value of the new load factor, and compares
the predicted load factor value with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor value
is not greater than the load factor threshold, the call is admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
The uplink load thresholds include this parameter, uplink threshold for other services and
uplink threshold for conversation services. According to the relations among these three
3-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
parameters, the proportions of the conversation service and other services in the cell can be
limited. These parameters can also be used to guarantee the priority of the handover users and
the conversation service access. Uplink handover admission threshold must be smaller than
uplink OLC trigger threshold for smart load control.
This parameter is to reserve resources for handover and to ensure the handover performance;
the value of this parameter must be greater than uplink threshold for conversation services.
This parameter has effects only on inter-frequency handover; it has no influence on intrafrequency handover.

l
If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too heavy, which
influences the system stability and results in the system congestion.
If it is too low, the probability that users are rejected is high, and some resources may be
idle and wasted.
This parameter should be considered together with the uplink threshold for the conversation
service and the uplink thresholds for other services.
Relevant Commands
3.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold

The handover downlink threshold is used for downlink admission of handover users.
Parameter ID
DlHOThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 85 that is 85%.
Based on the current NodeB transmit power of the system and the service properties of the call
requesting for admission, the downlink admission control algorithm predicts the value of the
NodeB transmit power of the system after the new handover is admitted, uses the sum of the
predicted value of the NodeB transmit power and the reserved power of the common channel
as the predicted value of the new downlink load, and compares it with the downlink load
threshold. If the predicted load value is not bigger than the downlink load threshold, the call is
admitted; otherwise it is rejected.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-15
RAN
This parameter is used to reserve resources for handover and to ensure the handover performance.
The downlink handover admission threshold must be lower than congestion control
measurement threshold 1 (LCCMRThd1), and must not be lower than downlink threshold for
conversation service.

l
If this parameter is too high, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring
cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is influenced when the cell coverage
is very small.
If it is too low, the system resources may be idle and wasted.
This parameter should be considered together with downlink threshold for conversation
service and downlink threshold for other services.
Relevant Commands
3.13 Downlink Total Power Threshold

The total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP) is used for admission of HSPA
downlink power resource.
Parameter ID
DlCellTotalThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 90, that is, 90%.

l
If this parameter is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads
to the system congestion, and makes the system unstable.
If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of hardware resource
is idle and wasted.
Relevant Commands
3-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
3.14 Uplink Handover Credit Reserved SF

This parameter describes the reserved threshold for uplink credit handover. It is used for the
admission of uplink credit for new subscribers.
Parameter ID
UlHoCeResvSf
Value Range
SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF

Parameter Setting
The default value is SF16.
SFOFF indicates no resources are reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell uplink
resources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is admitted, this new service is
rejected.
This parameter is set to reserve resources for UEs who perform the handover and to guarantee
the handover performance. The value for this parameter should satisfy the following condition:
Handover uplink credit reserved SF Uplink LDR credit reserved spreading factor
threshold.

When the parameter is set higher, the credit resources reserved for UEs that perform the handover
become smaller. At the same time, the admission failure rate for handover UEs becomes higher
and subscriber perception is easier to be affected. When the parameter is set lower, the admission
failure rate for new subscribers become higher and some resources stay idle.
Relevant Commands
Add this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify
3.15 Downlink Handover Credit and Channel Code

Resource Reserved SF
This part describes the threshold for reserving resources for the handover of downlink code
resources and CE resources. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink code resources
and credit for new subscribers.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-17
RAN
Parameter ID
DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Value Range

Parameter Setting
SFOFF indicates no resources are reserved for the handover. If the remaining resources on the
downlink cannot satisfy this threshold after a new service is admitted, this new service is rejected.
This parameter is set to reserve resources for the handover and to guarantee the handover success
rate. The value of this parameter must satisfy the following condition: Downlink handover
credit and code resource reserved SF Downlink LDR credit reserved spreading factor
threshold and Downlink handover credit and code resource reserved SF Cell LDR
reserved spreading factor threshold.

When the parameter is set higher, the credit resources reserved for UEs that perform the handover
become smaller. At the same time, the admission failure rate for handover UEs becomes higher
and subscriber perception is easier to be affected. When the parameter is set lower, the admission
failure rate for new subscribers become higher and some resources stay idle.
Relevant Commands
Add this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify
3.16 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load

UL common channel load factor ULCCHLOADFACTOR reserves part resources for UL
common channels; DL common channel load reserved coefficient
DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF reserves part resources for DL common channels.
Parameter ID
ULCCHLOADFACTOR
DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF
Value Range
0 to 100
3-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

0 to 100%, step is 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value for each parameter is 0.
The CAC is only used for dedicated channels, and for common channels, some resource is
reserved.
In UL, according to the current load factor and the characteristics of the new call, the UL CAC
algorithm predicts the new traffic channels load factor with the assumption of admitting the new
call, then plus with the premeditated common channel UL load factor to get the predicted UL
load factor. Then, compare it with UL admission threshold. If it is not higher than the threshold,
the call is admitted; otherwise, rejected.
In DL, according to the current load factor and the characteristics of the new call, the DL CAC
algorithm predicts the new traffic channels load factor with the assumption of admitting the new
call, then plus with the premeditated common channel DL load factor to get the predicted DL
load factor. Then, compare it with DL admission threshold. If it is not higher than the threshold,
the call is admitted; otherwise, rejected.

The higher value is set to the parameter, the more power resources are consumed, which may
decrease the system capacity. If the parameter is set to a lower value, the power resources can
be fully utilized. But when the resources are limited, a lower value may result in a poor coverage.
Relevant Commands
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
3-19
RAN
Load Control Parameters
About This Chapter

Load control is another very important function in WCDMA system. It maintains the system
load within the normal range to ensure that the systems overall QoS is in the normal range. The
load control includes LDR (Load Reshuffling) and OLC (Overload Control).
4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.
4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable overload congestion control (OLC) parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-1
RAN
4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
ULLDR
Uplink/
Downlink
LDR
algorithm
switches
OFF
Set:ADD
CELLALGOSW
ITCH
\NBMSwitch
C
ell
DLLDR
Query:LST
CELLALGOSW
ITCH
Modify:MOD
CELLALGOSW
ITCH
\NBMSwitch
LdrPeriodTimerLen
LDR period
timer length
10 s
Set or
modify:SET
LDCPERIOD
R
N
C
Query:LST
LDCPERIOD
3
UlLdrTrigThd
UlLdrRelThd
DlLdrTrigThd
DlLdrRelThd
Uplink or
downlink
LDR trigger
and release
threshold
UlLdrTrigThd:
55%
Set:ADD
CELLLDM
DlLdrTrigThd:
70%
Query:LST
CELLLDM
UlLdrRelThd: 45%
Modify:MOD
CELLLDM
DlLdrRelThd: 60%
4-2
C
ell
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
UlLdrFirstAction
Uplink or
downlink
LDR action
ULLDRFirstActio
n: CODEADJ
Set:ADD
CELLLDR
C
ell
ULLDRFirstActio
n and
DLLDRSecondAct
ion:
INTERFREQLDH
O
Query:LST
CELLLDR
UlLdrSecondAction
UlLdrThirdAction
UlLdrFourthAction
UlLdrFifthAction
UlLdrSixthAction
UlLdrSeventhAction
DLLDRSecondActi
on
ULLDRSecondAct
ion and
DLLDRTHIRDAc
tion:
BERATERED
DLLDRThirdAction
Others: NOACT
UlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrFirstAction
Modify:MOD
CELLLDR
DLLDRFourthActio
n
DLLDRFifthAction
DlLdrSixthAction
DlLdrSeventhAction
DlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrNinthAction
DlLdrTenthAction
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-3
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
ULLDRBERateRed
uctionRabNum
Number of
users
processed by
uplink/
downlink
LDR action
ULLDRCSInterR
ATSHOULDBEH
OUserNum,
ULLDRCSInterR
ATSHOULDNOT
BEHOUserNum
and
ULLDRAMRRAT
EREDUCTIONR
ABNUM are set to
3 by default; others
are set to 1 by
default.
ULLDRPSRTQosRe
negRabNum
ULLDRCSInterRAT
SHOULDBEHOUse
rNum
ULLDRCSInterRAT
SHOULDNOTBEH
OUserNum
ULLDRPSInterRAT
SHOULDBEHOUse
rNum
ULLDRPSInterRAT
SHOULDNOTBEH
OUserNum
ULLDRAMRRATE
REDUCTIONRAB
NUM
DLLDRBERateRed
uctionRabNum
DLLDRPSRTQosRe
negRabNum
DLLDRCSInterRAT
SHOULDBEHOUse
rNum
Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
DLLDRCSInterR
ATSHOULDBEH
OUserNum,
DLLDRCSInterR
ATSHOULDNOT
BEHOUserNum
and
DLLDRAMRRAT
EREDUCTIONR
ABNUM are set to
3 by default ; others
are set to 1 by
default.
DLLDRCSInterRAT
SHOULDNOTBEH
OUserNum
DLLDRPSInterRAT
SHOULDBEHOUse
rNum
DLLDRPSInterRAT
SHOULDNOTBEH
OUserNum
MAXUSERNUMC
ODEADJ
DLLDRAMRRATE
REDUCTIONRAB
NUM
4-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
UL or DL
interfrequency
cell load
handover
load space
threshold
20
UL or DL
interfrequency
cell load
handover
maximum
bound width
20,000 bit/s
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
UlInterFreqHoBWT
hd
DlInterFreqHoBWT
hd
CellSfResThd
Cell SF
reserved
threshold
SF8
DlCreditSfResThd
UL or DL
credit SF
reserved
threshold
SF8
UlCreditSfResThd
10
LdrCodePriUseInd
LDR code
priority
indicator
FALSE
11
MbmsDecPowerRab
Thd
MBMS
power
control
service
priority
threshold
Relevant
Command
L
e
v
el
4.1.1 Uplink and Downlink LDR Algorithm Switches

This switch is used to open or close the uplink/downlink preliminary congestion control
algorithm (LDR). The uplink LDR algorithm switch is ULLDR and the downlink one is DLLDR.
4.1.2 LDR Period Timer Length
When preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load Monitoring) module sends period of
preliminary congestion instruction (namely LDR execution period) to LDR.
4.1.3 Uplink and Downlink LDR Trigger Thresholds and Release Thresholds
This set of parameters determine the load thresholds for the uplink and downlink loads entering
into or being released from preliminary congestion status.
4.1.4 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions
This set of parameters determine the action sequence for the uplink/downlink LDR.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-5
RAN
4.1.5 Uplink/Downlink LDR Action Handing User Number

This group of parameters determine the number of users selected for uplink/downlink LDR
actions.
4.1.6 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Load Space Thresholds
Inter-frequency load handover happens only when the current load space of the target cell is
higher than this parameter setting. This parameter value is relative to target cell LDR threshold.
For uplink, the threshold is UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd, for downlink, the threshold is
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.
4.1.7 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Maximum Band Width
During inter-frequency load handover, the UE is selected as the target of inter-frequency load
handover from the UE set where the bound width is less than this threshold. For uplink, the
threshold is UlInterFreqHoBWThd, For downlink, the threshold is DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
4.1.8 Cell SF Reserved Threshold
The code adjusting could be done only when the minimum available SF of a cell is larger than
this threshold.
4.1.9 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshods
The uplink or downlink credit LDR could be done only when the Uplink or Downlink Credit
SF Reserve is larger than this threshold.
4.1.10 LDR Code Priority Indicator
This parameter denotes whether the priority of code is considered during the code tree
adjustment.
4.1.11 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold
The initial congestion status of a cell can be solved through the decrease in power when the
MBMS service priority is set at a certain level.
4.1.1 Uplink and Downlink LDR Algorithm Switches

This switch is used to open or close the uplink/downlink preliminary congestion control
algorithm (LDR). The uplink LDR algorithm switch is ULLDR and the downlink one is DLLDR.
Parameter ID
ULLDR
DLLDR
Value Range
ON, OFF

On, Off
Parameter Setting
The default status of both switches is OFF.
The preliminary congestion is a transition status. For the uplink, it means the uplink interference
is close to the admission threshold; for the downlink, it means the cell downlink transmit power
4-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
is close to the admission threshold and the call refusal rate increases significantly. The
preliminary congestion algorithm control objective is to slowly lower the cell load within the
admission threshold, to obtain higher call success rate at the cost of sacrificing the QoS of the
low-priority users, and to balance the inter-cell load (through inter-frequency load handover).
Since most of the LDR actions (except inter-frequency load handover) affect QoS, it is desirable
to set the algorithm switch to OFF at the preliminary stage of the network construction when
user perception is important.
NOTE
The uplink LDR algorithm switch and downlink LDR algorithm switch are set separately.

The preliminary congestion control algorithm improves the admission success rate but decreases
QoS.
Relevant Commands
Set uplink or downlink LDR algorithm switch with the parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch through
ADD CELLALGOSWITCH, query it through LST CELLALGOSWITCH, and modify it
with the parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch through MOD CELLALGOSWITCH.
4.1.2 LDR Period Timer Length

When preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load Monitoring) module sends period of
preliminary congestion instruction (namely LDR execution period) to LDR.
Parameter ID
LdrPeriodTimerLen
Value Range
1 to 86400

1 s to 86400 s, step 1 s
Parameter Setting
Unlike OLC control mechanism, LDR itself has no action timer and relies on LDM's sending
congestion instruction periodically to trigger. This mechanism originates from the initial
algorithm that tends to use period report control for LDR and time report control for OLC.

l
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
The lower the parameter is, the more frequently LDR action is executed, which decreases
the load quickly. However, if the value is too low, an LDR action may overlap the previous
one before the previous result is displayed in LDM.
4-7
RAN

l
The greater the value is, the more likely this problem can be prevented. If the value is set
too large, the LDR action may be executed rarely, failing to reach the expected purpose of
lowering the load timely.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through SET LDCPERIOD and query it through LST LDCPERIOD.
4.1.3 Uplink and Downlink LDR Trigger Thresholds and Release

Thresholds
This set of parameters determine the load thresholds for the uplink and downlink loads entering
into or being released from preliminary congestion status.
Parameter ID
UlLdrTrigThd
UlLdrRelThd
DlLdrTrigThd
DlLdrRelThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
ULLdrTrigThd is 55 (55%) and ULLdrRelThd is 45 (45%) by default; DLLdrTrigThd is 70
(70%) and DLLdrRelThd is 60 (60%) by default.
The uplink/downlink LDR trigger thresholds must be greater than uplink/downlink LDR release
thresholds.
When uplink/downlink preliminary congestion status is triggered, the uplink/downlink LDR
action starts. The LDR control objective is to preserve space for admission to increase the success
rate. Therefore, under the current policy, the LDR trigger threshold shall be set that the
congestion is less than or close to the concerned admission threshold index.

The lower the LDR trigger and release thresholds are, the easier the system is in preliminary
congestion status, the harder it is released from this status, the easier the LDR action happens,
and the more likely the users are affected. However, since the resources are preserved, the
admission success rate becomes higher. The carrier shall make tradeoff between these factors.
4-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through ADD CELLLDM, query them through LST CELLLDM, and
modify them through MOD CELLLDM.
4.1.4 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions

This set of parameters determine the action sequence for the uplink/downlink LDR.
Parameter ID
UlLdrFirstAction
UlLdrSecondAction
UlLdrThirdAction
UlLdrFourthAction
UlLdrFifthAction
UlLdrSixthAction
UlLdrSeventhAction
UlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrFirstAction
DLLDRSecondAction
DLLDRThirdAction
DLLDRFourthAction
DLLDRFifthAction
DlLdrSixthAction
DlLdrSeventhAction
DlLdrEighthAction
DlLdrNinthAction
DlLdrTenthAction
Value Range
Uplink: Enum (NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,
CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO,AMRRATERED)
Downlink: Enum (NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,
CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED, MBMSDECPOWER,
CODEADJ)

NOACT: No action
INTERFREQLDHO: Inter-freq load handover
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-9
RAN
BERATERED: BE traffic rate reduction

QOSRENEGO: Uncontrolled real-time traffic QoS renegotiation
CSINTERRATLDHO: CS domain inter-RAT load handover
PSINTERRATLDHO: PS domain inter-RAT load handover
AMRRATERED: AMR traffic rate reduction
MBMSDECPOWER: MBMS descend power
CODEADJ: Code adjust
Parameter Setting
l
The default value of ULLDRFirstAction is CODEADJ.
The default values of ULLDRFirstAction and DLLDRSecondAction are

INTERFREQLDHO.
The default values of ULLDRSecondAction and DLLDRTHIRDAction are

BERATERED.
The default values of other parameters are NOACT.
LDR executes the actions according to the sequence configured. It executes the next action if
the last one fails. When one action is executed successfully, or its value is NOACT, or all the
actions have been executed, this LDR ends and waits for next one.
The LDR algorithm just only selects subscribers and sends control command, the action is
performed by different algorithm modules, for every action needs time to execute, and the LDR
algorithm cannot wait long time for all results, just make the decision according to one of the
results.
The inter-frequency load handover has no bad effect on QoS, and it can balance the load of
different cells, so it is always selected as the first action.
The BE traffic rate reduction is limited by DCCC switch, so only when the DCCC switch is on,
can this action work.

None.
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through ADD CELLLDR, query them through LST CELLLDR, and
modify them through MOD CELLLDR.
4.1.5 Uplink/Downlink LDR Action Handing User Number

This group of parameters determine the number of users selected for uplink/downlink LDR
actions.
Parameter ID
ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (uplink LDR-BE service rate reduction RAB
number)
4-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (uplink LDR uncontrollable real-time service

negotiation RAB number)
ULLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-system
SHOULDBE load handover user number)
ULLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-CS domain intersystem SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-system
ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-AMR service
reduction RAB number)
MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ (downlink channel code maximum reshuffled user number)
DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-BE service reduction RAB
number)
DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (downlink LDR uncontrollable real-time service
negotiation RAB number)
DLLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-system
DLLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-CS domain intersystem SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-PS domain inter-system
DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-PS domain intersystem SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)
DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-AMR service reduction RAB
number)
Value Range
1 to 10

None
Parameter Setting
The following parameters are set to 1 by default:
l
ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM
ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM
MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ
DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-11
RAN

l
DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM
DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM
DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM
The other parameters are set to 3 by default.

l
Uplink/Downlink LDR-BE service rate reduction user number: This parameter can be
configured according to the actual user distribution. If the proportion of high-rate users is
large, you need to set a smaller value for this parameter. If the proportion of high-rate users
is small, you need to set a greater value. Because the primary congestion control algorithm
is designed to slowly decrease cell load, you need to set a small value for this parameter.
Uplink/Downlink uncontrollable real-time service negotiation user number: The target

users of this parameter are the PS real-time service users. The setting of this parameter is
analogous to the setting of BE service reduction user number. Because the number of users
performing QoS renegotiation may be smaller than the value of this parameter, for example,
the candidate users selected for downlink LDR do not meet the QoS renegotiation
conditions, you must leave some margin when setting this parameter to ensure the success
of load reengineering.
Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: The

target users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain users are
session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big value
for this parameter.
Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:

The target users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain users
are session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big
value for this parameter.
Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: The

target users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter is
analogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.
Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:

The target users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter is
analogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.
Downlink channel code maximum reshuffling user number: Code reshuffling has a great
impact on user feelings. In addition, the reshuffled users occupy two code resources during
code reshuffling. Thus, you must set a small value for this parameter.
For each user, during a life cycle of primary congestion, a type of uplink/downlink LDR
operation can be selected only once. After a type of uplink/downlink LDR operation is selected
by a user, the uplink/downlink LDR marks the user. If this type of operation is triggered again,
this user is not selected as the candidate user. Note that an operation is performed separately in
the uplink and downlink directions. That is, the same operation is performed one time in both
the uplink direction and the downlink operation.

The greater the values of this set of parameters are, the more significant the load of the local cell
is reduced. This, however, may affect user feeling or cause traffic congestion in the target cell.
The smaller the values of this set of parameters are, the smaller the load range are adjusted by
the LDR. This, however, more probably ensures users' QoS and balances traffic load.
4-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Relevant Commands
Use the ADD CELLLDR command for configuration, the LST CELLLDR command for
query, and the MOD CELLLDR command for modification.
4.1.6 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover

Load Space Thresholds
Inter-frequency load handover happens only when the current load space of the target cell is
higher than this parameter setting. This parameter value is relative to target cell LDR threshold.
For uplink, the threshold is UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd, for downlink, the threshold is
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.
Parameter ID
UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default values are 20, that is 20%.

l
The lower these parameters are, the easier it is to find qualified target cell for blind
handover. However, a too-low value easily makes the target cell enter congestion status.
The greater the parameters are, the more difficult the inter-frequency blind handover occurs,
and the easier to guarantee the stability of the target cell.
Relevant Commands
4.1.7 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover

Maximum Band Width
During inter-frequency load handover, the UE is selected as the target of inter-frequency load
handover from the UE set where the bound width is less than this threshold. For uplink, the
threshold is UlInterFreqHoBWThd, For downlink, the threshold is DlInterFreqHoBWThd.
Parameter ID
UlInterFreqHoBWThd
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-13
RAN
DlInterFreqHoBWThd
Value Range
0 to 400,000

0 to 400000 bit/s
Parameter Setting
The default values are 200,000 bit/s.
The uplink and downlink share this parameter to execute the inter-frequency load handover.
During the uplink/downlink inter-frequency load handover, a user in the current cell (the number
of users is not changeable) is selected and blind handover to the target cell to reduce the current
cell load and to indirectly balance the loads between the inter-frequency cells. To select a user,
the users are sorted according to the bound width. The user who is less than this parameter value
is selected to trigger the inter-frequency load handover.

l
The greater the parameters are, the higher the service rate of the user in handover is, and
the more obviously the cell load is decreased. But high value gives rise to fluctuation and
congestion of the target cell load.
The lower the parameters are, the smaller the amplitude of the load decreased as a result
of the inter-frequency load handover, and the easier to maintain the stability of the target
cell load.
Relevant Commands
4.1.8 Cell SF Reserved Threshold

The code adjusting could be done only when the minimum available SF of a cell is larger than
this threshold.
Parameter ID
CellLdrSfResThd
Value Range
SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256

None.
4-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter Setting
When the downlink code congestion status is triggered, the LDR action begins to work. The
purpose of the LDR control is to reserve the code resource for new access subscribers, and
improve the admission success rate.

When the code resource threshold of LDR is lower, the downlink code resource is easier to be
initial congestion status, the LDR action is easier to do, and subscriber perception is easier to be
affected; but at the same time, the more code resource is reserved, the admission success rate is
high. The parameter setting should be considered according to the operator's requirement.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify it
through MOD CELLLDR.
4.1.9 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshods

The uplink or downlink credit LDR could be done only when the Uplink or Downlink Credit
SF Reserve is larger than this threshold.
Parameter ID
UlLdrCreditSfResThd
DlLdrCreditSfResThd
Value Range
SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256

None.
Parameter Setting

When the parameter is lower, the uplink or downlink credit resource is easier to be initial
congestion status, the LDR action is easier to do, and subscriber perception is easier to be
affected; but at the same time, the more credit resource is reserved, the admission success rate
is high. The parameter setting should be configured to meet the operator's requirement.
Relevant Commands
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-15
RAN
4.1.10 LDR Code Priority Indicator

This parameter denotes whether the priority of code is considered during the code tree
adjustment.
Parameter ID
LdrCodePriUseInd
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is FALSE.
FALSE denotes not considering the priority of code during the code tree adjustment;
TRUEdenotes considering the priority of code during the code tree adjustment.

If the parameter is TRUE, the high priority code is reserved during the code tree adjustment. It
is good for code resource dynamic share, which is just for HSDPA.
Relevant Commands
4.1.11 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold

The initial congestion status of a cell can be solved through the decrease in power when the
MBMS service priority is set at a certain level.
Parameter ID
MBMSDECPOWERRABTHD
Value Range
1 to 15

1 to 15
4-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default setting is 1.
When the priority of the RAB among MBMS services exceeds this threshold, re-configure the
MBMS power as the minimum power.

The smaller this parameter is set, the greater the scope for selecting the MBMS services is. At
the same time, the cell overload is significantly decreased while the impact on the MBMS
services become greater. The greater this parameter is set, the smaller the scope for selecting the
MBMS services is. At the same time, the cell overload is inconsiderably decreased and the impact
on the MBMS services become greater. The quality of services with high priority, however, can
be guaranteed.
Relevant Commands
Add this parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify
it through MOD CELLLDR.
4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm

Parameters
The common configurable overload congestion control (OLC) parameters are listed here.
Table 4-2 List of smart load control parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Le
vel
ULOLC
Uplink/Downlink
OLC algorithm
switch
Off
Set: ADD
CELLALGOSWIT
CH
\
NBMLdcAlgoSwitc
h
Cel
l
DLOLC
Query: LST
CELLALGOSWIT
CH
Modify: MOD
CELLALGOSWIT
CH
\
NBMLdcAlgoSwitc
h
2
OlcPeriodTim
erLen
OLC period timer

length
3000, that is, 3

s
Set or modify: SET

LDCPERIOD
RN
C
Query: LST
LDCPERIOD
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-17
RAN
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Le
vel
UlOlcTrigThd
Uplink or downlink
OLC trigger
threshold and
release threshold
UlOlcTrigTh
d: 95%
Set: ADD
CELLLDM
Cel
l
DlOlcTrigTh
d: 95%
Query: LST
CELLLDM
UlOlcRelThd:
80%
Modify: MOD
CELLLDM
DlOlcTrigThd
UlOlcRelThd
DlOlcRelThd
DlOlcRelThd:
80%
4
UlOlcFTFRst
rctTimes
DlOlcFTFRst
rctTimes
UlOlcFTFRst
rctRabNum
DlOlcFTFRst
rctRabNum
RateRstrctTi
merLen
RateRecoverT
imerLen
Uplink or downlink
OLC fast TF
restriction times
3 times
Uplink or downlink
OLC fast TF restrict
RAB number

data rate restrict
timer length and
recover timer
length
RateRstrctTi
merLen: 3000
(3 s)
RateRecover
TimerLen:
5000 (5 s)
RateRstrctCo
ef

data rate restrict
coefficient
68, that is,

68%
UlOlcTraffRe
lRabNum
Uplink or downlink
release RAB
number
DlOlcTraffRe
lRabNum
Set: ADD
CELLOLC
Query: LST
CELLOLC
Modify: MOD
CELLOLC
4.2.1 Uplink and Downlink OLC Algorithm Switches

These parameters are used to open or close uplink or downlink overload control algorithm. The
uplink OLC algorithm switch is ULOLC and the downlink OLC algorithm switch is DLOLC.
4.2.2 OLC Period Timer Length
This parameter is the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and
then restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplink
OLC and downlink OLC share the same timer.
4.2.3 Uplink and Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold
This set of parameters determine the threshold exceeding which the uplink/downlink load enters
overload status and the threshold within which the uplink/downlink load is released from
overload status.
4.2.4 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times
4-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
These are uplink/downlink OLC action thresholds, meaning the times of uplink/downlink OLC
fast TF restrictions that are executed. The uplink parameter is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes and the
downlink parameter is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.
4.2.5 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restrict RAB Number
This set of parameters donote the number of RABs selected for one uplink or downlink OLC
fast TF restriction.
4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Timer Length And Recover Timer Length
RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TF restriction on BE users in a
downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TF
recovery on BE users when the downlink overload is released.
4.2.7 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Coefficient
OLC fast TF restriction rate coefficient means the degree of the rate restriction.
4.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Release RAB Number
This set of parameters denote the number of users released in an uplink/downlink OLC release
action.
4.2.1 Uplink and Downlink OLC Algorithm Switches

These parameters are used to open or close uplink or downlink overload control algorithm. The
uplink OLC algorithm switch is ULOLC and the downlink OLC algorithm switch is DLOLC.
Parameter ID
ULOLC
DLPLC
Value Range
ON, OFF

None.
Parameter Setting
The default status of the two switches are OFF.
When overload happens in the uplink/downlink, the uplink/downlink OLC algorithm can quickly
relieve uplink/downlink load by TF restriction or user release. Cell overload is an emergent
status.
l
For the uplink, overload means the cell uplink/downlink interference is close to or reaches
the limit and may give rise to difficulty in BTS uplink reception and decoding, resulting in
call drop.
For the downlink, overload means the downlink transmit power is close to or reaches the
limit and the user downlink inner loop power control cannot be increased as needed because
of the BTS power restriction, resulting in call drop.
Therefore, overload control (OLC) must be executed to quickly lower the cell uplink/downlink
load to a reasonable range.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-19
RAN

NOTE
The uplink OLC algorithm switch and downlink OLC algorithm switches are set separately.

When OLC is open, it can quickly adjust the cell load but may also cause oscillation of the cell
load and affect the call drop rate.
Relevant Commands
Set uplink or downlink OLC algorithm switch with parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch through
ADD CELLALGOSWITCH , query it through LST CELLALGOSWITCH , and modify it
with parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch through MOD CELLALGOSWITCH .
4.2.2 OLC Period Timer Length

This parameter is the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once and
then restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplink
OLC and downlink OLC share the same timer.
Parameter ID
OlcPeriodTimerLen
Value Range
100 to 86,400,000

100 ms to 86,400 s, step 1 ms
Parameter Setting
The default value is 1000, that is, 1 s.
In the current overload control algorithm, all the uplink/downlink OLC actions (TF restriction
and user release) are executed in the period of the OLC timer. This parameter along with
ULOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, DLOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, ULOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes,
DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes, ULOLCTraffRelUserNum, and DLOLCTraffRelUserNum
determine the time it takes to release the uplink/downlink overload.

l
If the OLC action period is set too long, the system may respond very slowly to overload.
If the OLC action period is set too short, unnecessary adjustment may occur before the
previous OLC action has taken effect, thus affects the system performance.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through SET LDCPERIOD and query it through LST LDCPERIOD.
4-20
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
4.2.3 Uplink and Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release

Threshold
This set of parameters determine the threshold exceeding which the uplink/downlink load enters
overload status and the threshold within which the uplink/downlink load is released from
overload status.
Parameter ID
UlOlcTrigThd
DlOlcTrigThd
UlOlcRelThd
DlOlcRelThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
UlOlcTrigThd and DlOlcTrigThd are 95 (95%) by default; UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd are
80 (80%) by default.
The uplink/downlink OLC trigger threshold judges whether the system uplink/downlink is in
overload status. If the cell load is consecutively higher than the threshold for pre-determined
times, it means the system is in overload status for a long time. Under this circumstance, the
system performs OLC algorithm if the cell OLC switch is open, including fast TF restriction or
even user release.
The OLC trigger threshold must be greater than or equal to the OLC release threshold.

The lower the OLC trigger threshold, the easier the system in overload status. Since OLC
ultimately uses extreme method like user release to lower the load, a too low value is very
detrimental to the system performance.
The lower the OLC release threshold, the harder the system releases the overload. Since the
consequence of overload is not as severe as expected, it is desirable to set the two parameters a
bit higher given that the difference between OLC trigger threshold and OLC release threshold
is fixed.
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through ADD CELLLDM, query them through LST CELLLDM, and
modify them through MOD CELLLDM.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-21
RAN
4.2.4 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times

These are uplink/downlink OLC action thresholds, meaning the times of uplink/downlink OLC
fast TF restrictions that are executed. The uplink parameter is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes and the
downlink parameter is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.
Parameter ID
UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100 times
Parameter Setting
The default values are 3 times.
When uplink/downlink overload is triggered, the RNC immediately executes OLC action by
first executing uplink/downlink fast TF restriction. The internal counter is incremented by 1 with
each execution. If the number of overloads does not exceed the OLC action threshold, the system
lowers the BE service rate by lowering TF to relieve the overload. Exceeding OLC action
threshold means that the previous operation has no obvious effect on alleviating the overload
and the system has to release users to solve the overload problem.

l
The lower the parameters, the more likely the users released, resulting in negative effect
on the system performance.
If the parameters are set too high, the overload status is released slowly.
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through ADD CELLOLC, query them through LST CELLOLC, and
modify them through MOD CELLOLC.
4.2.5 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restrict RAB Number

This set of parameters donote the number of RABs selected for one uplink or downlink OLC
fast TF restriction.
Parameter ID
UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
4-22
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
1 to 10

None.
Parameter Setting
The default values are 3.

The higher the parameters, the more users involved in fast TF restriction under identical
conditions, the quicker the cell load decreases, and the more user QoS is affected.
Relevant Commands
4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Timer Length And
Recover Timer Length
RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TF restriction on BE users in a
downlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TF
recovery on BE users when the downlink overload is released.
Parameter ID
RateRstrctTimerLen
RateRecoverTimerLen
Value Range
1 to 65,535

1 ms to 65,535 ms
Parameter Setting
RateRstrctTimerLen is 3000 ms (3 s) by default; RateRecoverTimerLen is 5000 ms (5 s) by
default.
Once the MAC layer receives instruction to perform fast TF restriction on a user, it periodically
uses rate restriction coefficient to restrict the maximum available TF of the user until it receives
overload release instruction. Therefore every period specified by RateRstrctTimerLen, apart
from the new OLC-selected users who are TF restricted, the previously selected users are also
fast-TF restricted in an effort to release the overload more quickly. In order to timely adjust the
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-23
RAN
BE service rate according to the load, the value of RateRstrctTimerLen shall be slightly greater
than the system load response time after rate adjustment and the period of overload detection.

A greater RateRstrctTimerLen gets the BE service rate decreases more slowly. A lower
RateRstrctTimerLen value makes it harder to receive the overload release instruction.
Great RateRecoverTimerLen value leads to slow BE service recovery rate but prevents overload
from triggering again in short time. Low RateRecoverTimerLen value leads to quick BE service
recovery rate but gives rise to yet more overloads.
Relevant Commands
4.2.7 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Coefficient

OLC fast TF restriction rate coefficient means the degree of the rate restriction.
Parameter ID
RateRstrctCoef
Value Range
1 to 99

1 to 99%, step 1%
Parameter Setting

The lower the parameter, the more severe the rate restricted. Too low value may affect the BE
transmission delay. Large value means loose restriction, which may be ineffective in alleviating
the overload.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLOLC, query it through LST CELLOLC, and modify
it through MOD CELLOLC.
4.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Release RAB Number

This set of parameters denote the number of users released in an uplink/downlink OLC release
action.
4-24
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
UlOlcTraffRelRabNum
DlOlcTraffRelRabNum
Value Range
0 to 10

None.
Parameter Setting

Higher values of these parameters get the cell load decreases more obviously at the cost of
negatively affecting user perception.
Relevant Commands
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
4-25
RAN
PS Service Rate Control Parameters
About This Chapter

The PS Service rate control includes dynamic channel configuration, state transfer.
5.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters
The common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.
5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control Parameters
The common configurable dynamic channel configuration parameters are listed here.
5.3 Link Stability Parameters
The common configurable link stability parameters are listed here.
5.4 State Transfer Parameters
The common configurable state transfer parameters are listed here.
5.5 PS Inactive
The common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.
5.6 RLC Retransmission Monitor Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-1
RAN
5.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters

The common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.
Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
BeBitRateThd
BE service
handover rate
threshold
D384, that is,

384 kbit/s
Set or Modify:SET
HOCOMM
RNC
Uplink and
downlink BE
guarantee
bitrate
D64, that is,

64 kbit/s
UlPsBeGuarRat
e
DlPsBeGuarRat
e
Query:LST
HOCOMM
For RNC level
Set or modify:SET
DCCC
RNC/
Cell
Query:LST DCCC
For Cell level
Set:ADD
CELLDCCC
Query:LST
CELLDCCC
Modify:MOD
CELLDCCC
UlBeTraffDecT
hs
DlBeTraffDecT
hs
UpLink and
downlink BE
traffic DCH
decision
threshold
D8, that is, 8

kbit/s
For RNC level

Set or modify:SET
FRC
Query:LST FRC
For Cell level
Set:ADD CELLFRC
Query:LST
CELLFRC
Modify:MOD
CELLFRC
5-2
DlStrThsonHsd
pa
DL streaming
threshold on
HSDPA
D64, that is,

64 kbit/s
DlBeTraffThsO
nHsdpa
DL BE traffic
threshold on
HSDPA
D8, that is, 8

kbit/s
UlBeTraffThsO
nHsupa
UL BE traffic
threshold on
HSUPA
D711, that is,

711 kbit/s
Set or modify:SET
FRC
Query:LST FRC
RNC
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
UlStrThsOnHsu
pa
UL streaming
traffic
threshold on
HSUPA
D256, that is,

256 kbit/s
UlStrTransMod
eOnHsupa
Streaming
service
HSUPA
transmission
mode
NonScheduled
Relevant
Command
Level
5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold

This parameter is the bit rate threshold used to determine whether to perform soft handover for
the Best Effort (BE) service on DCH.
5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate
This describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH and
H share a set of parameters.
5.1.3 UpLink and Downlink BE traffic DCH decision threshold
These parameters are the rate decision thresholds of UL and DL PS domain background and
interactive service whether to be carried on DCH. When the UL service rate is greater than or
equal to this threshold, the service is set up on DCH; otherwise, on CCH.
5.1.4 DL Streaming Threshold on HSDPA
This parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain streaming service whether to be
carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to this
threshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.
5.1.5 DL BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA
This parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain background/interactive service
whether to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal
to this threshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.
5.1.6 UL BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA
This parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background/interactive service
to be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this
threshold, the service is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.
5.1.7 UL Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA
This parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain streaming service to be carried
on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the
service is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.
5.1.8 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode
This parameter is valid only when the streaming services are mapped onto the E-DCH channel.
This parameter is used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode for streaming services.
5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold

This parameter is the bit rate threshold used to determine whether to perform soft handover for
the Best Effort (BE) service on DCH.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-3
RAN
Parameter ID
BeBitRateThd
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Enum (8k, 16k, 32k, 64k, 128k, 144k, 256k, 384k) bit/s
Parameter Setting
The default value is D384, that is 384kbit/s.
l
When the maximum bit rate of the BE service is lower than or equal to this threshold, the
system performs soft handover for this user to guarantee the service quality.
If the maximum bit rate of the BE service is higher than the threshold, the system performs
intra-frequency hard handover for this user to avoid great effect of soft handover on the
system capacity.

The greater this parameter is, the better the QoS of user probably becomes. But the resource is
consumed more.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST HOCOMM.
5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate

This describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH and
H share a set of parameters.
Parameter ID
GOLDULGBR
SILVERULGBR
COPPERULGBR
GOLDDLGBR
SILVERDLGBR
COPPERDLGBR
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, and D384
5-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, and 384 (unit: kbit/s)
Parameter Setting
The default value is D64, which stands for 64 kbit/s.

You can assign different GBRs to the users with different priorities to show service
differentiation. The QoS of the users with higher priorities is better. The user access, however,
becomes more difficult.
Relevant Commands
Use the SET USERGBR command for configuration and use the LST USERGBR command
for query.
5.1.3 UpLink and Downlink BE traffic DCH decision threshold

These parameters are the rate decision thresholds of UL and DL PS domain background and
interactive service whether to be carried on DCH. When the UL service rate is greater than or
equal to this threshold, the service is set up on DCH; otherwise, on CCH.
Parameter ID
UlBeTraffDecThs
DlBeTraffDecThs
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16)

Enum (8, 16) kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default values are D8, that is 8 kbit/s.

The greater this parameters are, the better the QoS of user probably becomes. But the resource
is consumed more.
Relevant Commands
For RNC level, set the parameters through SET FRC, and query them through LST FRC.
For cell level, set the parameters through ADD CELLFRC, and query them through LST
CELLFRC, and modify them through MOD CELLFRC.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-5
RAN
5.1.4 DL Streaming Threshold on HSDPA

This parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain streaming service whether to be
carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to this
threshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.
Parameter ID
DlStrThsonHsdpa
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256)

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 768, 1024, 1536, 2048) kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default value is D64, that is 64 kbit/s.

If the parameter is set too low, it possibly causes the capacity of HS-DSCH less than DCH.
Relevant Commands
5.1.5 DL BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA

This parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain background/interactive service
whether to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal
to this threshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.
Parameter ID
DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D2048)

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 768, 1024, 1536, 2048) kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default value is D8, that is 8 kbit/s.
5-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

If the parameter is set too high, BE service is easier to be beard on DCH, and the system code
utilization rate decreases.
Relevant Commands
5.1.6 UL BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA

This parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background/interactive service
to be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this
threshold, the service is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.
Parameter ID
UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D711, D1024, D1450, D2048)

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 711, 1024, 1450, 2048) kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default value is 711 kbit/s.

By simulation, comparing the data services bearing on E-DCH to those bearing on DCH, the
system traffic volume improves much. So the BE services are all suggested to be borne on EDCH.
Relevant Commands
5.1.7 UL Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA

This parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain streaming service to be carried
on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, the
service is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.
Parameter ID
UlStrThsOnHsupa
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-7
RAN
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256)

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256) kbit/s
Parameter Setting

None.
Relevant Commands
5.1.8 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode

This parameter is valid only when the streaming services are mapped onto the E-DCH channel.
This parameter is used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode for streaming services.
Parameter ID
UlStrTransModeOnHsupa
Value Range
Scheduled or Non-Scheduled

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is Non-Scheduled.

None.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through SET FRC and query it through LST FRC.
5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control Parameters

The common configurable dynamic channel configuration parameters are listed here.
5-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters

N
o.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant
Command
Level
Event4aThd
Traffic upper
threshold
D1024, that is,

1024 bytes
RNC
Event4bThd
Traffic lower
threshold
D128, that is, 128

bytes
TimetoTrigg
er4A
Time to trigger
event 4A
D240, that is, 240

ms
TimetoTrigg
er4B
Time to Trigger
event 4B
D2560, that is,

2.56 s
Set: ADD
TYPRABDCCCM
C
Query: LST
TYPRAB
Modify: MOD
TYPRABDCCCM
C
PendingTim
e4A
Pending time
after trigger event
4A
D4000, that is, 4

s
PendingTim
e4B
Pending time
after trigger event
4B
D4000, that is, 4

s
UlDcccRate
Thd
Uplink and
downlink DCCC
rate thresholds
D64 (64 kbit/s)
Set or modify: SET

DCCC
RNC
Uplink and
downlink middle
rate thresholds
D128 (128 kbit/

s)
Uplink and
downlink rate
adjust level
2_Rates
Low activity
bitrate threshold
D64, that is, 64

kbit/s
DlDcccRate
Thd
8
UlMidRateT
hd
DlMidRateT
hd
UlRateAdjL
evel
DlRateAdjL
evel
10
LittleRateTh
d
Query: LST DCCC
5.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold

The premise for 4A event reporting is that the buffer traffic exceeds this threshold.
5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold
The premise for 4B event reporting is that the buffered traffic is lower than this threshold.
5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A
When buffered traffic is greater than 4A threshold and remains there for a longer time than the
delay trigger time, event 4A is reported.
5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B
When buffered traffic is less than event 4B threshold and remains there for a longer time than
the delay trigger time, event 4B is reported.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-9
RAN
5.2.5 Pending Time after Trigger Event 4A

After a event 4A is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4A is reported before the timer
expires.
5.2.6 Pending time after trigger Event 4B
After an event 4B is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4B is reported before the timer
expires.
5.2.7 Uplink and Downlink DCCC Rate Thresholds
When the maximum uplink/downlink rates required by the BE service are not greater than the
uplink/downlink DCCC rate thresholds, channel reconfiguration is not carried out for the uplink/
downlink services according to the traffic condition.
5.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Middle Rate Thresholds
These parameters are the uplink and downlink middle rate threshold when 3 rate adjusting in
DCCC is used and the middle rate compute method is HAND_APPOINT.
5.2.9 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels
These parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.
5.2.10 Low activity bitrate threshold
When the PS BE service rate has reduced to the rate threshold of DCCC, but UE can not transfer
to CELL_FACH state for some reasons (for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is
off; UE has CS service). The PS BE service rate is reduced to this rate when PS BE service
satisfy the requirement of D2F.
5.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold

The premise for 4A event reporting is that the buffer traffic exceeds this threshold.
Parameter ID
Event4aThd
Value Range
Enum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,
D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k, D768k)

Enum (16 ,32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,
128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes
Parameter Setting
The default value is D1024, that is 1024 bytes. The parameter is set separately in downlink and
uplink.
Event 4A: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) exceeds an
absolute threshold. When this event occurs, data transmission is accelerated through the increase
of channel transmission bandwidth.
The setting of the traffic upper threshold is used to check whether there are data to be transmitted.
Therefore, to meet the rapid requirement of user data transmission, we can configure the
threshold of 4A to a low value; however, it should not be too low, so as to avoid triggering
5-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
unnecessary channel reconfiguration to increase the bandwidth while users do not have enough
data to transmit.

l
The greater this parameter is set, the slower the user data transmission rate probably
becomes.
The smaller it is, the faster the user data transmission rate probably becomes. However, if
the setting is too low, the channel bandwidth increases while it is unnecessary.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD TYPRABDCCCMC, and modify it through MOD
TYPRABDCCCMC, and query it through LST TYPRAB.
5.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold

The premise for 4B event reporting is that the buffered traffic is lower than this threshold.
Parameter ID
Event4bThd
Value Range
Enum (D8, D16,D32, D64, D128,D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,
D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k)

Enum (8, 16,32, 64, 128,256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,
128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k) bytes
Parameter Setting
The default value is D128, that is 128 bytes. The parameter is set separately in downlink and
uplink.
Event 4B: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) becomes
lower than an absolute threshold. When this event occurs, the channel transmission bandwidth
is reduced to avoid resource waste.
The 4B event is used to check whether the traffic becomes lighter. When the service transmission
is about to finish, the traffic in the buffer decreases rapidly until it becomes zero. Therefore,
event 4B threshold can be configured to a relatively small value. Furthermore, when the source
rate of the service is relatively constant but very low, we can also configure an appropriate 4B
threshold so that the low source rate can be detected and the channel bandwidth can be
accordingly reduced. Tests on the FTP service and services with low source rates show that when
the setting of the 4B threshold is slightly greater than the size of one transmission block, the
detection required for bandwidth reduction for the two kinds of services above can be satisfied.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-11
RAN

A greater value of this parameter gets event 4B to be triggered more easily; however, the channel
transmission bandwidth is reduced, which may influence the transmission speed of the user data.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD TYPRABDCCCMC, modify it through MOD
5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A

When buffered traffic is greater than 4A threshold and remains there for a longer time than the
delay trigger time, event 4A is reported.
Parameter ID
TimetoTrigger4A
Value Range
D2560, D5000)

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280,2560,5000) ms
Parameter Setting
TimetoTrigger4A is D240 by default, that is , 240 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplink
and downlink.
Time to trigger for event 4A is to prevent frequent trigger caused by small fluctuation of the
service traffic. It is only for the measurement report of the first trigger event.

l
A higher value of this parameter makes event 4A harder to be triggered. In such case it can
prevent frequent adjustment of the BE service rate. However, too high value makes the
system respond very slowly.
A lower value of this parameter gets event 4A to be triggered more easily. However, small
value may trigger events frequently under small fluctuation of the service traffic.
Relevant Commands
5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B

When buffered traffic is less than event 4B threshold and remains there for a longer time than
the delay trigger time, event 4B is reported.
5-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
TimetoTrigger4B
Value Range
D2560, D5000)

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms
Parameter Setting
TimetoTrigger4B is D2560 by default, that is, 2.56 s. The parameter is set separately in uplink
and downlink.
Time to trigger for event 4B is to prevent frequent trigger caused by small fluctuation of the
service traffic. It is only for the measurement report of the first trigger event.

l
The higher the parameter is, the harder to trigger event 4B, in which case it can prevent
frequent adjustment of the BE service rate. However, too high value makes the system
respond very slowly.
The lower the parameter is, the easier to trigger event 4B. However, small value may trigger
events frequently under small fluctuation of the service traffic.
Relevant Commands
5.2.5 Pending Time after Trigger Event 4A

After a event 4A is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4A is reported before the timer
expires.
Parameter ID
PendingTime4A
Value Range
Enum (D250, D500, D1k, D2k, D4k, D8k, D16k)

Enum (250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000) ms
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-13
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default value is D4000, that is, 4 s. The parameter is set separately in unlink and downlink.
The pending time after trigger for event 4A is the timer started after the event measurement
report is triggered. It has two functions: The first is that within the pending time, no more
measurement report is sent for the same measurement ID even the condition that triggers
measurement report is met; the second is that when the pending timer expires, it judges whether
the traffic is above the upper threshold or under the lower threshold. If yes, it restarts the Time
to Trigger for event 4A timer and does not report event 4A any more unless the timer expires.

l
The greater the parameter is, the harder to trigger event 4A again. Large value prevents
frequent adjustment of the BE service rate. But too large value can make the system respond
very slowly.
The lower the parameter is, the easier to trigger event again. But too low value may result
in frequent triggers under small fluctuation of the traffic.
Relevant Commands
5.2.6 Pending time after trigger Event 4B

After an event 4B is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4B is reported before the timer
expires.
Parameter ID
PendingTime4B
Value Range
Enum (D250, D500, D1k, D2k, D4k, D8k, D16k)

Enum (250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000) ms
Parameter Setting
The default value is D4000, that is 4 s. The parameter is set separately in unlink and downlink.
The pending time after trigger for event 4B is the timer started after the event measurement
report is triggered. It has two functions: The first is that within the pending time, no more
measurement report is sent for the same measurement ID even the condition that triggers
measurement report is met; the second is that when the pending timer expires, it judges whether
the traffic is above the upper threshold or under the lower threshold. If yes, it restarts the Time
to Trigger for event 4b timer and does not report event 4B any more unless the timer expires.
5-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

l
The greater the parameter is, the harder to trigger event 4B again. Large value prevents
frequent adjustment of the BE service rate. But too large value can make the system respond
very slowly.
The lower the parameter is, the easier to trigger event again. But too low value may result
in frequent trigger under small fluctuation of the traffic.
Relevant Commands
5.2.7 Uplink and Downlink DCCC Rate Thresholds

When the maximum uplink/downlink rates required by the BE service are not greater than the
uplink/downlink DCCC rate thresholds, channel reconfiguration is not carried out for the uplink/
downlink services according to the traffic condition.
Parameter ID
UlDcccRateThd
DlDcccRateThd
Value Range
Enum(D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default values are both D64, that is, 64 kbit/s.

The greater these parameter are, the more difficult the adjustment of the channel bandwidth
becomes.
Relevant Commands
The RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC, and query them through LST
DCCC.
5.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Middle Rate Thresholds

These parameters are the uplink and downlink middle rate threshold when 3 rate adjusting in
DCCC is used and the middle rate compute method is HAND_APPOINT.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-15
RAN
Parameter ID
UlMidRateThd
DlMidRateThd
Value Range
Enum(D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Enum (16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default values are both D128, that is 128 kbit/s.

None.
Relevant Commands
The RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC and query them through LST
DCCC.
5.2.9 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels

These parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.
Parameter ID
UlRateAdjLevel
DlRateAdjLevel
Value Range
Enum(2_Rates, 3_Rates)

None.
Parameter Setting
The default values are both 2_Rates.

None.
5-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Relevant Commands
The RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC and query them through LST
DCCC.
5.2.10 Low activity bitrate threshold

When the PS BE service rate has reduced to the rate threshold of DCCC, but UE can not transfer
to CELL_FACH state for some reasons (for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is
off; UE has CS service). The PS BE service rate is reduced to this rate when PS BE service
satisfy the requirement of D2F.
Parameter ID
LittleRateThd
Value Range
D8 D384

8 kbit/s 384 kbit/s
Parameter Setting

None.
Relevant Commands
The RNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET DCCC and query it through LST DCCC.
5.3 Link Stability Parameters

The common configurable link stability parameters are listed here.
Table 5-3 List of link stability parameters
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
No
.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
EventEaThd
Event Ea
relative
threshold
2 (1 dB)
RNC/
Cell
EventEbThd
Event Eb
relative
threshold
2 (1 dB)
For RNC level

Set or modify:SET
DCCC
Query:LST DCCC
For cell level
5-17
RAN
No
.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
UlFullCvrRate
Uplink full
coverage rate
64 kbit/s
DlFullCvrRate
Downlink full
coverage rate
32 kbit/s
Set: ADD
CELLDCCC
Query: LST
CELLDCCC
Level
5.3.1 Event Ea Relative Threshold

This parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Ea threshold
of the DL DPCCH power.
5.3.2 Event Eb Relative Threshold
This parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Eb threshold
5.3.3 Uplink Full Coverage Rate
This parameter describes the uplink full coverage rate.
5.3.4 Downlink Full Coverage Rate
This parameter describes the downlink full coverage rate.
5.3.1 Event Ea Relative Threshold

This parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Ea threshold
Parameter ID
EventEaThd
Value Range
0 111

0 dB 55.5 dB, step 0.5 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is 2, that is, 1 dB.

The higher the parameter is, the lower the absolute threshold for event Ea is, and it is easy to
trigger event Ea and it is useful for link stability. On the other hand, the QoS of planned service
is influenced possibly.
Relevant Commands
RNC-oriented parameter: Set it through SET DCCC and query the parameter through LST
DCCC.
5-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Cell-oriented parameter: Set it through ADD CELLDCCC, query it through LST

CELLDCCC and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.
5.3.2 Event Eb Relative Threshold

This parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Eb threshold
Parameter ID
EventEbThd
Value Range
0 111

0 dB 55.5 dB, step 0.5 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is 2, that is, 1 dB.

The higher the parameter is, the lower the absolute threshold for event Eb is, and it is difficult
to trigger event Eb.
Relevant Commands
RNC-oriented parameter: Set it through SET DCCC and query the parameter through LST
DCCC.
Cell-oriented parameter: Set it through ADD CELLDCCC, query it through LST
CELLDCCC and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.
5.3.3 Uplink Full Coverage Rate

This parameter describes the uplink full coverage rate.
Parameter ID
ULFullCvrRate
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384

8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-19
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default value is D64, which indicates 64 kbit/s.

The uplink full coverage rate is the maximum uplink service rate reached when a cell is totally
covered under some bearer.
For BE services with low maximum rate, the usage of the DCCC algorithm may require extra
efforts for algorithm handling rather than facilitate the service performance. Therefore, only BE
services with uplink maximum rate exceeds the threshold rate can perform the uplink coveragebased DCCC algorithm control.
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to the RNC, set this parameter through SET DCCC and query it through
LST DCCC.
For parameters oriented to the cell, add this parameter through ADD CELLDCCC, query it
through LST CELLDCCC, and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.
5.3.4 Downlink Full Coverage Rate

This parameter describes the downlink full coverage rate.
Parameter ID
DLFullCvrRate
Value Range
D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384

8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default value is D32, which indicates 32 kbit/s.

The downlink full coverage rate is the maximum downlink service rate reached when the cell is
totally covered. If the current rate is greater than the full coverage rate, lower the rate to the
coverage rate after the downlink TCP is limited. If the current rate is smaller than or equal to
the full coverage rate, lower the rate the minimum guaranteed rate. If the Ea event is reported
again, dismantle the links.
For BE services with low maximum rate, the usage of the DCCC algorithm requires extra efforts
for algorithm handling rather than facilitates the service performance. Therefore, only BE
services with the downlink maximum rate exceeds the threshold rate can perform the downlink
coverage-based DCCC algorithm control.
5-20
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Relevant Commands
For parameters oriented to the RNC, set this parameter through SET DCCC and query it through
LST DCCC.
For parameters oriented to the cell, add this parameter through ADD CELLDCCC, query it
through LST CELLDCCC, and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.
5.4 State Transfer Parameters

The common configurable state transfer parameters are listed here.
Table 5-4 List of state transfer parameters
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
DtoFState
TransTim
er
DCH to FACH
state transition
timer
180 s
RNC
D2F2PTv
mThd
DCH to FACH
and FACH to
PCH state
transition
traffic 4B
threshold
D64 (64
bytes)
Set or Modify: SET

UESTATETRANS
Query: LST
UESTATETRANS
FtoPState
TransTim
er
FACH to PCH
state transition
timer
180 s
CellReSel
ectTimer
Cell
Reselection
timer
180 s
FtoDTvm
Thd
FACH to DCH
traffic report
threshold
D1024 (1024
bytes)
FtoDTvm
TimeToTr
ig
FACH-toDCH traffic
time-to-trigger
D240 (240
ms)
5.4.1 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer

This parameter detects whether the users in CELL_DCH are stably in low activity to determine
whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.
5.4.2 DCH to FACH / FACH to PCH State Transition Traffic 4B Threshold
It helps to judge whether a user is in low activity state. When a user in CELL_DCH state reports
4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer. When a user in
CELL_FACH state reports 4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detection
timer when the 4B traffic is 0.
5.4.3 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-21
RAN
This parameter detects whether the users in CELL_FACH are stably in low activity to determine
whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.
5.4.4 Cell ReSelection Timer
This parameter and CellReSelectCounter jointly detect the status of the UE that frequently
performs cell reselection to determine the need for state transition from CELL_FACH to
URA_PCH.
5.4.5 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold
This parameter defines the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger
state transition from FACH to DCH.
5.4.6 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger
For UEs in the CELL_FACH state, after the traffic exceeds the report threshold and the duration
exceeds the time length specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing
state transition to the CELL_DCH state.
5.4.1 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer

This parameter detects whether the users in CELL_DCH are stably in low activity to determine
whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.
Parameter ID
DtoFStateTransTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535

1 s to 65535 s
Parameter Setting
Configuration of the parameter shall be based on the BE service model. The system judges
whether the users have no data to send for a long time and uses this as condition for state transition
to low activity. Whether the user has data to send can be reflected from the RLC buffered traffic:
If the user has no data to send, the RLC buffered traffic is zero. The traffic event 4B can be
configured to detect low activity.
Within the transition timer period, if there are consecutive event 4B reports and the buffered
service data is detected to be zero and the number of event 4B reports meets preset condition
when the timer expires, it can be said that the service is in low activity.

If the parameter value is too low, it would be hard to judge that the user is in relatively stable
low activity status. Too large value may waste specific channel resources.
5-22
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Relevant Commands
RNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET UESTATETRANS, and query it through LST
UESTATETRANS .
5.4.2 DCH to FACH / FACH to PCH State Transition Traffic 4B

Threshold
It helps to judge whether a user is in low activity state. When a user in CELL_DCH state reports
4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer. When a user in
CELL_FACH state reports 4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detection
timer when the 4B traffic is 0.
Parameter ID
D2F2PTvmThd
Value Range
D8D768K

8768K bytes
Parameter Setting
The default value is D64, that is, 64 bytes.

None.
Relevant Commands
RNCoriented parameter: set it through SET UESTATETRANS, and query it through LST
UESTATETRANS.
5.4.3 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer

This parameter detects whether the users in CELL_FACH are stably in low activity to determine
whether there is a need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.
Parameter ID
FtoPStateTransTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-23
RAN

1 s to 65535 s
Parameter Setting
The principle of state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH is similar to the abovementioned state transition from DCH to FACH. But because CELL_PCH does not support
service data transmission, zero traffic event is used to determine the need for transition from
FACH to PCH.

If the parameter value is too low, it would be hard to judge that the user is in relatively stable
low activity status. Too large value may waste FACH channel resources.
Relevant Commands
UESTATETRANS .
5.4.4 Cell ReSelection Timer

This parameter and CellReSelectCounter jointly detect the status of the UE that frequently
performs cell reselection to determine the need for state transition from CELL_FACH to
URA_PCH.
Parameter ID
CellReSelectTimer
Value Range
1 to 65535

1 s to 65535 s
Parameter Setting

When the parameter value is too low, it would be hard to judge that the users are in relatively
stable low activity. Too large value may waste specific channel resources.
Relevant Commands
UESTATETRANS .
5-24
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
5.4.5 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold

This parameter defines the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to trigger
state transition from FACH to DCH.
Parameter ID
FtoDTvmThd
Value Range
Enum (D0, D4, D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D4k, D8k, D16k, D32k,
D64k, D128k, D512k, D1024k )

Enum ( 0, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 4k, 8k, 16k, 32k, 64k, 128k, 512k, 1024k )
bytes
Parameter Setting
The default value is D1024, that is 1024 bytes.
This threshold is set to check whether there is data to be transmitted so that the UE moves to the
CELL_DCH substate. To avoid common channel congestion, this parameter should not be set
too high.

The greater this parameter is, the more difficultly state transition occurs. However, if the setting
is too low, it results in waste of the dedicated channel resources.
Relevant Commands
UESTATETRANS .
5.4.6 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger

For UEs in the CELL_FACH state, after the traffic exceeds the report threshold and the duration
exceeds the time length specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causing
state transition to the CELL_DCH state.
Parameter ID
FtoDTvmTimeToTrig
Value Range
D2560, D5000)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-25
RAN

Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms
Parameter Setting
The default value is D240, that is 240 ms.
This parameter prevents unnecessary triggering of traffic event due to traffic fluctuation. Too
large value may delay report of event 4A and result in congestion of the common channel.

The greater this parameter is, the more difficultly state transition occurs; the lower it is, the more
easily UE enters the CELL_DCH state, but the more serious influence the traffic fluctuation
brings.
Relevant Commands
UESTATETRANS .
5.5 PS Inactive
The common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.
Table 5-5 List of PS inactive parameters
5-26
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
PSINACT
TMRFOR
INT
Interactive
service T1
20 s
RNC
PROTEC
TTMRFO
RINT
Interactive
service T2
20 s
Set or modify: SET

PSINACTTIMER
Query: LST
PSINACTTIMER
PSINACT
TMRFOR
BAC
Background
service T1
20 s
PROTEC
TTMRFO
RBAC
Background
service T2
20 s
PSINACT
TMRFOR
IMS
IMS service
T1
20 s
PROTEC
TTMRFO
RIMS
IMS service
T2
20 s
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
5.5.1 Interactive Service T1

When no data to transfer during this timer for PS interactive user, then PDCP requests RRC
layer to release this connection.
If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2. If this
connection could not be released till T2 timer expires, PDCP layer applies to release this
connection again.
5.5.3 Background Service T1
When no data to transfer during this timer for PS background user, PDCP requires RRC layer
to release this connection.
connection again.
5.5.5 IMS Service T1
When no data to transfer during this timer for PS IMS users, PDCP requires RRC layer to release
this connection.
If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2, If this
connection again.

When no data to transfer during this timer for PS interactive user, then PDCP requests RRC
layer to release this connection.
Parameter ID
PSINACTTMRFORINT
Value Range
0 to 14,400

0 s to 14,400 s
Parameter Setting

The higher this parameter is, the more resource be occupied when no data to transfer; the lower
it is, the more singling transfers when data transfer is unstable.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-27
RAN
Relevant Commands
RNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET PSINACTTIMER, and query it through LST
PSINACTTIMER.

connection again.
Parameter ID
PROTECTTMRFORINT
Value Range
0 to 60

0 s to 60 s
Parameter Setting

l
The greater this parameter is, the longer resource occupation time is if the resource could
not be released after T1 is overtime.
The lower it is, the more signaling overhead there is if the connection could not be released
due to some special reasons.
Relevant Commands
PSINACTTIMER.

When no data to transfer during this timer for PS background user, PDCP requires RRC layer
to release this connection.
Parameter ID
PSINACTTMRFORBAC
Value Range
0 to 14,400
5-28
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

0 s to 14,400 s
Parameter Setting

l
The greater this parameter is, the more resource is occupied when no data to transfer.
The lower it is, the more singling transfer there is when data transfer is unstable.
Relevant Commands
PSINACTTIMER.

connection again.
Parameter ID
PROTECTTMRFORBAC
Value Range
0 to 60

0 s to 60 s
Parameter Setting

l
The greater this parameter is, the longer resource occupation time it takes if the resource
could not be released after T1 is overtime
The lower it is, the more signaling overhead there is if the connection could not be release
Relevant Commands
PSINACTTIMER.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-29
RAN

When no data to transfer during this timer for PS IMS users, PDCP requires RRC layer to release
this connection.
Parameter ID
PSINACTTMRFORIMS
Value Range
0 to 14,400

0 s to 14,400 s
Parameter Setting

l
The greater this parameter is, the more resource is occupied when no data to transfer.
The lower it is, the more singling transfer there is when data transfer is unstable.
Relevant Commands
PSINACTTIMER.

If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2, If this
connection again.
Parameter ID
PROTECTTMRFORIMS
Value Range
0 to 60

0 s to 60 s
Parameter Setting
5-30
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

l
The greater this parameter is, the longer resource occupation time it takes if the resource
could not be released after T1 is overtime.
The lower it is, the more signaling overhead there is if the connection could not be release
Relevant Commands
PSINACTTIMER.
5.6 RLC Retransmission Monitor Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 5-6 List of RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
No.
Paramete
r ID
Paramete
r
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Lev
el
TimeToM
oniter
Time to
start ReTX
monitor
5000 ms
Cell
MoniterPr
d
Re-Tx
monitor
period
1000 ms
Set: ADD
TYPRABRLC
Query: LST TYPRAB
Modify: MOD
TYPRABRLC
ReTransRa
tioFilterCo
ef
Retransmi
ssion filter
coefficient
EventAThr
ed
Event A
threshold
160, that is 16%
TimeToTri
ggerA
Event A
time to
trigger
PendingTi
meA
Event A
pending
time after
trigger
ReTransRe
portPeriod
Event A
report
period
50 ms
EventBThr
ed
Event B
threshold
80, that is 8%
5-31
RAN
No.
Paramete
r ID
Paramete
r
Meaning
Default Value
TimeToTri
ggerB
Event B
time to
trigger
14
10
PendingTi
meB
Event B
pending
time after
trigger
Relevant Command
Lev
el
5.6.1 Time to Start Re-TX Monitor

It means the delay time before starting the re-transmitted PDU monitor when RLC entity is
established or reconfigured.
5.6.2 Re-Tx Monitor Period
This parameter corresponds to the time of a period for re-transmitted PDU monitor.
5.6.3 Retransmission Filter Coefficient
This parameter denotes the filter coefficient about retransmission monitor algorithm.
5.6.4 Event A threshold
This parameter is the threshold of event A, which indicates a high ratio of PDUs are retransmitted.
5.6.5 Event A Time to Trigger
This parameter is the periods for triggering event A. Event A is triggered only if retransmit rate
is higher than event A threshold a certain period continuously.
5.6.6 Event A Pending Time after Trigger
This parameter is the pending period numbers after event A is triggered. During these periods,
no event A is reported.
5.6.7 Event A Report Period
This parameter is the period delayed of report after event A is trigged.
5.6.8 Event B Threshold
This parameter is the threshold of event B, which indicates an acceptable ratio of PDUs are retransmitted.
5.6.9 Event B Time to Trigger
This parameter is the period time event B is triggered.
5.6.10 Event B Pending Time after Trigger
This parameter is the pending period numbers after event B is triggered. During these periods,
no event B is reported.
5.6.1 Time to Start Re-TX Monitor

It means the delay time before starting the re-transmitted PDU monitor when RLC entity is
established or reconfigured.
5-32
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
TimeToMoniter
Value Range
0 to 500,000

0 to 500,000 ms, step 1 ms
Parameter Setting
The default value is 5,000 ms.

The lower the parameter is, the earlier the RLC re-transmitted monitor starts.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD TYPRABRLC, query it through LST TYPRAB, and modify
it through MOD TYPRABRLC.
5.6.2 Re-Tx Monitor Period

This parameter corresponds to the time of a period for re-transmitted PDU monitor.
Parameter ID
MoniterPrd
Value Range
40 to 60,000

40 ms to 60,000 ms, step 1 ms
Parameter Setting
The default value is 1000 ms.

The lower the parameter is, the earlier the RLC re-transmitted monitor starts.
Relevant Commands
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-33
RAN
5.6.3 Retransmission Filter Coefficient

This parameter denotes the filter coefficient about retransmission monitor algorithm.
Parameter ID
ReTransRatioFilterCoef
Value Range
0 to 10

None.
Parameter Setting

The greater this parameter is, the stronger the effect is on signal smoothness, the less interference
there is, but the weaker the response ability is for RLC retransmission measurement value break.
Relevant Commands
5.6.4 Event A threshold

This parameter is the threshold of event A, which indicates a high ratio of PDUs are retransmitted.
Parameter ID
EventAThred
Value Range
0 to 1000

0 to 100%, step 0.1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 160, that is 16%
5-34
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

The lower the parameter is, the earlier RLC re-transmitted event A is triggered. Thereby the
RNC reduces data sending.
Relevant Commands
5.6.5 Event A Time to Trigger

This parameter is the periods for triggering event A. Event A is triggered only if retransmit rate
is higher than event A threshold a certain period continuously.
Parameter ID
TimeToTriggerA
Value Range
0 to 100

None.
Parameter Setting

The higher the parameter is, the more difficult event A is triggered. Thereby the RNC reduces
data transfer. This strategy may not be so good in poor air-interface quality condition.
Relevant Commands
5.6.6 Event A Pending Time after Trigger

This parameter is the pending period numbers after event A is triggered. During these periods,
no event A is reported.
Parameter ID
PendingTimeA
Value Range
0 to 1000
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-35
RAN

None.
Parameter Setting

The higher the parameter is, the more difficult event A is triggered. Thereby the RNC reduces
data transfer. This strategy may not be so good in poor air-interface quality condition.
Relevant Commands
5.6.7 Event A Report Period

This parameter is the period delayed of report after event A is trigged.
Parameter ID
ReTransReportPeriod
Value Range
0 to 1000

0 to 1000 ms, step 10 ms.
Parameter Setting
The default value is 50 ms.

The greater the parameter is, the latter event A reports after been triggered.
Relevant Commands
5.6.8 Event B Threshold

This parameter is the threshold of event B, which indicates an acceptable ratio of PDUs are retransmitted.
5-36
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
EventBThred
Value Range
0 to 1000

0 to 100%, step 0.1%
Parameter Setting

The higher the parameter is, the easier event B is triggered.
Relevant Commands
5.6.9 Event B Time to Trigger

This parameter is the period time event B is triggered.
Parameter ID
TimeToTriggerB
Value Range
0 to 100

None.
Parameter Setting

The higher the parameter is, the more difficult event B is triggered.
Relevant Commands
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
5-37
RAN
5.6.10 Event B Pending Time after Trigger

This parameter is the pending period numbers after event B is triggered. During these periods,
no event B is reported.
Parameter ID
PendingTimeB
Value Range
0 to 1000

None.
Parameter Setting

The higher the parameter is, the longer event B report is delayed.
Relevant Commands
5-38
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Miscellaneous Topic Parameters
About This Chapter

Special topic parameters include parameters for cell channel power distribution, paging, RRC
connection setup, synchronization and location updating.
6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters
The common configurable cell channel power distribution parameters are listed here.
6.2 Paging Parameters
The common configurable paging parameters are listed here.
6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters
The common configurable RRC connection setup parameters are listed here.
6.4 Synchronization Parameters
The common configurable synchronization parameters are listed here.
6.5 Location Update Parameters
The common configurable location update parameters are listed here.
6.6 User Priority Related Parameters
The common configurable user priority related parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-1
RAN
6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters

The common configurable cell channel power distribution parameters are listed here.
Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
MaxTxP
ower
Maximum
cell transmit
power
430, that
is, 43
dBm
ADD CELLSETUP
Cell
PCPICH
Power
PCPICH
transmit
power
330, that
is, 33
dBm
ADD PCPICH
Transmit
power of
PSCH and
SSCH
-50, that
is, -5 dB
PSCHPower
PSCHPo
wer
SSCHPo
wer
MOD CELLSETUP
LST PCPICH
MOD CELL
ADD PSCH
LST PSCH
MOD CELL
SSCHPower
ADD SSCH
LST SSCH
MOD CELL
BCHPow
er
BCH
transmit
power
-20, that
is, -2 dB
Maximum
FACH
transmit
power
10, that
is, 1 dB
PCH
transmit
power
20, that
is, 2 dB
PICHPo
werOffse
t
PICH
transmit
power
-3 dB
AICHPo
werOffse
t
AICH
transmit
power
-6 dB
MaxFach
Power
PCHPow
er
ADD BCH
LST BCH
MOD CELL
ADD FACH
FACH
LST FACH
MOD SCCPCH
ADD PCH
Cell
LST PCH
MOD SCCPCH
ADD CHPWROFFSET
LST PICH
MOD PICHPWROFFSET
ADD CHPWROFFSET
LST AICH
MOD AICHPWROFFSET
6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power

6-2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
This parameter is the maximum downlink transmitting power of the NodeB.

6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power
These parameters are the transmit powers of P-SCH and S-SCH in relation to PCPICH.
6.1.4 BCH Transmit Power
This parameter is the transmit power of PCCPCH bearing BCH in relation to PCPICH.
6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit Power
This parameter defines the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower (In MOD
SCCPCH, the maximum transmit powers of the two FACH channels are respectively
FACH1MaxPower and FACH2MaxPower) in relation to PCPICH.
6.1.6 PCH Transmit Power
This parameter defines the transmit power of the PCH channel in relation to PCPICH.
6.1.7 PICH Transmit Power
This parameter is the transmit power of the PICH channel in relation to PCPICH.
6.1.8 AICH Transmit Power
This parameter defines the transmit power of AICH in relation to PCPICH.
6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power

This parameter is the maximum downlink transmitting power of the NodeB.
Parameter ID
MaxTxPower
Value Range
0 to 500

0 to 50 dBm, step 0.1 dBm
Parameter Setting
The default value is 430, namely 43 dBm.
This parameter defines the sum of the maximum transmit powers of all the downlink channels
in the cell at the same time. It should be set according to the NodeB capability, cell range and
capacity. In the actual configuration, if this value is greater than the cell report capability, cell
setup fails. The parameter is decided by network planning.

If this parameter is too low, the downlink capacity and the coverage is limited. However, it
should not exceed the actual processing capability of the NodeB.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-3
RAN
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, and modify it through MOD CELLSETUP.

Parameter ID
PCPICHPower
Value Range
-100 to 500

Parameter Setting
The default setting is 330, namely 33 dBm.
This parameter should be set based on the actual system environment such as cell coverage
(radius) and geographical environment. For the cells to be covered, the downlink coverage
should be guaranteed as a premise. For the cells requiring soft handover area, this parameter
should satisfy the proportion of soft handover areas stipulated in the network planning.
For a cell with large coverage, the value of this parameter should be relatively high; otherwise,
it should be relatively low. In a planned multi-cell environment, this parameter is definite If the
value of this parameter is smaller than the planned value, coverage holes may occur when the
cells are under heavy load.

l
If this parameter is too low, it influences directly the downlink pilot coverage range.
If it is too high, the downlink interference increases, and the cell capacity is decreased
because a lot of system resources are occupied and the interference with the downlink traffic
channels are increased.
In addition, the configuration of this parameter also has direct influence on the distribution of
handover areas.
Relevant Commands
through MOD CELL.
6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power

These parameters are the transmit powers of P-SCH and S-SCH in relation to PCPICH.
6-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
PSCHPower
SSCHPower
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting
The default values are both -50, namely -5 dB.
These two parameters can be adjusted through measurement in the actual environment so that
the transmit powers of the synchronization channels just satisfy the UE receiving demodulation
requirement. Specifically, when UEs receive signals at different locations within the range of
the cell, the transmit power should be just enough to ensure that the UE can implement fast
synchronization in most areas at the verge of the cell. Neither PSCH nor SSCH has come through
channel code spectrum spread, so they produce more serious interference than other channels
do, especially for near-end users. Therefore, the values should not be set too high.

l
If the setting of this set of parameters are too low, users at the verge of cells fail in network
searching, resulting in influence on coverage of the downlink common channel, which
finally affects cell coverage.
If the setting are too high, the power resources are wasted, and other channels are interfered
seriously, thus the cell capacity is influenced.
Relevant Commands
l
For PSSHPower, set it through ADD PSCH, and query it through LST PSCH.
For SschPower, set it through ADD SSCH, and query it through LST SSCH.
After the cells are set up, they can both be modified through MOD CELL.
6.1.4 BCH Transmit Power

This parameter is the transmit power of PCCPCH bearing BCH in relation to PCPICH.
Parameter ID
BCHPower
Value Range
-350 to 150
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-5
RAN

Parameter Setting
The default value is -20, namely -2 dB.
This parameter can also be adjusted and optimized through measurement in the actual
environment. When UEs receive signals at different locations within the range of the cell, the
transmit power should be just enough to ensure the correct demodulation of the information
carried on the channel in most areas at the verge of the cell. The setting of this parameter should
not be set too high, so as to avoid unnecessary waste of the transmit power.

l
If the setting of this parameter is too low, the user at the verge of the cell fails to receive
the system information correctly, and the downlink common channel coverage is
influenced, which affects cell coverage.
If the setting is too high, other channels are interfered, the power resources are occupied,
and consequently the cell capacity is influenced.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD BCH, query it through LST BCH, and modify it through MOD
CELL.
6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit Power

This parameter defines the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower (In MOD
SCCPCH, the maximum transmit powers of the two FACH channels are respectively
FACH1MaxPower and FACH2MaxPower) in relation to PCPICH.
Parameter ID
MaxFachPower
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting
The default value is 10, namely 1 dB.
If the FACH power is too low, the UE fails to receive the FACH data packets or the UE receives
error packets in a large portion; if it is too high, the power is wasted. Set the maximum FACH
transmit power to an appropriate value that is just enough to ensure the target BLER.
6-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

l
If the setting of this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive correctly
the services and signaling borne over the FACH, resulting in influence on the downlink
common channel coverage and the cell coverage;
If it is too high, other channels are interfered, the power resources are occupied, and
consequently the cell capacity is influenced.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD FACH, query it through LST FACH, and modify it through
MOD SCCPCH.
6.1.6 PCH Transmit Power

This parameter defines the transmit power of the PCH channel in relation to PCPICH.
Parameter ID
PCHPower
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting
The default value of this parameter is 20, namely 2 dB.
If the PCH power is too low, the UE fails to receive the PCH data packets or the UE receives
wrong packets, which may increase the retransmission times of paging packets, resulting in the
paging failure or the paging delay increase; if it is too high, the power is wasted.

l
If this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive paging messages
correctly, and this influences downlink common channel coverage and cell coverage.
If it is too high, other channels are interfered, the downlink transmit power are occupied,
and consequently the cell capacity is influenced.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD PCH, query it through LST PCH, and modify it through MOD
SCCPCH.
6.1.7 PICH Transmit Power

This parameter is the transmit power of the PICH channel in relation to PCPICH.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-7
RAN
Parameter ID
PICHPowerOffset
Value Range
-10 to 5

Parameter Setting
The default value of this parameter is -7, namely -7 dB.
An appropriate transmit power value should be set for PICH to ensure that all the users at the
cell verge can receive the paging indications. However, the transmit power should not be set too
high to avoid power waste.

l
If this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive paging messages
correctly, resulting in mis-operation in reading PCH channel and waste of the UE battery,
and the downlink common channel coverage and cell coverage may be affected.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST PICH, and modify
it through MOD PICHPWROFFSET.
6.1.8 AICH Transmit Power

This parameter defines the transmit power of AICH in relation to PCPICH.
Parameter ID
AICHPowerOffset
Value Range
-22 to 5

Parameter Setting
The default value of this parameter is -6, namely -6 dB.
6-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
An appropriate transmit power value should be set for AICH to ensure that all users at cell verge
can receive the access indication. However,the transmit power should not be set too high to avoid
waste of the power.

l
If this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive the capture indication
correctly, which may influence the downlink common channel coverage and the cell
coverage.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST AICH, and modify
it throughMOD AICHPWROFFSET.
6.2 Paging Parameters

The common configurable paging parameters are listed here.
Table 6-2 List of paging parameters
No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
DRXCycl
eLenCoef
Paging cycle
coefficient
Set or modify: SET

FRC or MOD
CNDOMAIN
RNC
Query: LST FRC or

LST CNDOMAIN
2
MaccPage
RepeatTi
mes
Number of
page
retransmit
Set or modify: SET

DPUCFGDATA
Query: LST
DPUCFGDATA
6.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient

This parameter is the UTRAN domain discontinuous receiving (DRX) cycle coefficient, and it
is a parameter of paging type 1.
6.2.2 Number of Paging Retransmit
This parameter is the number of retransmissions of paging message.
6.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient

This parameter is the UTRAN domain discontinuous receiving (DRX) cycle coefficient, and it
is a parameter of paging type 1.
Parameter ID
DRXCycleLenCoef
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-9
RAN
Value Range
3 to 9

None.
Parameter Setting
In the idle mode, the UE can receive the paging indication in the DRX mode to reduce the power
consumption. In this case, the UE needs to detect only one paging indication in a paging occasion
within each DRX cycle. The DRX cycle length of UTRAN domain is obtained by substituting
this parameter into the formula DRX cycle = 2K PBP frames. Where, K is the paging cycle
coefficient, and PBP is the number of paging block periods (In the FDD mode, PBP = 1).

l
If this parameter is too low, the UE detects the paging channel frequently, and thus the
battery is consumed fast.
If it is too high, the UE reacts very slowly to paging indications, and the system may
repeatedly page the UE, resulting in increased downlink interference.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through SET FRC or ADD CNDOMAIN, modify it through MOD
CNDOMAIN, and query it through LST FRC or LST CNDOMAIN.
6.2.2 Number of Paging Retransmit

This parameter is the number of retransmissions of paging message.
Parameter ID
MaccPageRepeatTimes
Value Range
0 to 2

None.
Parameter Setting
In order to improve the paging success rate, CN and RNC both repeat paging messages. However,
paging repeat has negative effects: firstly, it increases the paging quantity, especially in the
condition of downlink common channel congestion at the air interface; secondly, it increases
6-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
the paging quantity by several times, which wastes the downlink channel resources and cause
failure of timely delivery of new paging messages.
In addition, to ensure the paging success rate and paging efficiency at the same time, the number
of CN retransmitting paging messages and the time interval should be considered together with
UTRAN repeat. If UTRAN repeats transmission once, the CN repeat time interval should be
greater than 2 DRX cycles.
The following principle should be followed: CN should repeat the next paging message after
UTRAN finishes the previous paging message transmission and retransmission. To guarantee
compliance with this principle, such parameters as the number of CN retransmitting, the interval
of repeat, the number of UTRAN retransmitting and the coefficient of DRX cycle length can be
adjusted simultaneously for compliance with this principle.

If this parameter is too high, the system repeatedly pages UEs, the downlink common channel
resources are wasted, and the downlink interference is increased.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through SET DPUCFGDATA, and query it through LST
DPUCFGDATA.
6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters

The common configurable RRC connection setup parameters are listed here.
Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
T300
Timer T300 and

constant N300
T300: D2000 (2
s)
Set or modify: SET

IDLEMODETIMER
RNC
N300: 3
Query: LST
IDLEMODETIMER
N300
6.3.1 T300 and N300

Timer T300 starts when the UE transmits RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message, and the
timer stops when the UE receives RRC CONNECTION SETUP message. RRC CONNECTION
REQUEST is resent upon the expiry of the timer T300 if V300 is lower than or equal to N300,
else enters idle mode.
6.3.1 T300 and N300

Timer T300 starts when the UE transmits RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message, and the
timer stops when the UE receives RRC CONNECTION SETUP message. RRC CONNECTION
REQUEST is resent upon the expiry of the timer T300 if V300 is lower than or equal to N300,
else enters idle mode.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-11
RAN
Parameter ID
T300
N300
Value Range
T300: Enum(D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000, D1200, D1400, D1600, D1800, D2000,
D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000);
N300: 0 to 7

T300: Enum(100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000,
8000) ms;
N300: None
Parameter Setting
The default value of T300 is D2000 (2 s); the default value of N300 is 3.

The setting of timer T300 should be considered together with the UE and UTRAN processing
delay and the propagation delay.
l
The greater the setting of timer T300 is, the longer the UE waiting time it takes.
The greater the setting of N300 is, the higher success probability of the RRC connection
setup is, and the longer RRC setup time it takes.
In this case, it is likely that a UE repeats access attempts and connection setup request
transmission, and consequently other users are influenced seriously.
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through SET IDLEMODETIMER , and query them through LST
IDLEMODETIMER .
6.4 Synchronization Parameters

The common configurable synchronization parameters are listed here.
6-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters

No.
Paramet
er ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
NInsyncI
nd
Number of
successive insync
indications
Cell
NOutsync
Ind
Number of
successive
out-of-sync
indications
50
Set: ADD
CELLSETUP
Query: LST CELL
Modify: MOD
CELL
TRLFailu
re
Radio link
failure timer
duration
50 (5 s)
N312
N312 and
T312
N312: D1
Set or Modify: SET

IDLEMODETIME
R
RNC
T312
T312: 6 s
Query: LST
IDLEMODETIME
R
5
N313
N315
T313
N313, N315,
and T313
N313: D50
N315: D1
T313: 3 s
Set or Modify: SET

CONNMODETIM
ER
Query: LST
CONNMODETIM
ER
6.4.1 Number of Successive In-sync Indications

This parameter is the number of successive in-sync indications.
6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-sync Indications
This parameter is the number of successive out-of-sync indications.
6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration
This parameter is the radio link failure timer duration. This value defines the duration of timer
TRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeB shall start timer
TRlFailure after it receives NOutsyncInd successive out-of-sync indications, and the NodeB
shall stop and reset timer TRlFailure after receiving NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications.
When timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB will trigger the radio link failure process, and indicate
which radio link set is out-of-sync.
6.4.4 N312 and T312
When the UE starts to set up the dedicated channel, it starts timer T312, and after the UE detects
N312 in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical
channel setup fails.
6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313
After the UE detects N313 successive out-of-sync indications from L1, it starts timer T313. After
the UE detects N315 successive in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T313. Once the timer
expires, the radio link fails.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-13
RAN
6.4.1 Number of Successive In-sync Indications

This parameter is the number of successive in-sync indications.
Parameter ID
NInsyncInd
Value Range
1 to 256

None.
Parameter Setting
This parameter defines the number of successive in-sync indications required for the NodeB to
trigger the radio link recovery process. The radio link set remains in the initial state until it
receives NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications from L1, and then the NodeB triggers the
radio link recovery process, which indicates that the radio link set has been synchronized. Once
the radio link recovery process is triggered, the radio link set is considered to be in the
synchronized state.

l
The greater this parameter is, the stricter the synchronization process becomes, and the
more difficult the synchronization occurs.
The smaller it is, the easier the synchronization occurs. However, if the link quality is poor,
a simple synchronization requirement leads to waste of the UE power and increase of uplink
interference.
In the radio link maintenance process, this parameter is used together with the successive outof-sync indication counter.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL, and modify it
through MOD CELL.
6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-sync Indications

This parameter is the number of successive out-of-sync indications.
Parameter ID
NOutsyncInd
Value Range
1 to 256
6-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

None.
Parameter Setting
This value defines the number of successive out-of-sync indications required to receive to start
timer TRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeB starts timer
TRlFailure after it receives NOutsyncInd successive out-of-sync indications. The NodeB shall
stop and reset timer TRlFailure after receiving NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications. When
timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure process, and indicate which
radio link set is out-of-sync.

l
If this parameter is too low, the link out-of-sync decision is likely to happen.
If it is too high, out-of-sync is not likely to happen. But if the link quality is poor, it may
result in waste of the UE power and increased uplink interference.
In the radio link maintenance process, this parameter is adopted together with the successive insync indication counter.
Relevant Commands
through MOD CELL.
6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration

This parameter is the radio link failure timer duration. This value defines the duration of timer
TRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeB shall start timer
TRlFailure after it receives NOutsyncInd successive out-of-sync indications, and the NodeB
shall stop and reset timer TRlFailure after receiving NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications.
When timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB will trigger the radio link failure process, and indicate
which radio link set is out-of-sync.
Parameter ID
TRLFailure
Value Range
0 to 255

0 s to 25.5 s, step 0.1 s
Parameter Setting
The default value is 50, that is 5 s.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-15
RAN

l
If the timer duration is too short, there are few chances for the radio link to get synchronized.
If it is too long, the radio link failure process is probably delayed, and the downlink
interference increases.
Relevant Commands
through MOD CELL.
6.4.4 N312 and T312

When the UE starts to set up the dedicated channel, it starts timer T312, and after the UE detects
N312 in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physical
channel setup fails.
Parameter ID
N312
T312
Value Range
N312: Enum(D1, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)
T312: 1 to 15

N312: Enum(1, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000);
T312: 1 s to 15 s
Parameter Setting
N312 default value is D1 and T312 default is 6 s.

l
The greater the setting of N312 is, the more difficult the dedicated channel synchronization
becomes.
The longer the duration of timer T312 is, the higher the synchronization probability is, but
the longer the synchronization time it takes.
Relevant Commands
For idle mode: set them through SET IDLEMODETIMER; query them through LST
IDLEMODETIMER.
For connection mode: set them through SET CONNMODETIMER, query them through LST
CONNMODETIMER.
6-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313

After the UE detects N313 successive out-of-sync indications from L1, it starts timer T313. After
the UE detects N315 successive in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T313. Once the timer
expires, the radio link fails.
Parameter ID
N313
N315
T313
Value Range
N313: Enum(D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200)
N315: Enum(D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)
T313: 1 to 15

N313: Enum(1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200)
N315: Enum(1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)
T313:1 s to 15 s
Parameter Setting
The default value of N313 is D50; the default value of N315 is D1; the default value of T313 is
3 s.

l
The greater the setting of N313 is, the more difficult it is to start timer T313, and the lower
the out-of-sync probability is.
The lower the setting of N315 is, the longer T313 is, and the higher the link recovery
probability is.
These three parameters should be used in cooperation.
Relevant Commands
Set these parameters through SET CONNMODETIMER, and query them through LST
CONNMODETIMER.
6.5 Location Update Parameters

The common configurable location update parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-17
RAN
Table 6-5 List of location update parameters

Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Level
T3212
Periodic location
update timer
10, that is, 1

hour
Set: ADD CNDOMAIN
RNC
Query: LST
CNDOMAIN
Modify: MOD
CNDOMAIN
6.5.1 Periodic Location Update Timer

This parameter is the periodic update timing duration.
6.5.1 Periodic Location Update Timer

This parameter is the periodic update timing duration.
Parameter ID
T3212
Value Range
0 to 255

0 to 1530 m, step 6 m (minute)
Parameter Setting
The default value is 10, that is, 1 hour.

l
If this parameter is too low, the UE carries out location update frequently, resulting in a
large number of location update messages on the Uu and Iu interfaces.
If it is too high, the UE location message probably is not updated timely.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN, and
modify it through MOD CNDOMAIN.
6.6 User Priority Related Parameters

The common configurable user priority related parameters are listed here.
6-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Table 6-6 List of user priority related parameters

No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defau
lt
Value
Relevant Command
ARP1Priority,
ARP2Priority,
ARP3Priority,
ARP4Priority,
ARP5Priority,
ARP6Priority,
ARP7Priority,
ARP8Priority,
ARP9Priority,
ARP10Priority,
ARP11Priority,
ARP12Priority,
ARP13Priority,
ARP14Priority
User priority
of allocation/
retension
priority 1
14
None.
Set or modify:SET
USERPRIORITY
PriorityReference
Interate
priority
configured
reference
ARP
CarrierTypePriorInd
Indicator of
carrier type
priority
DCH
Lev
el
Query:LST
USERPRIORITY
6.6.1 User Priority of Allocation/Retension Priority 1~14

These parameters are user priority corresponding allocation and retention priority 1 to 14.
6.6.2 Integrate Priority Configured Reference
This parameter is used to set the criterion by which the priority is sorted firstly.
6.6.3 Indicator of Carrier Type Priority
This parameter is used to decide which carrier is prior when ARP and TrafficClass are both
identical.
6.6.1 User Priority of Allocation/Retension Priority 1~14

These parameters are user priority corresponding allocation and retention priority 1 to 14.
Parameter ID
ARP1Priority
ARP2Priority
ARP3Priority
ARP4Priority
ARP5Priority
ARP6Priority
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-19
RAN
ARP7Priority
ARP8Priority
ARP9Priority
ARP10Priority
ARP11Priority
ARP12Priority
ARP13Priority
ARP14Priority
Value Range
Gold, Silver, Copper

1, 2, 3
Parameter Setting
None.

None.
Relevant Commands
Set and modify the parameters through SET USERPRIORITY, query them throughLST
USERPRIORITY.
6.6.2 Integrate Priority Configured Reference

This parameter is used to set the criterion by which the priority is sorted firstly.
Parameter ID
PriorityReference
Value Range
ARP, TrafficClass

1, 2
Parameter Setting
The default value is ARP.
6-20
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

None.
Relevant Commands
Set and modify the parameter through SET USERPRIORITY, query it throughLST
USERPRIORITY.
6.6.3 Indicator of Carrier Type Priority

This parameter is used to decide which carrier is prior when ARP and TrafficClass are both
identical.
Parameter ID
CarrierTypePriorInd
Value Range
NONE, DCH, HSPA

0, 1, 2
Parameter Setting
The default value is NONE.

None.
Relevant Commands
Set and modify the parameter through SET USERPRIORITY, query it throughLST
USERPRIORITY.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
6-21
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
HSDPA Parameters
About This Chapter

HSDPA parameters include HSDPA power resource management parameters, HSDPA code
resource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility management parameters,
HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call admission control
algorithm parameters.
7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters
The three different UE capabilities described here are that the minimum TTI interval for UE to
receive data on HS-PDSCH includes 1/2/3 TTIs. For the default configuration, inside brackets
is physical value while outside brackets is IE value.
7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters are listed
here.
7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.
7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Switch of Channel Types Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters are listed
here.
7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Algorithm
The common configurable HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-1
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters

The three different UE capabilities described here are that the minimum TTI interval for UE to
receive data on HS-PDSCH includes 1/2/3 TTIs. For the default configuration, inside brackets
is physical value while outside brackets is IE value.
7.1.1 HS-DPCCH Power Management Parameters
The common configurable HS-DPCCH power control parameters are listed here.
7.1.2 Total Power of HSDPA and Measurement Power Offset Constant
The common configurable total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant is
listed here.
7.1.1 HS-DPCCH Power Management Parameters

The common configurable HS-DPCCH power control parameters are listed here.
Table 7-1 List of HS-DPCCH power control parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
ACKPO1
ACK power
offset
24/15
Set: ADD
CELLHSDPCC
H
Query: LST
CELLHSDPCC
H
Modify: MOD
CELLHSDPCC
H
Cell
ACKPO2
ACKPO3
2
ACKPO1forSHO
ACKPO2forSHO
ACKPO3forSHO
NACKPO1
NACKPO2
9/15
ACK power
24/15
offset in multiple
link set
NACK power
offset
NACKPO3
4
NACKPO1forSH
O
NACKPO2forSH
O
12/15
24/15
12/15
9/15
24/15
NACK power
offset in multiple
link set
NACKPO3forSH
O
5
ACKNACKReF1
ACKNACKReF2
ACK/NACK
repeat factor
ACKNACKReF3
6
7-2
ACKNACKReFf
orSHO
1
2
3
ACK/NACK
repeat factor in
multiple link set
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
CQIPO
CQI power offset

in single and
multiple RLS
24/15
CQI Repeat
Factor in Single
and Multiple
RLS
CQI repeat
period in single
and multiple
RLS
D2 (2 ms)
CQIPOforSHO
8
CQIReF
CQIReFforSHO
CQIFbCk
CQIFbCkforSHO
Relevant
Command
Level
7.1.1.1 ACK Power Offset

Set the three parameters respectively. They stand for the ACK power offsets for uplink DPCCH
corresponding to three different capabilities of UE in single link set.
7.1.1.2 ACK Power Offset in Multiple Link Set
corresponding to three different capabilities of UE in multiple link set.
7.1.1.3 NACK Power Offset
Set the three parameters respectively. They stand for the NACK power offsets for uplink DPCCH
7.1.1.4 NACK Power Offset in Multiple Link Set
7.1.1.5 ACK/NACK Repeat Factor
Set the three parameters according to three different capabilities of UE. Repeat sending the ACK/
NACK message in continuous multiple HS-DPCCH subframes.
7.1.1.6 ACK/NACK Repeat Factor in Multiple Link Set
During SHO, the UE sends the ACK/NAK message in ACKNACKREFFORSHO subframes
repeatedly.
7.1.1.7 CQI Power Offset in Single and Multiple RLS
Set the two parameters respectively. They are the CQI power offsets for uplink DPCCH in single
and multiple RLS.
7.1.1.8 CQI Repeat Factor in Single and Multiple RLS
Set the two parameters respectively. The UE repeats sending CQI in continuous CQIReF and
CQIReFforSHO HS-DPCCH subframes in single and multiple RLS.
7.1.1.9 CQI Repeat Period in Single and Multiple RLS
Set the two parameters respectively. They are the duration of CQI feedback period in single and
multiple RLS, namely, the UE sends CQI every CQIFbCk or CQIFbCkforSHO HS-DPCCH
subframes.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-3
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
ACK Power Offset

Parameter ID
ACKPO1
ACKPO2
ACKPO3
Value Range
PO_5/15, PO_6/15, PO_8/15, PO_9/15, PO_12/15, PO_15/15, PO_19/15, PO_24/15, PO_30/15

5/15, 6/15, 8/15, 9/15, 12/15, 15/15, 19/15, 24/15, 30/15
Parameter Setting
Set ACKPO1 to 24/15. Set ACKPO2 to 12/15. Set ACKPO to 9/15.

l
If these parameters are too low, when the UE sends the ACK message in non-SHO state,
the receiver decodes incorrectly with a greater probability, the redundant data transmission
increases, and the effective rate declines.
If they are too large, the UE wastes more power, and the uplink interference is stronger.
Relevant Commands
Set them through ADD CELLHSDPCCH, query them through LST CELLHSDPCCH, and
modify them through MOD CELLHSDPCCH.
ACK Power Offset in Multiple Link Set

Parameter ID
ACKPO1forSHO
ACKPO2forSHO
ACKPO3forSHO
Value Range
7-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

5/15, 6/15, 8/15, 9/15, 12/15, 15/15, 19/15, 24/15, 30/15
Parameter Setting
Set the default values of ACKPO1forSHO, ACKPO2forSHO, and ACKPO3forSHO to 24/15.

l
If they are too low, when the UE sends the ACK message in non-SHO state, the receiver
decodes incorrectly with a greater probability, the redundant data transmission increases,
and the effective rate declines.
If they are too high, the UE wastes more power, and the uplink interference is stronger.
Relevant Commands
NACK Power Offset

Parameter ID
NACKPO1
NACKPO2
NACKPO3
Value Range

5/15, 6/15, 8/15, 9/15, 12/15, 15/15, 19/15, 24/15, 30/15
Parameter Setting
l
The default value of NACKPO1 is 24/15.
The default value of NACKPO2 is 12/15,
The default value of NACKPO3 is 9/15.

l
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
If they are too low, when the UE sends the NACK message in non-SHO state, the receiver
will decode incorrectly with a greater probability, redundant data transmission will
increase, and effective rate will decline.
7-5
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
l
If they are too large, the UE will waste more power, and and uplink interference will be
stronger.
Relevant Commands
NACK Power Offset in Multiple Link Set

Parameter ID
NACKPO1forSHO
NACKPO2forSHO
NACKPO3forSHO
Value Range

5/15, 6/15, 8/15, 9/15, 12/15, 15/15, 19/15, 24/15, 30/15
Parameter Setting
The default values of NACKPO1forSHO, NACKPO2forSHO, and NACKPO3forSHO are
24/15.

l
If they are too low, when the UE sends the NACK message in SHO state, the receiver
decodes incorrectly with a greater probability, redundant data transmission increases, and
effective rate declines.
If they are too large, the UE wastes more power, and uplink interference is stronger.
Relevant Commands
ACK/NACK Repeat Factor

Set the three parameters according to three different capabilities of UE. Repeat sending the ACK/
NACK message in continuous multiple HS-DPCCH subframes.
Parameter ID
ACKNACKReF1
7-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
ACKNACKReF2
ACKNACKReF3
Value Range
1 to 4

1 to 4 times
Parameter Setting
The default value of ACKNACKReF1 is 1. The default value of ACKNACKReF2 is 2. The
default value of ACKNACKReF3 is 3.

If they are too large, the throughput rate of UE declines sharply. Set them based on the capability
of receiving data by UE continuously. The UE sends the ACK/NACK message at a transmit
power as low as possible on the condition that the power meets the requirement on ACK/NACK
demodulation performance.
Relevant Commands
ACK/NACK Repeat Factor in Multiple Link Set

During SHO, the UE sends the ACK/NAK message in ACKNACKREFFORSHO subframes
repeatedly.
Parameter ID
ACKNACKReFforSHO
Value Range
1 to 4

1 to 4 times
Parameter Setting
The default value of ACKNACKReFforSHO is 1.

The greater the parameter is, the more sharply the throughput rate of UE declines. Set it based
on the capability of receiving data by UE continously. The UE sends the ACK/NACK message
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-7
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
at a transmit power as low as possible on the condition that the power meets the requirement on
ACK/NACK demodulation performance.
Set it to 1 to keep the parameters of single radio link set (RLS) and multiple RLS consistent.
This avoids reconfiguration of HS-DPCCH parameters between single RLS and multiple RLS.
The parameter does not identity three capabilities of UE. Reconfiguration occurs for the other
two capabilities. This problem is to be solved in the next version.
Relevant Commands
Set it through ADD CELLHSDPCCH, query it through LST CELLHSDPCCH, and modify
it through MOD CELLHSDPCCH.
CQI Power Offset in Single and Multiple RLS

Set the two parameters respectively. They are the CQI power offsets for uplink DPCCH in single
and multiple RLS.
Parameter ID
CQIPO
CQIPOforSHO
Value Range

5/15, 6/15, 8/15, 9/15, 12/15, 15/15, 19/15, 24/15, 30/15
Parameter Setting
The default values are 24/15.

l
If they are too low, the receiver decodes data incorrectly in a greater probability when the
UE sends CQI. This affects TFRC selection, and lowers downlink throughput rate.
If they are too large, the UE wastes power and uplink interference increases.
Relevant Commands
CQI Repeat Factor in Single and Multiple RLS

Set the two parameters respectively. The UE repeats sending CQI in continuous CQIReF and
CQIReFforSHO HS-DPCCH subframes in single and multiple RLS.
7-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Parameter ID
CQIReF
CQIReFforSHO
Value Range
1 to 4

1 to 4 times
Parameter Setting

If the retransmisssion times of CQI is N, the network combines the N results, and then decodes
the data. If they are too large, the CQI does not indicate the real-time variation of the channel.
Relevant Commands
CQI Repeat Period in Single and Multiple RLS

Set the two parameters respectively. They are the duration of CQI feedback period in single and
multiple RLS, namely, the UE sends CQI every CQIFbCk or CQIFbCkforSHO HS-DPCCH
subframes.
Parameter ID
CQIFbCk
CQIFbCkforSHO
Value Range
D0, D2, D4, D8, D10, D20, D40, D80, and D160

0 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 80 ms, and 160 ms
Parameter Setting
The default values of CQIFBCK and CQIFBCKFORSHO are D2 (2 ms).
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-9
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

If they are too large, the CQI does not indicate the real-time variation of channel.
Relevant Commands
7.1.2 Total Power of HSDPA and Measurement Power Offset

Constant
The common configurable total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant is
listed here.
Table 7-2 List of total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defaul
t Value
Relevant Command
Level
HspaPower
Total power
of HSPA
0 (0 dB)
Cell
HsPdschMPOC
onstEnum
Measureme
nt power
offset
constant
2.5 dB
Set:ADD CELLHSDPA
Query:LST CELLHSDPA
Modify:MOD
CELLHSDPA
7.1.2.1 Total HSPA Power

This describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, EAGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.
7.1.2.2 Measurement Power Offset Constant
It helps calculate measurement power offset (MPO).
Total HSPA Power

This describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, EAGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.
Parameter ID
HspaPower
Value Range
-500 to 0

-50 dB to 0 dB, with step length as 0.1 dB
7-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Parameter Setting
The default setting is 0 dB.

The maximum value for dynamic power adjustment affects the throughput of H users on the
edge of a cell.
Relevant Commands
Use the ADD CELLHSDPA command for configuration, the LST CELLHSDPA command
for query, and the MOD CELLHSDPA command for modification.
Measurement Power Offset Constant

It helps calculate measurement power offset (MPO).
Parameter ID
HsPdschMPOConstEnum
Value Range
-3 to 19

Parameter Setting
The default value of HsPdschMPOConstEnum is 2.5 (2.5 dB).

It helps calculate MPO, namely, Measure Power Offset = Min(13,CellMaxPower PcpichPower - Measure Power Offset Constant).
According to PHSPDSCH = PCPICH + + , calculate PHSPDSCH , and then convert it to CQI. If
the HsPdschMPOConstEnum is improperly configured, the CQI in some scenarios will be
beyond the range of 0 to 30. As a result, the NodeB MAC-hs cannot schedule the subscriber in
the corresponding time or cannot schedule multiple subscribers with the difference of channel
conditions.
Relevant Commands
Set it through ADD CELLHSDPCCH, query it through LST CELLHSDPCCH, and modify
it through MOD CELLHSDPCCH.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-11
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Algorithm

Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters are listed
here.
Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Defaul
t Value
Relevant Command
Leve
l
AllocCodeMode
HSDPA
Code
resource
distribution
mode
Automa
tic
Set: ADD CELLHSDPA

Query: LST
CELLHSDPA
Modify: MOD
CELLHSDPA
Cell
HsPdschCodeNu
m
Number of
HS-PDSCH
codes
HsPdschMaxCode
Num
Number of
maximum
HS-PDSCH
codes
10
HsPdschMinCode
Num
Number of
minimum
HS-PDSCH
codes
HsScchCodeNum
Number of
HS-SCCH
codes
7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Distribution Mode

HSDPA code resource distribution support automatic distribution and manual distribution.
Adjust this parameter to select a distribution method.
7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes
This parameter is the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The parameter is valid only when the
AllocCodeMode is Manual.
7.2.3 Number of Maximum HS-PDSCH Codes
The parameter is valid only when the AllocCodeMode is Automatic.
7.2.4 Number of Minimum HS-PDSCH Codes
7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes
It is the number of codes allocated for HS-SCCH.
7-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Distribution Mode

HSDPA code resource distribution support automatic distribution and manual distribution.
Adjust this parameter to select a distribution method.
Parameter ID
AllocCodeMode
Value Range
Automatic and Manual

Automatic means automatic distribution. Manual means manual distribution.
Parameter Setting
At the early stage of network construction, or when the traffic model of subscribers in a cell is
not fixed, the network distributes HSDPA channel codes automatically, so select Automatic. If
the traffic model of subscribers in a cell is fixed and known, select manual distribution.

Manual distribution leads to restriction of HSDPA code resource or leaves HSDPA code idle.
Relevant Commands
Set it through ADD CELLHSDPA, query it through LST CELLHSDPA, and modify it through
MOD CELLHSDPA.
7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

This parameter is the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The parameter is valid only when the
AllocCodeMode is Manual.
Parameter ID
HsPdschCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15

1 to 15, step 1
Parameter Setting
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-13
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Set HsPdschCodeNum according to actual traffic model of a cell.

l
If the number of HS-PDSCH channel codes is over small, the HSDPA code resource is
restricted.
If the number of HS-PDSCH channel codes is over large, the HSDPA code resource is
wasted and the admission rejection rate of R99 services increases due to code resource.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLHSDPA, query it through LST CELLHSDPA, and
modify it through MOD CELLHSDPA.
7.2.3 Number of Maximum HS-PDSCH Codes

Parameter ID
HsPdschMaxCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15

1 to 15, step 1
Parameter Setting
Set it according to actual traffic model of a cell.

In HSDPA auto code distribution, set the number of maximum HS-PDSCH codes a little greater.
Relevant Commands
MOD CELLHSDPA.
7.2.4 Number of Minimum HS-PDSCH Codes

Parameter ID
HsPdschMinCodeNum
7-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Value Range
1 to 15

1 to 15, step 1
Parameter Setting
Set it according to actual traffic model of a cell.

In HSDPA auto code distribution, set it a little lower. Anyhow, it must match the number of
maximum HS-PDSCH HsPdschMaxCodeNum. There must be HsPdschMinCodeNum <=
HsPdschMaxCodeNum.
Relevant Commands
MOD CELLHSDPA.
7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes

It is the number of codes allocated for HS-SCCH.
Parameter ID
HsScchCodeNum
Value Range
1 to 15

1 to 15, step 1
Parameter Setting
Set it according to actual traffic model of cell.

It decides maximum number of subscribers that the NodeB can schedule in a TTI period. Set it
properly as required. In the scenarios like outdoor macro cells, with power distributed,
scheduling multiple subscribers is less probable, so configure 2 HS-SCCHs. In the scenarios
like indoor pico, with code restricted, scheduling multiple subscribers is probable, so configure
4 HS-SCCHs. If excessive HS-SCCHs are configured, the code resource is wasted. If inadequate
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-15
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
HS-SCCHs are configured, the HS-PDSCH code resource or power resource is wasted. These
two types of waste affect cell throughput rate.
Relevant Commands
MOD CELLHSDPA.
7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters

The common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.
Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
HspaTimerLen
HSPA
handover
protection
length
0 (0 s)
Set or modify:SET HOCOMM
RNC
Query: LST HOCOMM
7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length

According to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee that
HSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1D
triggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D does
not trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event
1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never be
triggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.
7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length

According to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee that
HSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1D
triggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D does
not trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event
1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never be
triggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.
Parameter ID
HsdpaTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 1024

0 s to 1024 s
7-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Parameter Setting
The serving cell is updated between different NodeBs. The buffer of original MAC-hs is reset,
so the data in the buffer is missing. As a result, the interruption time of data transfer exists. The
length of interruption time of data transfer is relevant to implementation of flow control
algorithm and RLC parameter configuration. The unit is hundred mill-second.
In the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, if the process occurs frequently, the subscriber
keeps in the state of restoring data transfer, interruption of data transfer, and then restoring data
transfer. This impacts the average throughput.
Set this parameter to control the frequency of update of serving cell. As a result, the impact of
the process on performance of HSPA data transfer is controlled. If the flow control algorithm
can control data in MAC-hs buffer accurately, set the parameter to 0.
If the parameter is too large in the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, report event 1D
by UE before expiration is more probable. When the UE reports event 1D before expiration, due
to the parameter restriction, the serving cell keeps being weak cell. As a result, the throughput
declines.
Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length

Set it properly to restrict the frequency to update serving cell in the scenarios with great
fluctuation of signals. This helps control the interruption of data transfer in serving cell update
between different NodeBs. It also helps control the impact on subscriber throughput.
Relevant Commands
Set it through SET HOCOMM. Query it through LST HOCOMM.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-17
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Switch of Channel Types

Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters are listed
here.
Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Leve
l
HRetryTimerLen
D2H retry
timer length
5 (5 s)
Set or modify:SET
COIFTIMER
RNC
Query: LST
COIFTIMER
2
D2HIntraHoTimer
Len
The timer
length of
D2H intrafrequency
handover
2 (2 s)
Set or modify:SET
HOCOMM
Query: LST HOCOMM
D2HInterHoTimer
Len
The timer
length of
D2H interfrequency
handover
5 (5 s)
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen
The timer
length of
multicarrier
handover
14 (14 s)
HsdpaCMPermiss
ionInd
CM
permission
indicator on
HSDPA
TRUE
Set or modify:SET
CMCF
Query: LST CMCF
7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length

If the service is to mapped on HS-DSCH, but actually, it is mapped on DCH, the D2H retry timer
starts. If H2D occurs, the timer starts after expiration of D2H punishment timer.
7.4.2 Timer Length of D2H Intra-Handover
After user finishes intra-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,
and the user service is adapt to bear on HSDPA, but it bears on DCH now, then the timer of D2H
intra-handover starts up. Before the timer expires, the D2H retry in this cell or its blind handover
adjacent cell is prohibited.
7.4.3 Timer Length of D2H Inter-Handover
After user finished inter-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,
7-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
intra-handover starts up. Before the timer is expired, the D2H retry in this cell or its blind
handover adjacent cell is prohibited.
7.4.4 Timer Length of Multi-Carrier Handover
To prevent ping-pong handover between multicarriers which has a bad effect on the system
performance, a protect timer MultiCarrierHoTimer is needed. After the UE is handed over from
cell A, the timer starts up. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA services are not
directly redirected to cell A. If the timer is zero, the timer does not start up, that is, it does not
prevent the ping-pong between multicarriers.
7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA
If this parameter value is TRUE, CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, and HSDPA
can be activated with CM activated. If this parameter value is FALSE, H2D is needed before
CM activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA can not exist when CM is activated.
7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length

If the service is to mapped on HS-DSCH, but actually, it is mapped on DCH, the D2H retry timer
starts. If H2D occurs, the timer starts after expiration of D2H punishment timer.
Parameter ID
HRetryTimerLen
Value Range
0, 1 to 180

0 s, 1 s to 180 s
Parameter Setting
The default value is 5 (5 s).

l
If the D2H retry timer length is too long, the D2H handover does not occur when the
subscribers data can be carried on HSDPA. This affects subscriber perception.
If the D2H retry timer length is too short, useless direct retry occurs. As a result, extra
signaling interaction occurs and the network resource is wasted.
Relevant Commands
Set it through SET COIFTIMER. Query it through LST COIFTIMER.
7.4.2 Timer Length of D2H Intra-Handover

After user finishes intra-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,
intra-handover starts up. Before the timer expires, the D2H retry in this cell or its blind handover
adjacent cell is prohibited.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-19
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Parameter ID
D2HIntraHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 999

0 s to 999 s
Parameter Setting

l
If the parameter is too large, the D2H is not triggered in time after intra-handover. This
may affect end user perception.
If it is too low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and D2H occurs in some scenarios.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST HOCOMM.
7.4.3 Timer Length of D2H Inter-Handover

After user finished inter-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,
intra-handover starts up. Before the timer is expired, the D2H retry in this cell or its blind
handover adjacent cell is prohibited.
Parameter ID
D2HInterHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 999

0 to 999 s
Parameter Setting
7-20
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

l
If the parameter is too large, the D2H will not be triggered in time after inter-handover.
This may affect end user perception.
If it is too low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and D2H occurs in some scenarios.
Relevant Commands
Set or modify the parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST
HOCOMM.
7.4.4 Timer Length of Multi-Carrier Handover

To prevent ping-pong handover between multicarriers which has a bad effect on the system
performance, a protect timer MultiCarrierHoTimer is needed. After the UE is handed over from
cell A, the timer starts up. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA services are not
directly redirected to cell A. If the timer is zero, the timer does not start up, that is, it does not
prevent the ping-pong between multicarriers.
Parameter ID
MultiCarrierHoTimerLen
Value Range
0 to 999

0 s to 999 s
Parameter Setting

l
If the parameter is too high, handover to original cell is triggered in time after multi-carrier
handover. This may affect end user perception.
If it is too low, the ping-pong handover between multicarriers occurs in some scenarios.
Relevant Commands
Set or modify the parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST
HOCOMM.
7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA

If this parameter value is TRUE, CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, and HSDPA
can be activated with CM activated. If this parameter value is FALSE, H2D is needed before
CM activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA can not exist when CM is activated.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-21
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Parameter ID
HsdpaCMPermissionInd
Value Range
FALSE, TRUE

0, 1
Parameter Setting
The default value is TRUE.

If the terminal supports this function, the terminal has a better performance when the HSDPA
is actived with CM actived.
Relevant Commands
Set or modify the parameter through SET CMCF, and query it through LST CMCF.
7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Algorithm

The common configurable HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 7-6 List of HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Lev
el
NodeBHsdpa
MaxUserNum
Maximum
HSDPA
users of
NodeB
3840
Set: ADD
NODEBALGOPARA
Nod
eB
Query: LST
NODEBALGOPARA
Modify: MOD
NODEBALGOPARA
7-22
UlHsDpcchRs
vdFactor
HsdpaStrmPB
RThd
UL HSDPCCH
reserve
factor
HSDPA
streaming
PBR
threshold
70%
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
HsdpaBePBR
Thd
HSDPA best
effort PBR
threshold
30%
MaxHSDSCH
UserNum
Max number
of users
supported by
HSDPA
channel
64
Relevant Command
Lev
el
7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users of NodeB

This parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel per
NodeB.
7.5.2 UL HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor
If the HS-DPCCH is to carry ACK/NACK, the system does not perform CAC. If the HS-DPCCH
is to carry CQI, the system performs CAC. The corresponding threshold of this parameter equals
the product of UL limit capacity and this parameter value.
7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold
This parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.
7.5.4 HSDPA Best Effort PBR Threshold
This parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA best effort traffic.
7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number
This parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel per cell.
7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users of NodeB

This parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel per
NodeB.
Parameter ID
NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum
Value Range
1 to 3840

None.
Parameter Setting
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-23
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters

If the HSDPA user connection is rejected by NodeB, it means the quantity of the HSDPA license
is insufficient. We need apply the new license for HSDPA.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LST
NODEBALGOPARA, and modify it through MOD NODEBALGOPARA.
7.5.2 UL HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor

If the HS-DPCCH is to carry ACK/NACK, the system does not perform CAC. If the HS-DPCCH
is to carry CQI, the system performs CAC. The corresponding threshold of this parameter equals
the product of UL limit capacity and this parameter value.
Parameter ID
UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 1, step 0.01
Parameter Setting

If this parameter is too high, the probability of admission rejection increases; if it is too low, it
causes the insufficiency of reserved uplink resource. But because the burst of load and affection
is small, we can set it to a lower value so as to admit more connections.
Relevant Commands
7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold

This parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.
Parameter ID
HsdpaStrmPBRThd
7-24
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step %1
Parameter Setting
The default value is 70%.

None.
Relevant Commands
7.5.4 HSDPA Best Effort PBR Threshold

This parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA best effort traffic.
Parameter ID
HsdpaBePBRThd
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting

None
Relevant Commands
7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number

This parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel per cell.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
7-25
RAN
7 HSDPA Parameters
Parameter ID
MaxHSDSCHUserNum
Value Range
0 to 64

None.
Parameter Setting

A too low value decreases the HSDPA capacity of cell, causes the waste of HSDPA resource.
An overly high value causes the congestion of HSDPA service.
Relevant Commands
7-26
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
HSUPA Parameters
About This Chapter

HSUPA parameters include HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA power
control parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.
8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters
The common HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the RNC LMT
are listed here.
8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Algorithm
The common configurable HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
8-1
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters

The common HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the RNC LMT
are listed here.
Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters
No.
Paramet
er ID
Para
meter
Mean
ing
Defau
lt
Value
Relevant Command
Lev
el
MaxTarg
etUlLoad
Factor
Maxi
mum
target
uplink
load
factor
75%
Set:ADD CELLHSUPA
Cell
NonServ
ToTotalE
dchPwrR
atio
Target
nonservin
g EDCH
to total
EDCH
power
ratio
0%
Query:LST CELLHSUPA
8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor

This parameter is the target uplink load factor of NodeB Scheduling Module. RNC calculates
the maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to NodeB by Iub message.
8.1.2 Target Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio
The prerequisite that non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to UE is that the ratio of the power
of non-serving E-DCH to that of total E-DCH is bigger than this parameter.
8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor

This parameter is the target uplink load factor of NodeB Scheduling Module. RNC calculates
the maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to NodeB by Iub message.
Parameter ID
MaxTargetUlLoadFactor
Value Range
0 to 100
8-2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters

0% to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting

This parameter is set according to radio network planning.
l
If it is too low, the cell throughput is too low.
If it is too high, the interference is too high.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLHSUPA, and query it through LST CELLHSUPA.
8.1.2 Target Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio

The prerequisite that non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to UE is that the ratio of the power
of non-serving E-DCH to that of total E-DCH is bigger than this parameter.
Parameter ID
NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio
Value Range
0 to 100

0% to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting

This parameter is used to decide whether the non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to UE.
l
If it is too low, the power of non-serving RL is very low, and it decreases the UE data rate
when the UE is in soft handover status.
If it is too high, the non-serving RL can not send RG DOWN to UE even if it is overload
scenarios.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLHSUPA, and query it through LST CELLHSUPA.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
8-3
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Algorithm

The common configurable HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Paramete
r
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Lev
el
MAXHSUPA
USERNUM
Maximum
HSUPA
user
number
20
Set: ADD CELLCAC
Cell
Query: LST CELLCAC

Modify: MOD CELLCAC
DLHSUPAR
SVDFACTO
R
DL
HSUPA
reserved
factor
NodeBHsupa
MaxUserNum
NodeB
max
HSUPA
user
number
3840
Set: ADD
NODEBALGOPARA
Nod
eB
Query: LST
NODEBALGOPARA
Modify: MOD
NODEBALGOPARA
8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number

This parameter is used for HSUPA admission control.
8.2.2 DL HSUPA Reserved Factor
This parameter is used to reserve part of resource for downlink control channels E-AGCH, ERGCH and E-HICH.
8.2.3 NodeB Maximum HSUPA User Number
This parameter is the maximum HSUPA user number that NodeB can support.
8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number

This parameter is used for HSUPA admission control.
Parameter ID
MAXHSUPAUSERNUM
Value Range
1 to 100

None.
8-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
Parameter Setting
This parameter is the maximum user number that HSUPA cell can support; it is set according
to the product specification.
For the HSUPA admission, the user number must be counted first. If the current HSUPA user
number is less than this parameter, the admission request is being analyzed, or else, the admission
is rejected directly.

l
If this parameter is too high, the product capacity cannot support all the HSUPA users after
admission, and cannot provide satisfying services.
If it is too low, part of the users are rejected for admission, and part of the resource is idle
and wasted, thus decreases the system capacity.
Relevant Commands
8.2.2 DL HSUPA Reserved Factor

This parameter is used to reserve part of resource for downlink control channels E-AGCH, ERGCH and E-HICH.
Parameter ID
DLHSUPARSVDFACTOR
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%, step 1%
Parameter Setting

l
If this parameter is higher, the resource reserved for HSUPA control channel is more, and
more resource is wasted.
If the parameter is low, when resource is limited, it has impact on the HSUPA user quality.
Relevant Commands
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
8-5
RAN
8 HSUPA Parameters
8.2.3 NodeB Maximum HSUPA User Number

This parameter is the maximum HSUPA user number that NodeB can support.
Parameter ID
NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum
Value Range
0 to 3840

None.
Parameter Setting
This parameter is set according to product specifications or the sold licenses.

If the HSUPA users are rejected for the HSUPA license number is not enough, then the HSUPA
license number must be added.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LST
8-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
MBMS Parameters
About This Chapter

MBMS parameters mainly include MBMS admission and load control parameters.
9.1 MBMS Admission and Load Control Parameters
The common configurable MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters are listed here.
9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters
The configurable FLC/FLD algorithm parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
9-1
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1 MBMS Admission and Load Control Parameters

The common configurable MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters
No
.
Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
MaxFachPower
Maximum transmit
power of the FACH
that carries the MBMS
service
Set
various
values
according
to service
rate.
Set the parameter

through ADD
FACH and query it
through LST
FACH.
Cell
MTCHMinPerc
0
Minimum coverage
percentage of the
MBMS service that
owns the highest
priority, that is,
priority 0
80%
MTCHMaxPer
c15
Minimum coverage
percentage of the
MBMS service that
owns the lowest
priority, that is,
priority 15
50%
Set the parameter

through ADD
CELLMTCH,
query it through
LST
CELLMTCH and
modify it through
MOD
CELLMTCH.
MbmsDecPow
erRabThd
A service priority
threshold, indicating
that the power of the
MBMS services with
lower priorities than
this threshold can be
decreased
Set the parameter

through ADD
CELLLDR, query
it through LST
CELLLDR, and
modify it through
MOD
CELLLDR.
MbmsPreempt
AlgoSwitch
MBMS preempt
algorithm switch
OFF
Set the parameter

through SET
QUEUEPREEM
PT and query it
through LST
QUEUEPREEM
PT.
9.1.1 Maximum Transmit Power of the FACH

This describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.
9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest Priority
This parameter describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service that owns the
highest priority, that is, priority 0.
9-2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest Priority
lowest priority, that is, priority 15.
9.1.4 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power
This parameter describes the service priority threshold used for decreasing the power of the
MBMS service. The power of the MBMS service with a lower priority than this threshold, that
is, the power of the MBMS service whose ARP priority value is greater than this threshold, can
be decreased.
9.1.5 MBMS Preempt Algorithm Switch
This parameter is the MBMS preempt algorithm switch. When this switch is set to ON, an MBMS
service can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.
The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.
9.1.1 Maximum Transmit Power of the FACH

This describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.
Parameter ID
MaxFachPower
Value Range
-350 to +150

-35 dB to +15 dB, with step length as 0.1 dB
Parameter Setting
Set various values according to service rate.

Because the FACH does not have the power control function, you must consider the QoS of the
users on the edge of a cell when setting the maximum transmit power of the FACH. If the set
value is too small, the quality for receiving services on the edge of a cell decreases and the mosaic
effect and the service delay occur. If the set value is too great, the extra power of the FACH is
wasted.
The RAN6.1 version supports only the MBMS broadcast function. Thus, all cells must use the
PTM transmission mode. This means that all cells use the FACH to send data. An UE can obtain
remarkable gain through soft combination or selective combination. According to the simulation
result, the gain obtained through soft combination ranges from 4.6 dB to 6.6 dB and the gain
obtained through selective combination ranges from 2 dB to 3 dB. In terms of the MBMS
terminal, you must choose selective combination for the integrated channel of the CMB and the
MBMS. Thus, by taking the generated gain into account, you can configure a lower power for
the FACH when a majority of terminals in a network support the MBMS service.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
9-3
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
CAUTION
The CMB terminals do not support soft combination or selective combination. Therefore, if a
majority of terminals support the CMB service, you can neglect the relevant gain when
configuring the FACH.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD FACH and query it through LST FACH.
9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the

Highest Priority
highest priority, that is, priority 0.
Parameter ID
MTCHMinPerc0
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%
Parameter Setting

When the load of a cell is heavy, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoids
the further deterioration of cell congestion on one side. On the other side, this increases the
success ratio of MBMS service establishment. You must ensure that the assigned low power can
cover the minimum coverage area of the MBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set on
the basis of the percentage of area covered by the MBMS service using the maximum transmit
power of the FACH.
To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area varies
according to service priorities. The value of this parameter is in positive correlation with the
coverage area of the MBMS service when a cell load is high.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLMTCH, query it through LST CELLMTCH, and
modify it through MOD CELLMTCH.
9-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the

Lowest Priority
lowest priority, that is, priority 15.
Parameter ID
MTCHMinPerc15
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%
Parameter Setting

When the load of a cell is heavy, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoids
the further deterioration of cell congestion on one side. On the other side, this increases the
success ratio of MBMS service establishment. You must ensure that the assigned low power can
cover the minimum coverage area of the MBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set on
the basis of the percentage of area covered by the MBMS service using the maximum transmit
power of the FACH.
To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area varies
according to service priorities. The value of this parameter is in positive correlation with the
coverage area of the MBMS service when a cell load is high.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLMTCH, query it through LST CELLMTCH, and
modify it through MOD CELLMTCH.
9.1.4 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power

This parameter describes the service priority threshold used for decreasing the power of the
MBMS service. The power of the MBMS service with a lower priority than this threshold, that
is, the power of the MBMS service whose ARP priority value is greater than this threshold, can
be decreased.
Parameter ID
MbmsDecPowerRabThd
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
9-5
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
Value Range
1 to 15

1 to 15
Parameter Setting

The MBMS services at each rate is set on the basis of two power levels. The power set for an
MBMS service is determined according to cell load during the service access. In addition, the
FACH power of the MBMS service must be decreased as required in the duration of cell
congestion. Some services with high priority, such as disaster pre-alert, however, do not approve
of the coverage shrink caused by cell load. In such a case, you can adjust the service priority
threshold to prevent the services with high priority against the impact of the service access failure
and the load control algorithm.
Relevant Commands
9.1.5 MBMS Preempt Algorithm Switch

This parameter is the MBMS preempt algorithm switch. When this switch is set to ON, an MBMS
service can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.
The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.
Parameter ID
MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch
Value Range
ON and OFF

ON and OFF
Parameter Setting
The default setting is OFF.
9-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters

The periodic reestablishment of the preempted MBMS service is not implemented in RAN6.1.
As a result, an MBMS service fails to be sent in a cell if the resource for the MBMS service is
occupied by another service through preemption.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through SET QUEUEPREEMPT and query it through
LSTQUEUEPREEMPT.
9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters

The configurable FLC/FLD algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters
N Parameter ID
o
.
Parameter Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Le
vel
FLC algorithm switch
ON
Set the parameter

through ADD
CELLMCCH, query
it through LST
CELLMCCH, and
modify it through
MOD CELLMCCH.
Cel
l
FlcAlgoSwitch
9.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch

This parameter is the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is set to ON, the
RNC performs the FLC operation.
9.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch

This parameter is the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is set to ON, the
RNC performs the FLC operation.
Parameter ID
FlcAlgoSwitch
Value Range
ON and OFF

ON and OFF
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
9-7
RAN
9 MBMS Parameters
Parameter Setting
The default setting is ON.

The FLC algorithm is a mandatory algorithm. It ensures that users on the other frequency points
can be reselected to the current frequency point for receiving the MBMS service when the
network starts sending the MBMS service. Therefore, the FLC algorithm is enabled by default.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD CELLMCCH, query it through LST CELLMCCH, and
modify it through MOD CELLMCCH.
9-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
10
Algorithm Switches
About This Chapter

In the RNC, algorithm switches are divided into two classes: connection-oriented algorithm
switches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.
10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in RNC
On the RNC LMT, set each connection-oriented algorithm switch through SET
CORRMALGOSWITCH and query the status of each algorithm switch through LST
CORRMALGOSWITCH.
10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches
On the RNC LMT, cell-oriented algorithm switches are added uniformly through ADD
CELLALGOSWITCH, the state of each algorithm switch is queried through LST
CELLALGOSWITCH, and the algorithm switches are modified through MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH.
10.3 Other Algorithm Switches
At this time, there are some other algorithm switches, such as Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iub
bandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequency
measurement control information indication.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
10-1
RAN
10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in RNC

On the RNC LMT, set each connection-oriented algorithm switch through SET
CORRMALGOSWITCH and query the status of each algorithm switch through LST
CORRMALGOSWITCH.
10.1.1 Channel Algorithm Switches
The algorithms of the channel algorithm switches are listed here.
10.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switches
The algorithms of the handover algorithm switches are listed here.
10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches
The algorithms and the default states of the power control algorithm switches are listed here.
10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switches
The algorithms of the HSPA algorithm switches are listed here.
10.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches
The algorithms of the DRD algorithm switches are listed here.
10.1.1 Channel Algorithm Switches

The algorithms of the channel algorithm switches are listed here.
Parameter ID
ChSwitch
Parameter Meaning
NOTE
DCCC algorithm is a basic function. When this algorithm is off, the channel cannot call other algorithms
to perform D2D adjustment. These algorithms include:
10-2
Traffic-triggered BE D2D rate adjustment;
1A rate reduction function before soft handover;
IUB bandwidth-restricted rate reduction function;
TCP-restricted rate reduction function, that is, link-stability-based rate adjustment function;
BE service bandwidth adjustment triggered by LDR preliminary congestion.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
N Switch ID
o
.
Switch
Meaning
Defaul
t
Settin
g
Description
AMR_TWO_C
ODCH_SWIT
CH
Switch for two

DCHs
configuration
by AMR
OFF
When it is checked, the AMR voice call

with the bit rate of 7.95 kbit/s or less than
that is allocated for two CoDCHs.
Otherwise, it is allocated for three
CoDCHs.
AMRC_SWIT
CH
AMRC
algorithm
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the AMRC (AMR

Control) license is enabled, AMR control
function is applied for AMR users.
BE_RATE_D
OWN_BF_HO
_SWITCH
Algorithm
switch for rate
decrease before
handover
OFF
When it is checked, it is allowed to

decrease the bandwidth of the BE
services before handover happens. It is
recommended to open DCCC_SWITCH
when using this function.
DCCC_SWIT
CH
DCCC
algorithm
switch
ON
When it is checked, dynamic channel

reconfiguration control algorithm is
applied in the RNC.
DL_INNER_L
OOP_POWER
_CTRL_SWIT
CH
Downlink inner
loop power
control
activation
switch
ON
When it is checked, the inner loop

downlink power control status is set to
Active. Otherwise, it is set to Inactive.
DOWNLINK_
BLIND_DETE
CTION_SWIT
CH
Downlink blind
detection
switch
ON
When it is checked, the downlink blind

transport format detection function is
used for single SRB and AMR + SRB
bearers. Note that the UE is only required
to support blind transport format
detection is the restrictions in 3GPP
25.212 section 4.3.1 are fulfilled.
FRC_FP_MO
DE_SWITCH
FP mode switch
ON
When it is checked, the FP mode in Iub

is set to normal mode. Otherwise, it is set
to silent mode.
FRC_PDCP_R
FC2507_HC_S
WITCH
PDCP IPHC
header
compression
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the IP header

compression license is enabled, the IP
header compression algorithm will be
applied in the RNC.
FRC_PDCP_R
FC3095_HC_S
WITCH
PDCP ROHC
header
compression
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the robust header

compression license is enabled, the
robust header compression algorithm
will be applied in the RNC.
10-3
RAN
10-4
N Switch ID
o
.
Switch
Meaning
Defaul
t
Settin
g
Description
1
0
HANDOVER_
TO_UTRAN_
CONFIGURA
TION_SWITC
H
Default
configuration
switch for interRAT handover
to UTRAN
ON
When it is checked, the default

configurations of signaling and RABs
which are defined in 3GPP 25.331 are
used first when the UE performs
handover from GSM to WCDMA.
Otherwise, those default configurations
are not applied, instead the RB, TrCH and
PhyCH included in the HANDOVER
TO UTRAN COMMAND message is
used.
1
1
IGNORE_RLC
_CAP_SWITC
H
Capability
algorithm
switch ignoring
RLC of UE
ON
When it is checked, the RAB Assignment

request and the subsequent RB Setup
should be continued when the RLC AM
capability of UE cannot meet the
minimum RLC buffer requirement
defined by the RLC TX/RX WINDOW
LIMITs of the RAB to be setup,
Otherwise, the RAB Assignment request
should be rejected.
1
2
IMS_SUPPOR
T_ACTIVATI
ON
IMS support
activation
switch
ON
When it is checked and the IMS license

is enabled, the RNC supports IMS.
1
3
IU_QOS_NEG
_SWITCH
Iu QoS
negotiation
switch
OFF
When it is checked, Iu QoS negotiation

function is applied for PS domain if
alternative RAB parameters are present
in RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT
REQUEST or RELOCATION
REQUEST message.
1
4
IU_QOS_REN
EG_SWITCH
IU QoS renegotiation
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the IU QOS

RENEQ license is enabled, RNC
supports RAB MODIFY REQUEST
procedure when the QoS of real-time
traffic can not be guaranteed according to
cell conditions.
1
5
IUB_OVERB
OOKING_SW
ITCH
Iub
overbooking
switch
OFF
When the wireless environment is poor,

some TFs are banned for high speed RAB
to limit the speed and then reduce the
transmission power. When it is checked,
IUB overbooking function is applied in
SRNC.
1
6
IUUP_V2_SP
T_SWITCH
IUUp V2 SPT
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the Support IUUP

Version 2 license is enabled, RNC
supports the TFO/TRFO function.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
N Switch ID
o
.
Switch
Meaning
Defaul
t
Settin
g
Description
1
7
LOSSLESS_R
ELOCIN_SWI
TCH
Lossless
relocation
switch
OFF
When it is checked and UE supports

lossless relocation, RNC configures
PDCP to support lossless relocation.
1
8
MULTI_RAB_
SWITCH
Single domain
supporting
multi services
switch
ON
When it is checked, multi-RABs

combination of 2CS, 2CS+1PS, 1CS
+2PS and 2PS are supported in the RNC.
1
9
PDCP_IPV6_
HEAD_COMP
RESS_SWITC
H
IPv6 packet
header
compression
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the PDCP header

compression function is enabled, PDCP
header compression algorithm for IPv6 is
applied in the RNC
2
0
PS_BE_STAT
E_TRANS_S
WITCH
UE state
transition
switch for PS
BE service
OFF
When it is checked, UE RRC state

transitions (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/
URA_PCH) for services are allowed in
the RNC.
2
1
PS_NON_BE_
STATE_TRA
NS_SWITCH
UE State
Transition
switch for PS
Non-BE service
OFF
When it is checked, UE RRC state

transitions to CELL_FACH for real-time
services are allowed in the RNC.
2
2
RAB_DOWNS
IZING_SWIT
CH
RAB
downsizing
switch
ON
When it is checked, RAB downsizing

function is applied for determining initial
bit rate according to cell resources.
2
3
RATE_ADJ_B
Y_DL_TCP_S
WITCH
Algorithm
switch for rate
adjustment by
limited
downlink
power
OFF
When it is checked, it is allowed to

dynamically reconfigure the bandwidth
of BE services according to the downlink
transmitted code power. It is
recommended to open DCCC_SWITCH
when using this function.
2
4
RLC_RETRA
NS_MEASUR
E_SWITCH
RLC retransfer
measure switch
ON
When downlink TCP (transmitted code

power) is restricted, and the RLC retransmitted ratio or re-transmitted
maximum number of BE service in AM
mode exceeds a specified threshold, the
bandwidth of the BE service is trigged to
decrease. When this switch is checked,
the RLC re-transmitted ratio or retransmitted maximum number of BE
service in AM mode is measured in TCP
algorithm.
10-5
RAN
N Switch ID
o
.
Switch
Meaning
Defaul
t
Settin
g
Description
2
5
RSC feedback
after setup RAB
failure switch
OFF
When it is checked, the cell left SF is

brought back if the RAB setup fails for
lack of CELL SF and then the RAB setup
tries again with lower speed to fit the
feedback SF.
RSC_FEEDB
K_AFTER_SE
TUPRAB_FAI
L_SWITCH
10.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switches

The algorithms of the handover algorithm switches are listed here.
Parameter ID
HoSwitch
Parameter Meaning
Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches
No.
Switch
ID
Switch
Meaning
Def
ault
Setti
ng
Description
6F6G_S
WITCH
6F6G
measureme
nt control
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the UE processes macrodiversity, the RNC starts the 6F6G measurement.
When the UE has more than two links in the active
set, the UE triggers the radio link synchronization
parameters measurement.
When the timing difference between the radio
links exceeds a certain threshold, UE reports 6F
event and trigger a timer; if the timing difference
between the radio links is below the threshold, UE
reports 6G event. Otherwise, when the timer
exceeds the specified interval, UE will release one
or more radio links.
10-6
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
No.
Switch
ID
Switch
Meaning
Def
ault
Setti
ng
Description
ACT_SE
T_QUAL
_SWITC
H
Active set
quality
measureme
nt switch
ON
When it is checked, the active set quality

measurement is allowed. After the RB setup is
complete (RRC setup is complete if
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is ON), the RNC
initiates signal quality measurement to all the cells
in Active Set. If the integrated signal quality of all
the cells in Active Set is below a certain threshold,
UE reports 2D event. Then RNC will initiate the
compressed mode and send inter-frequency
measurement or inter-RAT measurement, or both
to trigger inter-frequency or inter-RAT handover
based on the coverage and the UE's capability.
CMCF_D
L_HLS_S
WITCH
Compressed
mode DL
higher-layer
scheduling
switch
ON
When it is checked, the DL higher-layer

scheduling for compressed mode is allowed.
CMCF_U
L_HLS_S
WITCH
Compressed
mode UL
higher-layer
scheduling
switch
ON
When it is checked, the UL higher-layer

scheduling for compressed mode is allowed.
CMCF_U
L_PREC
FG_TOL
ERANCE
_SWITC
H
Compressed
mode UL
preconfigur
ed state
tolerance
switch
OFF
When it is checked, the disaccord between

compressed mode method and current traffic is
allowed.
CMCF_
WITHOU
T_UE_C
AP_REP
ORT_SW
ITCH
Compressed
mode
without ue
capability
report
switch
OFF
When it is checked, for those neighbor cells whose

frequency band dose not include in the UE's
measurement capability as compress mode need.
DETSET
_ADD_T
O_ACTS
ET_SWI
TCH
Detect set
add to active
set switch
OFF
(ON
sugg
ested
)
When it is checked, the cells in Detected Set can

be added to Active Set when RNC receives their
valid event reports. The cells in the detected set
allowed to be added to the active set must be the
neighboring intra-frequency cells of a cell in the
active set.
10-7
RAN
10-8
No.
Switch
ID
Switch
Meaning
Def
ault
Setti
ng
Description
DETSET
_
RPRT_S
WITCH
Detect set
report
switch
OFF
(ON
sugg
ested
)
When it is checked, the detected cell is allowed to

send the intra-frequency measurement report to
RNC.
HCS_SP
D_EST_S
WITCH
HCS speed
estimation
switch
OFF
When it is checked, RNC evaluates the UE's

moving speed when it is in an HCS cell, and
initiates inter-layer handover by fast-mobility
decision or by fast-mobility decision according to
UE's speed.
10
HO_BEY
OND_UE
_CAP_A
DD_TO_
MC_SWI
TCH
Neighbor
cell beyond
UE
capability
measureme
nt switch
OFF
When it is checked, then the neighbor cell whose

frequency band is not included in the UE's
measurement capability will also send in the interfrequency measurement control.
11
IUR_SH
O_DIVC
TRL_FIE
LD_SUP
P_SWIT
CH
Iur softhandover
diversity
support
switch
OFF
When it is checked, the Iur diversity support

switch is configured according to the diversity
switch of this RNC. Otherwise, according to the
services. It is set to MUST (for BE traffic) and
MAY (for other services).
12
INTER_F
REQ_HH
O_SWIT
CH
Interfrequency
hard
handover
switch
ON
When it is checked, the inter-frequency

measurement is allowed or the inter-frequency
hard handover based on cell load is allowed.
13
INTRA_
FREQUE
NCY_HA
RD_HAN
DOVER_
SWITCH
Intrafrequency
hard
handover
switch
ON
When it is checked, the intra-frequency hard

handover is allowed under the following
conditions:
l
The BE service is set up on DCH and the bit

rate of BE service or combined services
exceeds the threshold for soft handover
downlink bit rate.
The UE reports event 1D when the soft

handover switch is off.
The UE hands over cross RNCs while there are

no Iur interfaces between them.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
No.
Switch
ID
Switch
Meaning
Def
ault
Setti
ng
Description
14
INTER_
RAT_CS
_OUT_S
WITCH
Inter-RAT
handover
out switch
for CS
service
ON
When it is checked and the license is enabled,

RNC initiates inter-RAT measurement to trigger
inter-RAT handover of the CS domain from
UTRAN.
15
INTER_
RAT_PS
_OUT_S
WITCH
Inter-RAT
handover
out switch
for PS
service
ON
When it is checked and the license is enabled,

RNC initiates inter-RAT measurement to trigger
inter-RAT handover of the PS domain from
UTRAN.
When UE has more than one connections with the
cells in active set, it initiates the radio link
synchronization measurement.
16
SOFT_H
ANDOV
ER_SWI
TCH
Soft
handover
switch
ON
When it is checked, the soft or softer handover is

allowed. When receiving an event 1A, 1B, 1C, or
1D report, the RNC starts to add, remove or
replace soft handover cells.
17
NCELL_
COMBIN
E_SWIT
CH
NCell
combining
OFF
When it is checked, measurement object is chosen

from neighbour cells of all the cell in the Active
Set and limited by 32. Otherwise, measurement
object is chosen from neighbour cells of the Best
Cell and limited by 32.
18
PS_3G2G
_CELLC
HG_NAC
C_SWIT
CH
PS 3G->2G
cell change
NACC
switch
OFF
When it is checked, and inter-RAT handover of

the PS domain from UTRAN use cell change order
method, inter-RAT handover support NACC
(Network Assisted Cell Change) function.
19
PS_3G2G
_RELOC
ATION_
SWITCH
PS 3G->2G
reallocation
switch
OFF
When it is checked, inter-RAT handover of the PS

domain from UTRAN uses relocation method,
otherwise, cell changes order method.
20
SERVIC
E_HO_B
ASED_O
N_RNC_
SWITCH
Service
handover
based on
RNC setting
OFF
When it is checked, service attribute of inter-rat

handover is based on RNC.
10-9
RAN
No.
Switch
ID
Switch
Meaning
Def
ault
Setti
ng
Description
21
SIGNAL
_HO_SW
ITCH
Signal
handover
switch
OFF
When it is checked, the RNC initiates the quality

measurement of active set after the RRC setup is
complete (before RB setup). In this way RNC can
trigger inter-frequency or inter-RAT handover
when the RRC setup is complete. Thus UE can be
handed over to an inter-frequency or inter-RAT
neighboring cell more quickly when UE is located
at the edge of the cell or the signal quality of the
radio link is bad.
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is not used to trigger
inter-frequency or inter-RAT hand over when UE
only has signal connection. It is used to send active
set quality measurement once RRC connection is
set up and RB is not setup. If the active set quality
measurement has been sent,
SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH affcts nothing.
When the timing difference between the radio
links exceeds a certain threshold, UE reports event
6F and trigger a timer; if the timing difference
between the radio links is below the threshold, UE
reports event 6G. Otherwise, when the timer
exceeds the specified interval, UE releases one or
more radio links.
10-10
22
SIGNAL
_IUR_IN
TRA_HO
_SWITC
H
Signaling
intra
handover
control over
Iur
OFF
When it is checked, the intra-frequency handover

over IUR is allowed if UE only has the signal
connection.
23
SNA_RE
STRICTI
ON_SWI
TCH
SNA
restriction
switch
OFF
When it is checked, RNC controls the UEs that are

active in the CN configuration. Those UEs are
allowed to access and move only in the cells with
permission.
24
FDD_M
ULTI_B
AND_NC
ELL_ME
AS_SWI
TCH
Multi band
neighbor
cell
measureme
nt
OFF
When it is checked, the inter frequency

measurement control contains inter frequencies
neighbor cells whose frequency is not in the
frequency band which the UE can support.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No.
Switch
ID
Switch
Meaning
Def
ault
Setti
ng
Description
25
SRNSR_
DSCR_I
UR_RES
RCE_SW
ITCH
SRNS
relocation or
DSCR
switch for
Iur resource
optimizatio
n
OFF
When it is checked, RNC initiates SRNS

relocation or DSCR of certain UEs under the
following conditions to optimize resources over
the Iur interface:
1. UE only has connections with cells in the
DRNC.
2. The Iur transmission resources are congested.
3. The service of UE is the same as the service that
is carried by the congestion link.
26
SRNSR_
DSCR_L
OC_SEP
RAT_SW
ITCH
SRNS
relocation or
DSCR
switch for
separated
location
ON
When it is checked, RNC triggers RNS relocation

or DSCR when SRNC and CRNC are separated
and all the intra-frequency neighbouring cells of
the best cell are not under SRNC.
27
SRNSR_
DSCR_P
ROPG_D
ELAY_S
WITCH
SRNS
relocation or
DSCR
switch for
delay
optimizatio
n
OFF
When it is checked, RNC initiates SRNS

relocation under the following conditions to
reduce link delay at the network side to enhance
service quality:
SRNS
relocation or
DSCR
switch for
separated
duration
ON
28
SRNSR_
DSCR_S
EPRAT_
DUR_S
WITCH
1. SRNC and CRNC are separated.

2. The link delay does not meet the Qos
requirement for the current service.
When it is checked, RNC triggers RNS relocation
or DSCR when the separated time between SRNC
and CRNC exceeds a certain threshold.
10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches

The algorithms and the default states of the power control algorithm switches are listed here.
Parameter ID
PcSwitch
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
10-11
RAN
Parameter Meaning
Table 10-3 List of power control algorithm switches
10-12
No
.
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defa
ult
Settin
g
Description
AMR_MODE_I
NDUCE_BLER
_TARGET_ALT
ER_SWITCH
Altering
switch of target
BLER value
induced by
AMR mode
OFF
When it is checked, the BLER target

value comes from the BLER target
value of the AMR modes specified in
the AMRC parameter table. Otherwise,
it comes from the BLER target value
specified in TYPRAB.
DOWNLINK_P
OWER_BALAN
CE_SWITCH
Downlink
power balance
switch
ON
When it is checked, DPB(Downlink

Power Balance) algorithm is applied to
RNC. Downlink power drift among
different RLs, which is caused by TPC
bit error or other reasons, could reduce
the gain of soft handover. DPB is
mainly used to balance the downlink
power of different RLs for an UE in
order to achieve the best gain of soft
handover.
FP_MUTI_RLS
_IND_SWITCH
Multi RLS
indicator
switch
ON
when it is checked, RNC will inform

NodeB about the change of RLS's
number with FP inner band signaling.
INNER_LOOP_
DL_LMTED_P
WR_INC_SWIT
CH
Limited power
increase in the
inner loop
power control
switch
OFF
When it is checked, limited power

increase algorithm is applied in the
inner loop power control.
SIG_DCH_OLP
C_SWITCH
Signaling
transmission
participating in
the outer loop
power control
switch for
multiple
DCHs.
OFF
This switch is used to determine

whether SIG DCH joins the uplink
OLPC (outside loop power control)
procedure if there are more than one
DCH. When it is checked, SIG DCH
joins OLPC procedure. However, if
there is only one DCH, SIG DCH joins
OLPC procedure no matter whether
this switch is checked or not.
OLPC_SWITCH
Outer loop
power control
switch
ON
When it is checked, RNC updates the

uplink SIR TARGET of RLS on the
NodeB side by IUB DCH FP signals.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
No
.
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defa
ult
Settin
g
Description
OLPC_UL_SIR_
ERR_REL_SWI
TCH
UE released
linked to UL
SIR error
switch
OFF
When it is checked, if the SIRERR is

high and the cell is overloaded, UE is
released.
RL_RECFG_SI
R_TARGET_C
ARRY_SWITC
H
SIRTarget
switch for RL
reconfiguratio
n
ON
This switch is used to determine

whether current converged UL SIR
Target should be taken into
consideration when deciding the new
Initial UL SIR Target during the RL
reconfiguration. The switch is valid
only when OLPC_SWITCH is on.
10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switches

The algorithms of the HSPA algorithm switches are listed here.
Parameter ID
HspaSwitch
Parameter Meaning
Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches
N
O
.
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defaul
t
Settin
g
Description
HSDPA_S
TATE_TR
ANS_SWI
TCH
HSDPA state
transfer
switch
OFF
When it is checked, UE RRC state transitions

to CELL_FACH for the DCCC algorithm of
HSDPA services are allowed in the RNC.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
PS_STRE
AMING_O
N_HSDPA
_SWITCH
Streaming
service on
HSDPA
switch
OFF
When the RAB on HS-DSCH is BE service,

the PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is
requiured to checked simultaneously.
When the RAB on HS-DSCH is PS realtime traffic, the

PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
is requiured to checked simultaneously.
When it is checked, PS streaming traffic can be

mapped to HS-DSCH when the downlink max
bit rate is more than or equal to the streaming
on HSDPA threshold.
10-13
RAN
10-14
N
O
.
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defaul
t
Settin
g
Description
HSDPA_F
LOW_CO
NTROL_S
WITCH
HSDPA flow
control
switch
OFF
When it is checked, the HSDPA (AM mode)

flow control function is applied in SRNC.
HSUPA_S
TATE_TR
ANS_SWI
TCH
HSUPA state
transition
switch
OFF
When it is checked, UE RRC state transitions

to CELL_FACH for the DCCC algorithm of
HSUPA services are allowed in the RNC.
l
When the RAB on E-DCH is BE service, the

PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH is
required to check simultaneously.
When the RAB on E-DCH is PS real-time

traffic, the
PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
is required to check simultaneously.
HSUPA_P
O_UPDAT
E_SWITC
H
HSUPA PO
update
switch
OFF
When it is checked and the OLPC algorithm

switch is open, the RNC adjusts the E-DCH
power offset periodically.
PS_STRE
AMING_O
N_E_DCH
_SWITCH
PS streaming
on E-DCH
switch
OFF
When it is checked, PS streaming traffic can be

mapped to E-DCH when the uplink max bit rate
is more than or equal to the streaming on
HSUPA threshold.
H2D_FOR
_LOWR5_
NRNCCEL
L_ADD_S
WITCH
H2D before
the low R5
NRNC cell
added
OFF
When it is checked, channel switch of HSDSCH to DCH is needed before adding

neighbor RNC with version lower than R5 cell
to active set.
HSUPA_T
TI_2MS_S
WITCH
2 ms TTI
switch for
HSUPA
service
OFF
When it is checked, the 2ms TTI could be

applied to HSUPA traffic.
HSUPA_D
CCC_SWI
TCH
DCCC
switch for
HSUPA
service
OFF
When it is checked, DCCC is available for the

HSUPA service.
1
0
PS_CONV
ERSATIO
N_ON_HS
DPA_SWI
TCH
PS
conversation
service on
HSDPA
switch
OFF
When it is checked, PS conversation traffic can

be mapped to HS-DSCH when the downlink
max bit rate is more than or equal to the
conversation on HSDPA threshold.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
N
O
.
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defaul
t
Settin
g
Description
1
1
PS_CONV
ERSATIO
N_ON_E_
DCH_SWI
TCH
PS
conversation
service on EDCH switch
OFF
When it is checked, PS conversation traffic can

be mapped to E-DCH when the uplink max bit
rate is more than or equal to the conversation
on HSUPA threshold.
10.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches

The algorithms of the DRD algorithm switches are listed here.
Parameter ID
DrdSwitch
Parameter Meaning
Table 10-5 List of DRD algorithm switches
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
No.
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Default
Setting
Description
COMB_SERV_
DRD_SWITCH
Combination
service DRD
switch
OFF
Only when this switch is on, can

DRD be done if combination
service needs retry.
DRD_SWITCH
DRD switch
OFF
This is the general DRD

algorithm switch, only when
this switch is on, can the other
DRD sub-switches be on.
HSDPA_DRD_
SWITCH
HSDPA DRD
switch
OFF

DRD be done if HSDPA
service needs retry.
RAB_DCCC_D
RD_SWITCH
DCCC DRD
switch
OFF

DRD be done if RAB DCCC
flow needs retry.
RAB_MODIFY
_DRD_SWITC
H
RAB modify
DRD switch
OFF

DRD be done if RAB modify
flow needs retry.
HSUPA_DRD_
SWITCH
HSUPA DRD
switch
OFF
When it is checked, DRD is

triggered for the HSUPA
service that needs retry.
10-15
RAN
No.
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Default
Setting
Description
RAB_SETUP_
DRD_SWITCH
RAB setup
DRD switch
ON
When it is checked, DRD is

triggered for the RAB setup
process that needs retry.
INTRA_HO_D
2H_DRD_SWI
TCH
Intrahandover
D2H DRD
switch
ON
After the intra-handover

process is completed, when the
UE needs D2H retry for
handover-triggering, the blindHo DRD cell is allowed to
select for D2H retry only if the
switch is on.
INTER_HO_D2
H_DRD_SWIT
CH
Interhandover
D2H DRD
switch
ON
After the inter-handover

process is completed, when the
UE needs D2H retry for
handover-triggering, the blindHo DRD cell is allowed to
select for D2H retry only if the
switch is on.
10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches

On the RNC LMT, cell-oriented algorithm switches are added uniformly through ADD
CELLALGOSWITCH, the state of each algorithm switch is queried through LST
CELLALGOSWITCH, and the algorithm switches are modified through MOD
CELLALGOSWITCH.
10.2.1 Cell Algorithm Switches
The algorithms and default states of the cell algorithm switches are listed here.
10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch
This parameter is used to control UL CAC algorithm.
10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch
This parameter is used to control DL CAC algorithm.
10.2.1 Cell Algorithm Switches

The algorithms and default states of the cell algorithm switches are listed here.
Table 10-6 List of cell algorithm switches
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defau
lt
Settin
g
Description
Cell CAC algorithm switchNBMCACALGOSWITCH
10-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defau
lt
Settin
g
Description
CRD_ADCT
RL
NodeB credit
admission
control
algorithm
ON
Only IUB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH which is

set by SET CACALGOSWITCH command
is switched on and this switch is also on, the
NodeB credit admission control algorithm is
valid.
HSDPA_AD
CTRL
HSDPA
admission
control
algorithm
OFF
Control HSDPA admission control algorithm.
HSDPA_GB
P_MEAS
HSDPA HSDSCH required

power
measurement
OFF
Control HSDPA HS-DSCH Required Power

measurement.
HSDPA_PB
R_MEAS
HSDPA HSDSCH Provided

bit rate
measurement
OFF
Control HSDPA HS-DSCH Provided Bit Rate

measurement.
HSUPA_AD
CTRL
HSUPA
admission
control
algorithm
OFF
Control HSUPA admission control algorithm.
MBMS_AD
CTRL
MBMS
admission
control
algorithm
OFF
Control MBMS admission control algorithm.
DOFFC
Default DPCH
offset
configuration
algorithm
ON
Default DPCH offset configuration algorithm.
Cell LDC algorithm switchNBMLDCALGOSWITCH
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
INTRA_FRE
QUENCY_L
DB
Intra-frequency
load balance
algorithm
OFF
It is also named cell breathing algorithm.Based

on the cell load, this algorithm changes the pilot
power of the cell to control the load between
intra-frequency cells.
PUC
Potential user
control
algorithm
OFF
ased on the cell load, this algorithm changes the

selection/reselection parameters of a cell to
lead the UE to a lighter loaded cell.
ULOLC
Uplink overload
control
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is overloaded in UL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in UL by quick
TF restriction or UE release.
10-17
RAN
Switch ID
Switch
Meaning
Defau
lt
Settin
g
Description
DLOLC
Downlink
OFF
overload control
algorithm
When the cell is overloaded in DL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in DL by quick
TF restriction or UE release.
ULLDR
Uplink load
rearrangement
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in UL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in UL by using
inter-frequency load handover, BE service rate
reduction, uncontrollable real-time service
QoS renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover,
and PS inter-RAT handover.
DLLDR
Downlink load
rearrangement
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in DL by using
inter-frequency load handover, BE service rate
reduction, uncontrollable real-time service
QoS renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover,
and PS inter-RAT handover.
OLC_EVEN
TMEAS
OLC event
measure
OFF
Specifies whether condition to trigger load

control uses event measurement alone or infers
from the period measurement report.
CELL_COD
E_LDR
Code
reshuffling
algorithm
OFF
When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, this

algorithm reduces the cell load in DL by using
BE service rate reduction and code tree
reshuffling.
CELL_CRE
DIT_LDR
Credit
reshuffling
algorithm
OFF
When the cell credit is heavily loaded, this

algorithm reduces the credit load of the cell by
using BE service rate reduction, uncontrollable
real-time service QoS renegotiation, CS interRAT handover, and PS inter-RAT handover.
ALGO
RITH
M_DE
PEND
_ON_
LCG
Value range: ALGORITHM_REQUIRED,

ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG
Mac-hs reset algorithm switch

NBMMACH
SRESETAL
GOSELSWI
TCH
Mac-hs Reset
algorithm
switch
ALGORITHM_REQUIRED: Always reset

the mac-hs no matter the cells in question are
in the same NodeB or not.
ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG:
Reset the mac-hs only when the cells in
question are in the different local cell group.
10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch

This parameter is used to control UL CAC algorithm.
10-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch
Value Range
ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,
ALGORITHM_THIRD

ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the uplink admission control algorithm;
ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for uplink admission;
ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for uplink
admission;
ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in uplink CAC.
Parameter Setting
The default setting is ALGORITHM_SECOND.
When the change range of uplink back noise is wide or the RTWP reported by the NodeB is
invalid, it is necessary to use the total service normalized factor algorithm.
10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch

This parameter is used to control DL CAC algorithm.
Parameter ID
NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch
Value Range
ALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,
ALGORITHM_THIRD

ALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the uplink admission control algorithm;
ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for downlink admission;
ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for downlink
admission;
ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in downlink CAC.
Parameter Setting
The default setting is ALGORITHM_FIRST.
If TCP measurement is invalid, the total service normalized factor algorithm is adopted.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
10-19
RAN
10.3 Other Algorithm Switches

At this time, there are some other algorithm switches, such as Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iub
bandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequency
measurement control information indication.
10.3.1 Iub CAC Algorithm Switches
This parameter is used to control the Iub Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm.
10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch
This parameter is used to control the Iub bandwidth congestion algorithm.
10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication
This parameter defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control information should be
delivered through the system information.
10.3.4 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Indication
This parameter defines whether inter-frequency/inter-RAT measurement control information is
to be delivered in the system information.
10.3.5 FACH Measurement Indicator
This parameter indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period length coefficient
should be delivered through the system information.
10.3.1 Iub CAC Algorithm Switches

This parameter is used to control the Iub Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm.
Parameter ID
CacSwitch
Value Range
Table 10-7 CAC algorithm switches
Algorithm
switch
Switch ID
Description
Relevant Commands
NODEB_CR
EDIT_CAC
_SWITCH
NodeB
credit CAC
switch
The system performs CAC

based on the usage state of
NodeB credit. When the idle
NodeB's credit is not enough,
the system refuses new access
requests.
Set it through SET

CACALGOSWITCH and
query it through LST
CACALGOSWITCH.

10-20
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
IUBCongCtrlSwitch
Value Range
Enum (ON, OFF)

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is OFF.
When this switch is open, the Iub bandwidth restriction algorithm works, so that when the
occupied bandwidth of Iub interface exceeds the Iub congestion trigger threshold, the algorithm
uses LDR to periodically reduce some BE service rates or AMR service rates until the occupied
bandwidth is lower than the Iub congestion release threshold.

l
In case that the transmission resource of Iub interface is scarce and the carrier wants to
admit more users by sacrificing some user perception, this switch shall be ON.
When the transmission resources are abundant, this switch shall preferably be OFF.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LST
10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information

Indication
This parameter defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control information should be
delivered through the system information.
Parameter ID
IntraFreqMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)

REQUIRE: the intra-frequency measurement control information is delivered in SIB11;
NOT_REQUIRE: the intra-frequency measurement control information is not delivered in
SIB11.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
10-21
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default setting is REQUIRE.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD CELLMEAS, query it through LST CELLMEAS, and modify
it through MOD CELLMEAS.
10.3.4 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Indication

This parameter defines whether inter-frequency/inter-RAT measurement control information is
to be delivered in the system information.
Parameter ID
InterFreqInterRATMeasInd
Value Range
Enum (NOT_REQUIRE, INTER_FREQ,INTER_RAT, INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT)

NOT_REQUIRE: the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is not
required;
INTER_FREQ: the inter-frequency measurement control information is required;
INTER_RAT: the inter-RAT measurement control information is required;
INTER_FREQ_and_INTER_RAT: the inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement control
information is required.
Parameter Setting
The default setting is INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT. That is, Inter-frequency FDD
measurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicators are set to TRUE in the
system message. This switch is oriented to cells.
Relevant Commands
10.3.5 FACH Measurement Indicator

This parameter indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period length coefficient
should be delivered through the system information.
Parameter ID
FACHMeasInd
10-22
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE

REQUIREThe measurement occasion about inter-frequency or inter-RAT were broadcasted
by SIB11.
NOT_REQUIREThe measurement occasion about inter-frequency or inter-RAT were not
broadcasted by SIB11.
Parameter Setting
If inter-freq or inter-RAT measurement control information was broadcast through the system
information, some UEs in CELL_FACH state need the FACH measurement occasion period
length coefficient for measurement.
When the parameter InterFreqInterRATMeasInd is set to NOT_REQUIRE, this parameter is
needless.
Relevant Commands
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
10-23
RAN
11
Transmission Resource Management

Parameters
About This Chapter

11.1 Transmission Common Parameters
11.2 Iub Admission Control Parameters
The Iub admission control parameters are listed here.
11.3 Iub Congestion Control Parameters
The common configurable Iub congestion control parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
11-1
RAN
11.1 Transmission Common Parameters

Table 11-1 List of transmission common parameters
No.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
AAL2PATHT
AAL2PATH
type
If there exists
HSDPA service,
it needs to
configue
HSDPA
Set: ADD AAL2PATH
Set: ADD IPPATH

Query: LST IPPATH or
DSP IPPATH
Modify: MOD IPPATH
IPPATH
IP PATH type
NRT
PHB
Per-Hop
behavior
ANY
Query: LST AAL2PATH

or DSP AAL2PATH
Modify: MOD
AAL2PATH
11.1.1 AAL2 Path Type

This parameter is the expected type of the service carried on an AAL2 path.
11.1.2 IP Path Type
This parameter is used to set the IP path type.
11.1.3 Per-Hop Behavior
This parameter used to set the IP per hop behavior for IPPATH.
11.1.1 AAL2 Path Type

This parameter is the expected type of the service carried on an AAL2 path.
Parameter ID
AAL2PATHT
Value Range
R99, HSPA

None.
Parameter Setting
This parameter defines the AAL2 path type. It describes whether the service is R99 or HSPA
carrier on path. HSPA service and non-HSPA service can not carrier on the same AAL2 path.
If the system needs to support HSPA service, we must configure a HSPA type AAL2 path.
11-2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

HSPA channel high peak vs. average value decides the same high peak Vs. average value for
HSPA service in Iub interface. The burst HSPA service affects voice and R99 data service if it
is not treated diversify on transmission.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD AAL2PATH, query it through LST AAL2PATH or DSP
AAL2PATH, and modify it through MOD AAL2PATH.
11.1.2 IP Path Type

This parameter is used to set the IP path type.
Parameter ID
IPPATHT
Value Range
Enum( RT, NRT, HSPA RT, HSPA NRT)

RT means real time type, NRT means non real time type. HSPA RT means HSPA real time type.
HSPA NRT means HSPA non real time type.
Parameter Setting
The default value is NRT.

None.
Relevant Commands
Set this parameter through ADD IPPATH, query it through LST IPPATH or DSP IPPATH,
and modify it through MOD IPPATH.
11.1.3 Per-Hop Behavior

This parameter used to set the IP per hop behavior for IPPATH.
Parameter ID
PHB
Value Range
Enum (BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, ANY)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
11-3
RAN

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is ANY.
PHB is used to set the user priority, the priority increase by degrees from BE to EF. If it is ANY,
the DSCP of IP is set according to PHB setting, not according to DSCP setting.

Different services use different PHBs. The network provides different services according to
different PHBs, and configures IP path respectively to realize different transmission.
For example, if the IP path type is RT/HSDPA_RT, then use high level DSCP; If the IP path
type is NRT/HSDPA_NRT, then use low level DSCP. Different DSCPs is mapped to different
PHBs.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD IPPATH, query it through LST IPPATH or DSP IPPATH,
and modify it through MOD IPPATH.
11.2 Iub Admission Control Parameters

The Iub admission control parameters are listed here.
Table 11-2 List of Iub admission control parameters
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
FWDHORS
VBW
Forward
handover
reserved
bandwidth
80 kbits/s
Set the parameters through ADD

AAL2PATH / ADD IPPATH;
BWDHORS
VBW
Backward
handover
reserved
bandwidth
modify them through MOD

AAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH;
query them through LST AAL2PATH /
DSP AAL2PATH / LST IPPATH / DSP
IPPATH.
11.2.1 Reserved Bandwidth for Forward/Backward Handover

This group of parameters reflect the Iub bandwidth reserved for user switchover. They are the
threshold parameters used by new users for the access of Iub resources. When a new user gains
access to the Iub resources through a path, the access of the new user is denied if the remaining
bandwidth of the path is smaller than the bandwidth reserved for user switchover.
11.2.1 Reserved Bandwidth for Forward/Backward Handover

This group of parameters reflect the Iub bandwidth reserved for user switchover. They are the
threshold parameters used by new users for the access of Iub resources. When a new user gains
11-4
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
access to the Iub resources through a path, the access of the new user is denied if the remaining
bandwidth of the path is smaller than the bandwidth reserved for user switchover.
Parameter ID
FWDHORSVBW
BWDHORSVBW
Value Range
0 to 100000

0 to 100000 kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default value of each parameter is 80.
This group of parameters reflect the Iub bandwidth reserved for user switchover. To ensure the
high success ratio of switchover, you need to set these parameters according to the actual
switchover service rate.

The greater these parameters are set, the more resources are reserved for user switchover. This
can ensure the high success ratio of user switchover whereas may waste resources. The smaller
these parameters are set, the more difficult it is to ensure the success ratio of user switchover.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameters through ADD AAL2PATH / ADD IPPATH, modify them through MOD
AAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH, and query them through LST AAL2PATH / DSP
AAL2PATH / LST IPPATH / DSP IPPATH.
11.3 Iub Congestion Control Parameters

The common configurable Iub congestion control parameters are listed here.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
11-5
RAN
Table 11-3 List of Iub congestion control parameters

N Parameter
o ID
.
Paramete
r
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
Forward
congestion
threshold
160 kbit/s
Set the parameters through ADD

AAL2PATH/ADD IPPATH, modify
them through MOD AAL2PATH/MOD
IPPATH, and query through LST
AAL2PATH/DSP AAL2PATH/LST
IPPATH/DSP IPPATH
FWDCON
GBW
BWDCON
GBW
FWDCON
GCLRBW
BWDCON
GCLRBW
Backward
congestion
threshold
Forward
congestion
clear
threshold
240 kbit/s
Backward
congestion
clear
threshold
11-6
IubCongCt
rlSwitch
IUB
congestion
control
switch
OFF
IubCongCt
rlTimerLen
IUB
congestion
control
timer
length[s]
60 s
GeneralCo
mmChFact
or
General
common
channel
factor[%]
70%
CMBCom
mChFactor
CMB
common
channel
factor[%]
100%
MBMSCo
mmChFact
or
MBMS
common
channel
factor[%]
100%
SRBFactor
SRB factor
[%]
50%
Telephony
Factor
Telephony
factor[%]
70%
Set this parameter through ADD

NODEBALGOPARA, modify it
through MOD NODEBALGOPARA,
and query it throughLST
NODEBALGOPARA
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
N Parameter
o ID
.
Paramete
r
Meaning
Default Value
1
0
R99ConvF
actor
R99
conversati
on service
factor[%]
100%
1
1
R99Stream
Factor
R99
streaming
service
factor[%]
100%
1
2
R99InterFa
ctor
R99
interactive
service
factor[%]
50%
1
3
R99Bkgrnd
Factor
R99
backgroun
d service
factor[%]
50%
1
4
HsdpaStrea
mFactor
HSDPA
streaming
service
factor[%]
100%
1
5
HsdpaInter
Factor
HSDPA
interactive
service
factor[%]
100%
1
6
HsdpaBkgr
ndFactor
HSDPA
backgroun
d service
factor[%]
100%
1
7
HsupaStrea
mFactor
HSUPA
streaming
service
factor[%]
100%
1
8
HsupaInter
Factor
HSUPA
interactive
service
factor[%]
100%
1
9
HsupaBkgr
ndFactor
HSUPA
backgroun
d service
factor[%]
100%
Relevant Command
11.3.1 Forward/Backward Congestion Threshold

Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
11-7
RAN
If the available forward bandwidth is less than or equal to FWDCONGBW, the forward
congestion alarm is emitted. If the available backward bandwidth is less than or equal to
BWDCONGBW, the backward congestion alarm is emitted.
11.3.2 Forward/Backward Congestion Clear Threshold
If the available forward bandwidth is greater than FWDCONGCLRBW, the forward congestion
alarm is cleared. If the available backward bandwidth is greater than BWDCONGCLRBW, the
backward congestion alarm is cleared.
11.3.4 Timer Length for Iub Bandwidth Restriction Service Rate Reduction
After the Iub bandwidth is restricted, you can start the timer that is used for reducing service
rate. By using the timer, you can periodically select the users of the BE service and the AMR
voice service and reduce the rate of the services for solving the Iub congestion problem.
11.3.5 Iub Congestion Factors
These parameters are Iub factors used to apply the Iub bandwidth when different services set
up.
11.3.1 Forward/Backward Congestion Threshold

If the available forward bandwidth is less than or equal to FWDCONGBW, the forward
congestion alarm is emitted. If the available backward bandwidth is less than or equal to
BWDCONGBW, the backward congestion alarm is emitted.
Parameter ID
FWDCONGBW
BWDCONGBW
Value Range
0 to 100,000

0 to 100,000 kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default values for these parameters are both 160 kbit/s.

The higher the values are, the easier to trigger congestion control threshold. The BE services
and AMR data rates decrease process begin. But if they are too high, the transport utilization
rate is low, at the same time, it has a bad effect on the end user perception.
11-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Relevant Commands
AAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH, and query through LST AAL2PATH / DSP AAL2PATH /
LST IPPATH / DSP IPPATH.
11.3.2 Forward/Backward Congestion Clear Threshold

If the available forward bandwidth is greater than FWDCONGCLRBW, the forward congestion
alarm is cleared. If the available backward bandwidth is greater than BWDCONGCLRBW, the
backward congestion alarm is cleared.
Parameter ID
FWDCONGCLRBW
BWDCONGCLRBW
Value Range
0 to 100,000

0 to 100,000 kbit/s
Parameter Setting
The default values are both 240 kbit/s.

The higher the values are, the easier the congestion alarm is cleared. But an overly high value
may lead to a low transport utilization rate, and at the same time, the congestion control is not
triggered.
Relevant Commands
AAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH, and query through LST AAL2PATH / DSP AAL2PATH /
LST IPPATH / DSP IPPATH.

Parameter ID
IUBCongCtrlSwitch
Value Range
Enum (ON, OFF)
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
11-9
RAN

None.
Parameter Setting
The default value is OFF.
When this switch is open, the Iub bandwidth restriction algorithm works, so that when the
occupied bandwidth of Iub interface exceeds the Iub congestion trigger threshold, the algorithm
uses LDR to periodically reduce some BE service rates or AMR service rates until the occupied
bandwidth is lower than the Iub congestion release threshold.

l
In case that the transmission resource of Iub interface is scarce and the carrier wants to
admit more users by sacrificing some user perception, this switch shall be ON.
When the transmission resources are abundant, this switch shall preferably be OFF.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LST
11.3.4 Timer Length for Iub Bandwidth Restriction Service Rate

Reduction
After the Iub bandwidth is restricted, you can start the timer that is used for reducing service
rate. By using the timer, you can periodically select the users of the BE service and the AMR
voice service and reduce the rate of the services for solving the Iub congestion problem.
Parameter ID
IUBCONGCTRLTIMERLEN
Value Range
1 to 255

1 to 255 (unit: s)
Parameter Setting
The default setting is 60 s.
You need to set this parameter based on the effect of solving the Iub resource congestion problem.
11-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

The greater this parameter is, the longer time is spent on solving the Iub congestion problem and
the lower the congestion control frequency is. If the value set for this parameter is too small, the
Iub congestion control frequency is rather high, which is easy to cause the ping-pang effect.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, modify it through MOD
NODEBALGOPARA, and query it through LST NODEBALGOPARA .
11.3.5 Iub Congestion Factors

These parameters are Iub factors used to apply the Iub bandwidth when different services set
up.
Parameter ID
GeneralCommChFactor
CMBCommChFactor
MBMSCommChFactor
SRBFactor
TelephonyFactor
R99ConvFactor
R99StreamFactor
R99InterFactor
R99BkgrndFactor
HsdpaStreamFactor
HsdpaInterFactor
HsdpaBkgrndFactor
HsupaStreamFactor
HsupaInterFactor
HsupaBkgrndFactor
Value Range
1 to 100

1% to 100%, step 1%
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
11-11
RAN
Parameter Setting
These parameters are set according to the congestion condition. The default values are as listed
in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4 Iub Congestion Factor Configuration
Parameter Name
Parameter ID
Default Value
General common channel

factor[%]
GeneralCommChFactor
70%
CMB common channel

factor[%]
CMBCommChFactor
100%
MBMS common channel

factor[%]
MBMSCommChFactor
100%
SRB factor[%]
SRBFactor
50%
Telephony factor[%]
TelephonyFactor
70%
R99 conversation service

factor[%]
R99ConvFactor
100%
R99 streaming service factor

[%]
R99StreamFactor
100%
R99 interactive service factor

[%]
R99InterFactor
50%
R99 background service

factor[%]
R99BkgrndFactor
50%
HSDPA streaming service

factor[%]
HsdpaStreamFactor
100%
HSDPA interactive service

factor[%]
HsdpaInterFactor
100%
HSDPA background service

factor[%]
HsdpaBkgrndFactor
100%
HSUPA streaming service

factor[%]
HsupaStreamFactor
100%
HSUPA interactive service

factor[%]
HsupaInterFactor
100%
HSUPA background service

factor[%]
HsupaBkgrndFactor
100%

Services feature should be considered when setting these parameters.
11-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
If these parameters are greater, the applied Iub bandwidth is big, but part of Iub bandwidth
maybe wasted.
If they are lower, the Iub bandwidth is congested and the service quality is poor.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameters through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query them through LST
NODEBALGOPARA, and modify them through MOD NODEBALGOPARA.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
11-13
RAN
12
Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT
About This Chapter

The parameters configured on the NodeB LMT described here mainly consist of the HSDPA
flow control parameters, the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPA
MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPA power control parameters and the local
cell management parameters.
12.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA flow control parameters are listed here.
12.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters are listed here.
The HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the NodeB LMT are
listed here.
12.4 HSUPA Power Control Parameters
HSUPA power control parameters include power control algorithm switches for downlink
control channel, fixed and dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters.
12.5 Local Cell Management Parameters
The local cell management parameters consist of cell radius and cell handover radius.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-1
RAN
12.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters

The common configurable HSDPA flow control parameters are listed here.
Table 12-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters
N
o.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
FlowControlAlgori
thmSwitch
HSDPA
bandwidth
adjustment
switch
AUTO_ADJUST
_
FLOW_CTRLpat
h
FrameDiscardRate
Threshold
Frame discard
rate threshold
on Iub interface
0.1%
DlTrDelayJitterThl
dBase
Time delay
threshold
4 (8 ms)
Set the parameter

throughSET
HSDPAFLOWCTRLP
ARA (BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,BBU3806C),
and query it through LST
HSDPAFLOWCTRLP
ARA (BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,
BBU3806C).
12.1.1 HSDPA Bandwidth Adjustment Switch

This parameter difines the NodeB flow control scheme. It decides whether the congestion control
is implemented on RNC or on the NodeB.
12.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface
This parameter defines the frame discard rate on the Iub interface, that is the packet discard rate
due to code error when the transport network is idle. If the discard rate measured at the receiver
exceeds the threshold, then it is judged that the Iub interface is congested. Otherwise, it is
regarded as packet discarded due to code error other than congestion.
12.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface
This parameter defines the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less
busy. The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds the
threshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other than
congestion.
12.1.1 HSDPA Bandwidth Adjustment Switch

This parameter difines the NodeB flow control scheme. It decides whether the congestion control
is implemented on RNC or on the NodeB.
Parameter ID
FlowControlAlgorithmSwitch
Value Range
SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL, NO_FLOW_CTRL
12-2
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

SIMPLE_FLOW_CTR: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied by
R99 users, traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is taken
into account.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRLNode: Based on the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,
traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are taken
into account.
NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration or
delay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on the
Uu interface reported by the NodeB.
Parameter Setting
This parameter should be configured according to concrete scenarios, and is set to
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL by default.

This parameter helps implement the end to end congestion control when HSDPA data is
transmitted on Iub interface, thus the Iub bandwidth utilization rate is improved and the
transmission reliability is enhanced. The switch is set to OPEN by default.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter throughSET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C), and query it through LST
HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806,
BBU3806C).
12.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface

This parameter defines the frame discard rate on the Iub interface, that is the packet discard rate
due to code error when the transport network is idle. If the discard rate measured at the receiver
exceeds the threshold, then it is judged that the Iub interface is congested. Otherwise, it is
regarded as packet discarded due to code error other than congestion.
Parameter ID
FrameDiscardRateThreshold
Value Range
Integer [0 to 1000]

0 to 1, step is 0.001
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0.001 when the Iub interface adopts ATM networking.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-3
RAN
When the Iub interface adopts IP networking, it is set to the discard target of the IP transmission
network.

If the parameter is set too low, the dynamic adjustment algorithm may judge the frames discarded
due to the network code error as congestion, thus decreases the bandwidth utilization rate. If the
threshold is set too high, the sensitivity to clear Iub congestion decreases.
Relevant Commands
BBU3806C).
12.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface

This parameter defines the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is less
busy. The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds the
threshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other than
congestion.
Parameter ID
DlTrDelayJitterThldBase
Value Range
Integer [0 to 100]

0 ms to 100 ms, step is 1 ms
Parameter Setting
The parameter setting consisits of two parts: the time delay of Iub transport network + 10 ms
l
Part one:
The transmission delay period while data is transmitted on HS-DSCH, which consists of
the delay of data buffering in each processing unit and the delay of transmission through
the network. The time delay of ATM transmission network differs from that of the IP
transmission network. It is recommended to send data frames when the network is less
busy, and get the transmission delay differences among labeled samples at the NodeB
receiver. (The NodeB with enhanced performance can get the time delay of data frame
transmission.)
But there is no test result at present, and it is arranged for the time being as follows:
For Iub interface with ATM networking: 0 ms;
For Iub interface with IP networking: the time delay target of IP transport network.
12-4
Part two, the 10 ms:

Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
According to HS-DSCH INTERVAL (10 ms to 80 ms), when a data frame is transmitted

in a network not congested, the transmission delay may be up to 80 ms, but we take the
minimum value 10 ms as a benchmark.

If the threshold is set too low, the regular time delay of Iub interface transmission may be
considered that Iub congestion happens, reducing the Iub bandwidth utilization rate. If the
parameter is set too high, it is not easy to clear the congestion decreases, and the Iub transmission
delay may be increased.
Relevant Commands
BBU3806C).
12.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters are listed here.
Table 12-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
N
o.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
Relevant Command
RSCALLOCM
Resource
allocate
method, 0:
code priority
(applied in
power-limited
macro cells); 1:
power priority
(applied in
code-limited
micro cells)
Set the parameter

throughSET
MACHSPARA
(BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,
BBU3806C), and query it
through LST
MACHSPARA
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,
BBU3806C).
SM
Scheduling
method (EPF,
PF, RR,
MAXCI)
EPF
MXRETRAN
Maximum
retransmission
count
PWRMGN
Power margin
5 (5%)
SCCHPWRCM
HS-SCCH
power control
method
0 (adaptive power
control based on
CQI)
12-5
RAN
12-6
N
o.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
SCCHPWR
When the HSSCCH power is

controlled by
fixed
configuration,
this parameter
is the fixed
power value of
HS-SCCH;
when the HSSCCH adopts
the adaptive
power control
based on CQI,
this parameter
is the HSSCCH initial
transmit
power. The
value is an
offset in dB
relevant to the
transmit power
of PCPICH.
28 (3dB), step is
0.25
SCCHFER
Target FER of
HS-SCCH
power control.
If the measured
HS-SCCH
FER is greater
than the target
FER, raise the
transmit power
of HS-SCCH,
otherwise
lower transmit
power of HSSCCH.
10 (1%), step is
0.25
Relevant Command
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
N
o.
Parameter ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default Value
IBLER
When the
0 (the CQI
initial BLER
adjustment is
exceeds the
closed)
target BLER,
raise the
transmit power
of HS-PDSCH,
otherwise,
lower the
transmit power
of HS-PDSCH.
RSCLMSW
Resource
limiting
switch, 0:
Open; 1: Close
OPEN
10
DYNCODESW
Dynamic code
switch
OPEN
11
16QAMSW
16QAM switch
OPEN
12
CQIFA
CQI filter
Alpha
0 (no filter)
13
SPIGBR
GBR for SPI

(kbit/s)
See the table
14
SPIWEIGHT
Weight of SPI
(%)
See the table
15
SPIRSCRATIO
Resource
limiting ratio
for SPI,
available only
when the
resource
limiting switch
is on
See the table
Relevant Command
Set the parameter through

SET MACHSSPIPARA
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,
BBU3806C), and query it
through LST
MACHSSPIPARA
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,
BBU3806C).
12.2.1 Resource Allocate Method

Resource allocate method, 0: code priority (applied in power-limited macro cells); 1: power
priority (applied in code-limited micro cells).
12.2.2 Scheduling Method
This parameter defines the scheduling method of MAC-hs.
12.2.3 Maximum Retransmission Count
This parameter defines the maximum retransmission count of the MAC-hs HARQ process.
12.2.4 Power Margin
This parameter defines the power margin for DCH when the HSDPA adopts the dynamic power
control.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-7
RAN
12.2.5 HS-SCCH Power Control Method

This parameter sets the power control method of HS-SCCH.
12.2.6 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power
When the HS-SCCH power is controlled by fixed configuration, this parameter is the fixed power
value of HS-SCCH; when the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, this
parameter is the HS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the
transmit power of PCPICH.
12.2.7 Target HS-SCCH FER
This parameter is the target FER of HS-SCCH power control. When the measured FER is greater
than the target FER, raise the transmit power of HS-SCCH, otherwise, lower the transmit power
of HS-SCCH.
12.2.8 Initial BLER of Data Transfer
When the initial BLER exceeds the target BLER, raise the transmit power of HS-PDSCH,
otherwise, lower the transmit power of HS-PDSCH.
12.2.9 Resource Limiting Switch
This is the resource limiting switch. It decides whether to restrain a single user's maximum
resource usage in a congested cell.
12.2.10 HSDPA Dynamic Code Switch
This parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA dynamic code switch controlled by NodeB.
12.2.11 16QAM Switch
This parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA 16QAM switch controlled by NodeB.
12.2.12 CQI Filter Alpha
The CQI reported from UE is taken into the filtering processing within the NodeB to get a stable
value.
12.2.13 GBR for SPI
Services with different SPIs are configured with different GBRs.
12.2.14 Weight for SPI
This parameter is used when users are in priority compositor.
12.2.15 Resource Limiting Ratio for SPI
This parameter defines the maximum power resource ratio for different SPIs when the cell is in
congestion state.
12.2.1 Resource Allocate Method

Resource allocate method, 0: code priority (applied in power-limited macro cells); 1: power
priority (applied in code-limited micro cells).
Parameter ID
RSCALLOCM
Value Range
0, 1
12-8
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

0, 1
Parameter Setting
0

Under the power limited circumstances, the code is firstly allocated to save power resources for
other users; while the code is limited, firstly allocate the power to save code resources for other
users.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter throughSET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,
BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).
12.2.2 Scheduling Method

This parameter defines the scheduling method of MAC-hs.
Parameter ID
SM
Value Range
EPF, PF, RR, MAXCI

EPF (Enhanced PF, PF based on GBR), PF, RR (Round Robin), MAXCI (MAX C/I)
Parameter Setting
The default setting is EPF.

RR (Round Robin): the network schedule each user in turn without considering user's CQI. The
cell thoughput is poor;
MAX C/I: Users with high CQI are considered with priority, that is, user with the highest C/I
can get the service. The Max C/I scheduling method provides the highest cell throughput and
frequency utilization rate with the sacrifice of user fairness. Users with low CQI do not have the
chance to transfer data. So from users' point, this scheduling method is of the least fairness;
PF: the current available data transmission rate and the history rate are both in consideration.
Thus, users with nice CQI and users with a long waiting history will be taken into account at the
same time. This is a compromise of cell throughput priority and user fairness priority methods.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-9
RAN
EPF: The SPI of user, the GBR configured, the current service rate and CQI are all taken into
account. This method is relatively prior to the above ones on the aspect of fairness for users and
system capacity.
Relevant Commands
12.2.3 Maximum Retransmission Count

This parameter defines the maximum retransmission count of the MAC-hs HARQ process.
Parameter ID
MXRETRAN
Value Range
0 to 10

0 to 10 times
Parameter Setting
4

If the parameter is set too low, it is more likely for the MAC-hs to discard packets when network
quality is poor. Then the RLC retransmission is required to ensure the data transmitted correctly,
thus the data transmission delay is increased. If it is set too high, the queue may be blocked due
to some packets retransmitted frequently.
Relevant Commands
12.2.4 Power Margin

This parameter defines the power margin for DCH when the HSDPA adopts the dynamic power
control.
Parameter ID
PWRMGN
12-10
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%
Parameter Setting
5

It is a power margin allocated for DCH, and is available only when the HSDPA adopts the
dynamic power control algorithm. If it is set overly great, the power may be wasted. If it is set
too low, the power control requirements of DCH may not be met.
Relevant Commands
12.2.5 HS-SCCH Power Control Method

This parameter sets the power control method of HS-SCCH.
Parameter ID
SCCHPWRCM
Value Range
0, 1

0 means the adaptive power control based on CQI; 1 means the HS-SCCH power is fixed.
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0, that is, the adaptive power control based on CQI.

The HS-SCCH power control has a significant effect on data transmission.
l
If the HS-SCCH power is overly allotted, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases,
and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
If the HS-SCCH power is allotted insufficiently, the HS-SCCH decoding failure increases,
and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-11
RAN
Relevant Commands
On the NodeB LMT, set it through SET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSPARA
(BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).
12.2.6 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power

When the HS-SCCH power is controlled by fixed configuration, this parameter is the fixed power
value of HS-SCCH; when the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, this
parameter is the HS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to the
transmit power of PCPICH.
Parameter ID
SCCHPWR
Value Range
0 to 80

-10 dB to 10 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is 28, that is -3 dB. The step is 0.25 dB.

l
When the HS-SCCH power is configured to a fixed value, if the HS-SCCH power is overly
allotted, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases, and the cell throughout and user
throughout declines; if the HS-SCCH power is allotted insufficiently, the HS-SCCH
decoding failure increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
When the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, if this parameter is
set too high, the HS-SCCH power is wasted before the power control takes effect; if the
parameter is set too low, the HS-SCCH decoding failure increases before the power control
takes effect, weakening the data transmission performance.
Relevant Commands
12.2.7 Target HS-SCCH FER

This parameter is the target FER of HS-SCCH power control. When the measured FER is greater
than the target FER, raise the transmit power of HS-SCCH, otherwise, lower the transmit power
of HS-SCCH.
12-12
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter ID
SCCHFER
Value Range
1 to 999

1% to 99.9%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 10, namely 1%.

l
When the HS-SCCH power is configured to a fixed value, if the HS-SCCH power is overly
allotted, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases, and the cell throughout and user
throughout declines; if the HS-SCCH power is allotted insufficiently, the HS-SCCH
decoding failure increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.
When the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, if this parameter is
set too high, the HS-SCCH power is wasted before the power control takes effect; if the
parameter is set too low, the HS-SCCH decoding failure increases before the power control
takes effect, weakening the data transmission performance.
Relevant Commands
12.2.8 Initial BLER of Data Transfer

When the initial BLER exceeds the target BLER, raise the transmit power of HS-PDSCH,
otherwise, lower the transmit power of HS-PDSCH.
Parameter ID
IBLER
Value Range
1 to 50

1% to 50%, step 1%
Parameter Setting
The default value is 10 (10%).
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-13
RAN

If the IBLER is too high, retransmission is more probable, and delay increases. Otherwise,
retransmission is less probable, and power efficiency declines. When the power is not restricted
by scenarios, lower IBLER to increase effective throughput rate.
Relevant Commands
12.2.9 Resource Limiting Switch

This is the resource limiting switch. It decides whether to restrain a single user's maximum
resource usage in a congested cell.
Parameter ID
RSCLMSW
Value Range
0/1

OPEN/CLOSE
Parameter Setting
0 (OPEN)

If the switch is closed, it is likely to occur that a vast majority of the cell resources are taken up
by users with high priority but poor CQI.
Relevant Commands
12.2.10 HSDPA Dynamic Code Switch

This parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA dynamic code switch controlled by NodeB.
Parameter ID
DYNCODESW
12-14
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE

OPEN, CLOSE
Parameter Setting
The HSDPA dynamic code makes the physical layer channel codes be fully utilized. It is
suggested that the switch be set to OPEN all the time.

The HSDPA dynamic code makes the physical layer channel codes be fully utilized, but it will
not exceed the code number defined with the HSDPA license.
Relevant Commands
On the NodeB LMT, set the parameter through SET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E,
BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST
MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).
12.2.11 16QAM Switch

This parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA 16QAM switch controlled by NodeB.
Parameter ID
16QAMSW
Value Range
OPEN, CLOSE

OPEN, CLOSE
Parameter Setting
A high thoughput can be guaranteed with the HSDPA 16QAM switch open. It is suggested that
the switch be open all the time.

A high throughput can be guaranteed with the HSDPA 16QAM switch open. It is suggested that
the switch be open all the time.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-15
RAN
Relevant Commands
12.2.12 CQI Filter Alpha

The CQI reported from UE is taken into the filtering processing within the NodeB to get a stable
value.
Parameter ID
CQIFA
Value Range
0 to 99

0% to 99%, step is 1%
Parameter Setting
The default setting is 0 (0%).
The filtering adopts the following method:
where, a is the CQIFA, if a is set to 0, the CQI filter algorithm switch is closed.

The higher the CQIFA, the value after filtering is more stable. The lower the CQIFA is, the value
change after filtering is more apparent. If the CQIFA is set to 0, the CQI filter algorithm switch
is closed.
Relevant Commands
12.2.13 GBR for SPI

Services with different SPIs are configured with different GBRs.
Parameter ID
SPIGBR
12-16
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
0 to 16777215

0 to 16777215 bit/s
Parameter Setting
Table 12-3 shows the parameter setting.
Table 12-3 GBR, weight and resource limiting ratio for SPI
SPINo
SPIGBR
SPIWEIGHT
SPIRSCRATIO
64
80
15
64
80
15
64
80
15
64
80
15
64
80
15
64
80
15
64
90
15
64
100
15
64
100
15
64
100
15
10
64
100
15
11
64
80
15
12
64
80
15
13
128
90
20
14
256
100
25
15
128
100
20

This parameter is configured to spare more service resources for high priority users.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter through SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,
BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E,
BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-17
RAN
12.2.14 Weight for SPI

This parameter is used when users are in priority compositor.
Parameter ID
SPIWEIGHT
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%
Parameter Setting
See List of GBR, weight and resource limiting ratio for SPI

This parameter is configured to make more scheduling chances for high priority users.
Relevant Commands
12.2.15 Resource Limiting Ratio for SPI

This parameter defines the maximum power resource ratio for different SPIs when the cell is in
congestion state.
Parameter ID
SPIRSCRATIO
Value Range
0 to 100

0 to 100%
Parameter Setting
Refer to the maximum transmit power for a single link when the GBR is the same as the bearing
rate of R99 services. Huawei's current benchmark for maximum transmit power of a single link
is as follows: -8 dB (1.6%) for 8 kbit/s, -6 dB (2.5%) for 16 kbit/s, -2 dB (6.3%) for 64 kbit/s,
0 dB (10%) for 128 kbit/s, 2 dB (15.8%) for 256 kbit/s and 4 dB (25%) for 384 kbit/s.
12-18
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

The resource limiting ratio decides the maximum rate a user can get at the edge of a cell. This
parameter is configured to have more resources allocated to high priority users.
Relevant Commands

The HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the NodeB LMT are
listed here.
Table 12-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters
N
o.
Parameter ID
Parameter Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
AGTHRESHOL
D
If the SG of requested rates

and that of current rates are
greater than this threshold,
then the AG can be sent to
the UE.
RAVGINITVA
LUE
It is the initial value of

calculated average rate.
16 kbit/s
GbrEnable
If the switch is on, whether

the user real rate is GBR
rate needs to be affirmed
during the GBR user
scheduling. The scheduling
algorithm ensures the GBR
rate for GBR users without
considering the uplink load.
OPEN
On the NodeB LMT, set

the parameter
throughSET
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,
BBU3806C), and query
it through LST
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,BBU3806C
).
WSPI
Sort SPI switch
OPEN
WRATE
Sort rate weight
0.5
WRSN
Sort rate RSN weight
0.5
12.3.1 AG Threshold
If the SG of requested rates and that of current rates are greater than this threshold, then the AG
can be sent to the UE.
12.3.2 Average Rate Initial Value
It is the initial value of calculated average rate.
12.3.3 GBR Schedule Switch
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-19
RAN
If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR rate needs to be affirmed during the GBR
user scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensures the GBR rate for GBR users without
12.3.4 Sort Rate Weight
This is the weight of rate for priority calculation.
12.3.5 Sort Rate RSN Weight
This parameter is the RSN weight for priority calculation.
12.3.1 AG Threshold
If the SG of requested rates and that of current rates are greater than this threshold, then the AG
can be sent to the UE.
Parameter ID
AGTHRESHOLD
Value Range
0 to 31

0 to 31
Parameter Setting

If the RG is satisfied to the SI request of UE, setting the AG threshold can decrease the resource
occupation of AGCH channel.
l
If the AG threshold is too low, it increases the occupation on AGCH channel, and the power
consumption is greater than that of RGCH channel.
If the AG threshold is too high, the UE data rate increases more slowly.
Relevant Commands
On the NodeB LMT, set or modify this parameter through SET MACEPARA (BTS3812E,
BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACEPARA
12.3.2 Average Rate Initial Value

It is the initial value of calculated average rate.
Parameter ID
RAVGINITVALUE
12-20
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
0 to 1400

0 to 1400 kbit/s
Parameter Setting

Whether this parameter is too high or too low, the real rate has little effect on the average rate.
Relevant Commands
12.3.3 GBR Schedule Switch

If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR rate needs to be affirmed during the GBR
user scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensures the GBR rate for GBR users without
Parameter ID
GBREnable
Value Range
0, 1

OPEN, CLOSE
Parameter Setting
The default value is OPEN.

If the GBR switch is OPEN, the RNC overload control is needed to be configured as an action
which can be triggered by RTWP measurement value.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-21
RAN
Relevant Commands
12.3.4 Sort Rate Weight

This is the weight of rate for priority calculation.
Parameter ID
WRATE
Value Range
0 to 10

0 to 1
Parameter Setting
5

This parameter is used to calculate the UE priority. If it is set too low, the influence the rate has
on priority may be weakened. If it is set too high, the RSN's influence is weakened.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter throughSET MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,
BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).
12.3.5 Sort Rate RSN Weight

This parameter is the RSN weight for priority calculation.
Parameter ID
WRSN
Value Range
0 to 10

0 to 1
12-22
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Parameter Setting
5

This parameter is used to calculate the UE priority. If it is set too low, the influence from RSN
on the priority may be weakened. If it is set too high, then influence from the rate may be
weakened.
Relevant Commands
Set the parameter throughSET MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,
BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).
12.4 HSUPA Power Control Parameters

HSUPA power control parameters include power control algorithm switches for downlink
control channel, fixed and dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters.
12.4.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for Downlink Control Channel
The common configurable HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control
channel are listed here.
12.4.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable HSUPA fixed power control mode algorithm parameters are listed
here.
12.4.3 Dynamic Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters
The common configurable HSUPA dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters are listed
here.
12.4.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for Downlink Control

Channel
The common configurable HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink control
channel are listed here.
Table 12-5 List of power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
EAGCHPC
MOD
E-AGCH
HPC mode
FIXED
NodeB
SERGCHPC
MOD
E-RGCH
HPC mode
for service
radio links
FIXED
Set or modify:SET
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,
BBU3806C)
12-23
RAN
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant
Command
Level
NSERGCH
PCMOD
E-RGCH
HPC mode
for nonservice radio
links
FIXED
SEHICHPC
MOD
E-HICH HPC
mode for
service radio
links
FIXED
Query:LST
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,
BBU3806C)
NSEHICHP
CMOD
E-HICH HPC
mode for nonservice radio
links
FIXED
12.4.1.1 E-AGCH HPC Mode

This is the E-AGCH channel power control algorithm switch. If it is FIXED, the transmission
power is set according to P-CPICH power and fixed power offset; if it is DYNAMIC, the
transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.
12.4.1.2 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links
It is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If it is FIXED, the
transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it is
DYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.
12.4.1.3 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links
It is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If it is FIXED, the
12.4.1.4 E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links
It is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that contains serving RL. If it is FIXED,
the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it is
12.4.1.5 E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links
It is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that does not contain serving RL. If it is
FIXED, the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if
it is DYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.
E-AGCH HPC Mode

This is the E-AGCH channel power control algorithm switch. If it is FIXED, the transmission
power is set according to P-CPICH power and fixed power offset; if it is DYNAMIC, the
transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.
Parameter ID
EAGCHPCMOD
12-24
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC

Fixed, Dynamic
Parameter Setting
This parameter has not been optimized, the value FIXED is suggested.

Fixed power control mode is easy to realize, but it may waste NodeB transmission power. If the
dynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if the parameter
is set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement may not be
satisfied.
Relevant Commands
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

It is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If it is FIXED, the
Parameter ID
SERGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC

Fixed, Dynamic
Parameter Setting

satisfied.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-25
RAN
Relevant Commands
E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

It is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If it is FIXED, the
Parameter ID
NSERGCHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC

Fixed, Dynamic
Parameter Setting

satisfied.
Relevant Commands
E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

It is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that contains serving RL. If it is FIXED,
the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it is
Parameter ID
SEHICHPCMOD
12-26
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC

Fixed, Dynamic
Parameter Setting

satisfied.
Relevant Commands
E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

It is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that does not contain serving RL. If it is
FIXED, the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if
it is DYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.
Parameter ID
NSEHICHPCMOD
Value Range
FIXED, DYNAMIC

Fixed, Dynamic
Parameter Setting

satisfied.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-27
RAN
Relevant Commands
12.4.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable HSUPA fixed power control mode algorithm parameters are listed
here.
Table 12-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
EAGCHPO
WER
E-AGCH
power
-132, that
is, -13.2
dB
NodeB
SERGCHPO
WER
E-RGCH
power for
service radio
links
-210, that
is, -21 dB
NSERGCHP
OWER
E-RGCH
power for nonservice radio
links
-173, that
is, -17.3
dB
SEHICHPO
WER
E-HICH power
for service
radio links
-197, that
is, -19.7
dB
Set or modify:SET
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,
BBU3806C)
Query:LST
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,
BBU3806C)
NSEHICHPO
WER
E-HICH power
for non-service
radio links
-136, that
is, -13.6
dB
12.4.2.1 E-AGCH Power

It is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the fixed power control mode.
12.4.2.2 E-RGCH Power for Service Radio Links
It is the RGCH power offset of EDCH serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in the
fixed power control mode.
12.4.2.3 E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio Links
It is the RGCH power offset of EDCH non-serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in the
12.4.2.4 E-HICH Power for Service Radio Links
It is the HICH power offset of RLS that contains the serving RL compared to the P-CPICH
power in the fixed power control mode.
12.4.2.5 E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links
It is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the PCPICH power in the fixed power control mode.
12-28
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
E-AGCH Power
It is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the fixed power control mode.
Parameter ID
EAGCHPOWER
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting
The default value is -132, that is, -13.2 dB.

l
If this parameter is too low, the demodulation performance of AGCH channel cannot satisfy
the demodulation requirement.
If this parameter is too high, the NodeB transmission power is wasted too much.
Relevant Commands
E-RGCH Power for Service Radio Links

Parameter ID
SERGCHPOWER
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting
The default value is -210, that is, -21 dB.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-29
RAN

l
Relevant Commands
E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio Links

Parameter ID
NSERGCHPOWER
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting

l
Relevant Commands
E-HICH Power for Service Radio Links

power in the fixed power control mode.
Parameter ID
SEHICHPOWER
12-30
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting

l
Relevant Commands
E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links

It is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the PCPICH power in the fixed power control mode.
Parameter ID
NSEHICHPOWER
Value Range
-350 to 150

Parameter Setting

l
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-31
RAN
Relevant Commands
12.4.3 Dynamic Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters

The common configurable HSUPA dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters are listed
here.
Table 12-7 List of dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters
No.
Parameter
ID
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
Level
EAGCHPW
ROFFSET
E-AGCH
power offset
142, that
is, -3.5
dB
NodeB
SERGCHPW
ROFFSET
E-RGCH
power offset
for service
radio links
100, that
is, -7 dB
NSERGCHP
WROFFSET
E-RGCH
power offset
links
105, that
is, -5.75
dB
SEHICHPW
ROFFSET
E-HICH
power offset
for service
radio links
96, that
is, -8 dB
Set or modify:SET
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,
BBU3806C)
Query:LST
MACEPARA
(BTS3812E,
BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE,
BBU3806,
BBU3806C)
NSEHICHP
WROFFSET
E-HICH
power offset
links
116, that
is, -3 dB
12.4.3.1 E-AGCH Power Offset

It is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the dynamic power control
mode.
12.4.3.2 E-RGCH Power Offset for Service Radio Links
dynamic power control mode.
12.4.3.3 E-RGCH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio Links
12.4.3.4 E-HICH Power Offset for Service Radio Links
12-32
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
power in the dynamic power control mode.
12.4.3.5 E-HICH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio Links
It is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the PCPICH power in the dynamic power control mode.
E-AGCH Power Offset

It is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the dynamic power control
mode.
Parameter ID
EAGCHPWROFFSET
Value Range
0 to 255

-32 dB to 31.75 dB, step 0.25 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is 142, that is, 3.5 dB.

l
Relevant Commands
E-RGCH Power Offset for Service Radio Links

Parameter ID
SERGCHPWROFFSET
Value Range
0 to 255
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-33
RAN

-32 dB to 31.75 dB, step 0.25 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is 100, that is, -7 dB.

l
Relevant Commands
E-RGCH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio Links

Parameter ID
NSERGCHPWROFFSET
Value Range
0 to 255

-32 dB to 31.75 dB, step 0.25 dB
Parameter Setting
The default value is 105, that is, -5.75 dB.

l
Relevant Commands
12-34
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN
E-HICH Power Offset for Service Radio Links

power in the dynamic power control mode.
Parameter ID
SEHICHPWROFFSET
Value Range
0 to 255

-32 dB to 31.75 dB, step 0.25 dB
Parameter Setting

l
Relevant Commands
E-HICH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio Links

It is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the PCPICH power in the dynamic power control mode.
Parameter ID
NSEHICHPWROFFSET
Value Range
0 to 255

-32 dB to 31.75 dB, step 0.25 dB
Parameter Setting
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-35
RAN

l
Relevant Commands
12.5 Local Cell Management Parameters

The local cell management parameters consist of cell radius and cell handover radius.
Table 12-8 List of local cell management parameters
N Parameter
o ID
.
Parameter
Meaning
Default
Value
Relevant Command
RADIUS
Cell radius
29 km
HORAD
Cell handover
radius
0m
On the NodeB LMT, set the parameter

through MOD LOCELL (BTS3812E,
BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806,
BBU3806C), and qurey it through LST
LOCELL (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
12.5.1 Cell Radius

This parameter describes the radius of a NodeB cell. Cell radius affects the demodulation of the
uplink board and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.
12.5.2 Cell Handover Radius
This parameter describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB
console.
12.5.1 Cell Radius

This parameter describes the radius of a NodeB cell. Cell radius affects the demodulation of the
uplink board and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.
Parameter ID
RAD
Value Range
150 to 180000
12-36
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
RAN

150 m to 180 km, with step length as 1 m
Parameter Setting
The default value is 29000, which stands for 29 km.
You can set and adjust a value for this parameter based on the network planning and network
optimization result. In case the cell radius cannot be determined precisely, the set cell radius
must be greater than the required cell radius. The set cell radius, however, should be properly
great. Otherwise, the extra network resources are wasted and the system processing delay occurs.
Based on the data provided by relevant products, the handover synchronization time increases
by a maximum of 60 ms if the cell radius changes its value in increments of 3.75 km.
CAUTION
l
When using the RRU, you must set the sum of the cell radius and the fiber transmission
delay as the cell radius.
If the access board of the NodeB is configured to support multiple sectors, the maximum
of the configurable cell radius is 30 km.

The setting of this parameter must be the same as the result of network planning.
Relevant Commands
On the NodeB LMT, set the parameter through MOD LOCELL (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C) and query it through LST LOCELL (BTS3812E,
12.5.2 Cell Handover Radius

This parameter describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeB
console.
Parameter ID
HORAD
Value Range
0 to 180000

0 to 18 km, with step length as 1 m.
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)
12-37
RAN
Parameter Setting
The default value is 0. The inner radius of a cell handover radius must be at least 78.125 m, that
is, 1 chip, shorter than the cell radius.
You can set and adjust a value for this parameter based on network planning and network
optimization result. In case the cell handover range cannot be determined precisely, the value
set for the cell handover radius must be smaller than the minimum cell handover radius required
for network planning. The set value, however, should be properly small. Otherwise, the system
processing delay may occur.
CAUTION
When using the RRU, you must set the sum of the actual cell handover radius and the fiber
transmission delay as the cell handover radius.

If the value set for this parameter exceeds the planned value range of a cell, the NodeB fails to
handle the users on the radius smaller than the set value. This results in that the actual handover
range is smaller than the planned one.
Relevant Commands
On the NodeB LMT, set the parameter through MOD LOCELL (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,
BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C) and query it through LST LOCELL (BTS3812E,
12-38
Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference RAN6 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference RAN6 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RAN

Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Copyright 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Item.....................................................................................................2-20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

2.5 Blind Handover Management Parameters.....................................................................................................2-63

3 Admission Control Parameters................................................................................................3-1

4 Load Control Parameters..........................................................................................................4-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters.......................................................................................5-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

5.4.2 DCH to FACH / FACH to PCH State Transition Traffic 4B Threshold..............................................5-23

6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters.............................................................................................6-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

6.4.4 N312 and T312.....................................................................................................................................6-16

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

9.1 MBMS Admission and Load Control Parameters...........................................................................................9-2

11 Transmission Resource Management Parameters...........................................................11-1

12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT............................................................................12-1

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

12.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface................................................................................12-3

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters.............................................................9-2

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Document

About This Document

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Document

optimization is also significant in network optimization. Handover parameters are described

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Document

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. For

Book titles are in italics.

Terminal display is in Courier New.

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Command arguments are in italic.

Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

About This Document

Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical

Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are in

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.

Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab.

Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+A

Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the two

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

1 Power Control Parameters

Power Control Parameters